1. Fanuc
  2. 30i/300i/300is-A,

30i/300i/300is-A, Programming manual Page 359

Programming manual
B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE
- 339 -
• Standard specification (applicable when the number of paths
to be controlled is three or less)
This message number consisting of 4 digits must always be
defined at the start of each message data. Using this four-
digit number, set the type and number of the message and the
CNC screen on which the message is to be displayed. The
CNC screen is as specified below by this message number.
Message
number
CNC screen Display contents
1000 to
1999
Alarm screen
(on path 1)
Alarm message
• Path 1 is placed in the alarm state.
2000 to
2099(*Note)
Operator message
2100 to
2999(*Note)
Operator
message
screen
Operator message (with no message
number)
5000 to
5999
Alarm screen
(on path 2)
Alarm message
• Path 2 is placed in the alarm state.
• The displayed message number is a
specified number from which 4000 is
subtracted.
7000 to
7999
Alarm screen
(on path 3)
Alarm message
• Path 3 is placed in the alarm state.
• The displayed message number is a
specified number from which 6000 is
subtracted.
NOTE
Normally, the number of the operator message with
the message number is 100 (2000 to 2099) and the
number of it without the message number is 900
(2100 to 2999). By setting into the CNC parameter
No. 6310 "The number of the operator message
with the message number", you can change the
number of it with the message number.
(Example)
400 is set into the CNC parameter No.6310
- 2000 to 2399 displaying with the number
- 2400 to 2999 displaying without the number
Previous page
Next page

Contents Summary of 30i/300i/300is-A, Programming manual

  • Page 1FANUC Series 30*/300*/300*s-MODEL A FANUC Series 31*/310*/310*s-MODEL A5 FANUC Series 31*/310*/310*s-MODEL A FANUC Series 32*/320*/320*s-MODEL A PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-63983EN/02
  • Page 2                                                            
  • Page 3B-63983EN/02 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety. Also, supplem
  • Page 4
  • Page 5B-63983EN/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS Volume 1 of 2 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE.................................s-1 1 OVERVIEW OF PMC ............................................................................. 1 1.1 WHAT IS PMC? .............................................
  • Page 6TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63983EN/02 1.5.1 Execution Order and Execution Time Percentage .................................................43 1.5.2 Setting I/O Address for I/O Link............................................................................45 1.5.3 Interface Between CNC and PMC ............
  • Page 7B-63983EN/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS 2.5 COMPATIBILITY WITH CONVENTIONAL MODELS................................ 122 2.5.1 Compatibility with the PMCs for the 16i/18i/21i-B ............................................122 2.5.2 Compatibility with the PMCs for the 15i-A/B ....................................
  • Page 8TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63983EN/02 4.1.6 AND Instruction...................................................................................................193 4.1.7 AND.NOT Instruction..........................................................................................194 4.1.8 OR Instruction .....
  • Page 9B-63983EN/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS 4.8.1 DIFU (Rising Edge Detection: SUB 57).............................................................273 4.8.2 DIFD (Falling Edge Detection: SUB 58) ............................................................275 4.8.3 EOR (Exclusive OR: SUB 59) .....................
  • Page 10TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63983EN/02 4.12.5 JMPB (Label Jump 1: SUB 68) ..........................................................................381 4.12.6 JMPC (Label Jump 2: SUB 73) ..........................................................................383 4.12.7 LBL (Label: SUB 69).................
  • Page 11B-63983EN/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS 5.4.12 Reading a Custom Macro Variable (High-speed Response)................................445 5.4.13 Writing a Custom Macro Variable (Low-speed Response) .................................447 5.4.14 Reading the CNC Alarm Status (High-speed Response) ..................
  • Page 12TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63983EN/02 5.5.13 Reading Load Information of the Spindle Motor (Serial Interface) (High-speed Response) ........................................................................................511 5.5.14 Reading the Estimate Disturbance Torque Data (High-speed Response)..........
  • Page 13B-63983EN/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS 5.6.19 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Compensation Number (2): Tool Order Number) (Low-speed Response).......................................................560 5.6.20 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Radius Compensation Number (1): Tool Number
  • Page 14TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63983EN/02 5.7.1 Moving (Exchanging) Tool Management Data Numbers in a Cartridge Management Table (Low-speed Response) .........................................................600 5.7.2 Searching for a Free Pot (Low-speed Response) ................................................
  • Page 15B-63983EN/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS 7.4 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT ([I/O] SCREEN) .................................................. 688 7.4.1 Writing to the Memory Card................................................................................691 7.4.2 Setting the Communication Port ([PORT SETING] Screen)..
  • Page 16TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63983EN/02 7.5 DISPLAYING I/O LINK CONNECTION STATUS ([I/O LINK] SCREEN) ... 745 7.6 TRACING AND DISPLAYING PMC SIGNAL STATUS ............................. 747 7.6.1 Signal Trace Function ([TRACE] Screen)...........................................................748 7.6.2 Setting
  • Page 17B-63983EN/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS 8.5.2 Operating on the Screen .......................................................................................852 8.6 FUNCTION TO REFERENCE ADDRESSES IN USE ............................... 855 8.6.1 Address Map Display Screen ....................................
  • Page 18TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63983EN/02 9.7.2 Communication Status .........................................................................................921 9.7.3 About Ethernet Communication Parameters........................................................923 9.7.4 About connection log of Ethernet .....
  • Page 19B-63983EN/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS 10.4 EXTENDED LADDER INSTRUCTIONS.................................................... 985 10.4.1 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION TRSET............................................................985 10.4.2 PMC ADDRESS (S ADDRESS) .................................................
  • Page 20
  • Page 21B-63983EN/02 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC 1 OVERVIEW OF PMC -1-
  • Page 221.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/02 1.1 WHAT IS PMC? The programmable machine controller (PMC) is a programmable controller (PC) built into a CNC to perform sequence control for a machine tool (spindle rotation, tool change, machine operator's panel control, and so on). Sequence control is to perform con
  • Page 23B-63983EN/02 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC 1.1.3 PMC Signal Addresses PMC signal addresses indicate the locations of I/O signals exchanged with the machine, I/O signals exchanged with the CNC, and signals for internal relays and data (PMC parameters) in nonvolatile memory. PMC addresses are roughly classified a
  • Page 241.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/02 Table 1.1.3 lists the address symbols and corresponding signals. Table 1.1.3 Address Symbols and signal types Symbol Signal type F Input signal from CNC to PMC (CNC → PMC) G Output signal from PMC to CNC (PMC → CNC) X Input signal from machine to PMC (MT → PMC) Y Outpu
  • Page 25B-63983EN/02 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC (5) Nonvolatile memory addresses The contents of these address locations are not erased even when the power is turned off. These addresses are used for management of the data items listed below. These data items are called PMC parameters. (a) Variable timer (T) (b) Cou
  • Page 261.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/02 1.2 WHAT IS LADDER LANGUAGE? The Ladder language is one of sequence programming languages. This programming language, which represents the sequence and logic operations of I/O signals by ladder diagrams, is widely used by sequence control engineers. This language is ma
  • Page 27B-63983EN/02 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC 1.2.2 Signal Name (Symbol Name) Symbol names representing I/O signal names can be assigned to PMC addresses. It is recommended that signal names (symbol names) suitable for I/O signals be assigned as explained below. (1) Signal names may consist of any alphanumeric cha
  • Page 281.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/02 1.2.4 Graphic Symbols of Relays and Coils Ladder diagrams use the following relay symbols: Relays (contacts) Instruction Function representation Normally open contact -| |- (contact A) Normally closed contact -|/ |- (contact B) Coils Instruction Function representation
  • Page 29B-63983EN/02 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC 1.2.6 Difference Between Relay Sequence Circuit and Ladder Sequence Program In general relay sequence circuits, because of a limited number of relay contacts, one contact may be shared by several relays to minimize the number of contacts used. Fig. 1.2.6 (a) gives an e
  • Page 301.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/02 1.2.7 SPECIFICATION OF EXTENDED SYMBOL AND COMMENT Using extended symbol and comment, you can use following functions. · Local symbols effective in sub programs · Extension of maximum character length of symbol and comment · Multi-language support of comment · Multiple
  • Page 31B-63983EN/02 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC (2) Extension of maximum character length of symbol and comment Maximum character length of a symbol and comment is extended as follows. So you can describe in details. Kind Extended type Former symbol 40 characters in 16 characters in maximum maximum comment 4 set 255
  • Page 321.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/02 (6) Available characters Those characters can be used. - Available characters for symbol : Kind Extended type Former The character A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, _ A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, _ that can be !”#&’()*+,.-<= >? Space, used as the @[/]^`{|}~;: !”#$%&’()*+,.-< symbol (
  • Page 33B-63983EN/02 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC 1.3 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATION PROCEDURE This section briefly explains how to create a program for providing sequence control for a machine tool by using the Ladder language as an example. When creating a sequence program, see the necessary manual for editing after unde
  • Page 341.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/02 1.3.3 Editing Sequence Program A sequence program in the Ladder language is edited with one of the following two methods: (1) PC programmer FANUC supplies FANUC LADDER-III as sequence program development software for FANUC PMC. Use of FANUC LADDER-III allows you to edi
  • Page 35B-63983EN/02 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC Table 1.3.3 Step No. Instruction Address No. & bit No. Remarks 1 RD F7.0 MF 2 OR F7.2 SF 3 OR F7.3 TF 4 RD.NOT.STK F7.0 MF 5 OR R211.7 MFIN 6 AND.STK 7 RD.NOT.STK F7.2 SF 8 OR R211.5 SFIN 9 AND.STK 10 RD.NOT.STK F7.3 TF 11 OR R211.6 TFIN 12 AND.STK 13 WRT G4.3 FIN Duri
  • Page 361.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/02 1.3.5 Checking Sequence Program After writing the sequence program in the flash ROM, check the sequence program. The sequence program can be checked in the following two ways: (1) Checking with a simulator Connect a simulator (consisting of lamps and switches) instead
  • Page 37B-63983EN/02 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC 1.4 EXECUTION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM Sequence programs in the Ladder language are executed in the order of instructions coded in the ladder diagrams. Fig. 1.4 shows how a sequence program is executed. Sequence program memory Sequence program input Control target such as m
  • Page 381.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/02 1.4.1 Execution Procedure of Sequence Program In general relay sequence circuits, relays operate at exactly the same time. This means that when relay A operates in the following figure, relays D and E operate at exactly the same time (when contacts B and C are both off
  • Page 39B-63983EN/02 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC (1) For relay sequence circuit (A) and (B) in Fig. 1.4.1 (b) operate in the same manner. When A (P.B) is turned on, current flows through coils B and C, turning on B and C simultaneously. After C is turned on (after relay operation time), B is turned off. (2) For PMC p
  • Page 401.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/02 1.4.3 Processing Priority (1st Level, 2nd Level, and 3rd Level) A sequence program consists of two operation parts: a high-speed sequence part called the 1st level, which is executed every several msec, and a normal sequence part called the 2nd level. When the model us
  • Page 41B-63983EN/02 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC As the amount of the 1st level sequence part increases, the amount of the 2nd level sequence portion executed within the ladder execution cycle decreases. As a result, the number of divisions n increases, which increases the overall execution time including the 2nd lev
  • Page 421.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/02 1.4.4 Structured Sequence Program Structured ladder coding has the following advantages: • Programming is easy to understand, therefore programming becomes easier. • Program errors can be found easily. • Troubleshooting can be done easily. 1.4.4.1 Implementation Three
  • Page 43B-63983EN/02 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC (3) Conditional branch The main program loops and determines conditions. If conditions are satisfied, a subprogram process is executed. If the conditions are not satisfied, the subprogram process is skipped. Application example (1) Example Suppose that there are four m
  • Page 441.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/02 (3) Program coding Machine workpiece. Machine workpiece. Move pallet. Pick up workpiece from pallet. Machine workpiece. Return workpiece to pallet. - 24 -
  • Page 45B-63983EN/02 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC Pick up workpiece from pallet. Ladder representation Ladder representation Machine workpiece. Ladder representation Return workpiece to pallet. Move pallet. Ladder representation - 25 -
  • Page 461.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/02 Specifications (1) Main program A ladder program consisting of the 1st ladder level and 2nd ladder level is called a main program. You can create just one main program. Subprogram calls from the 1st ladder level are not allowed. Any number of subprogram calls from the
  • Page 47B-63983EN/02 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC (4) Programming order when subprograms are used 1st level sequence part 2nd level sequence part 3rd level sequence part (only with model that can use 3rd level) Code subprograms after 2nd and 3rd levels. Subprograms End of sequence End of entire sequence program is pro
  • Page 481.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/02 1.4.4.2 Subprogramming and nesting Function A conditional call (or unconditional call) is coded in the main program, and the name of a subprogram to be executed is specified. In the subprogram, the subprogram name and a ladder sequence to be executed are coded. When a
  • Page 49B-63983EN/02 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC Execution method The main program is always active. Subprograms are active only when called by another program. In the following example, subprogram SUBPRO is called by signal A. Program cycle Signal A Main program Subprogram Management program Execution flow (1) A sub
  • Page 501.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/02 Creating a program After the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd level ladder programs, create subprograms in the similar manner. Creation example Be sure to code this. - 30 -
  • Page 51B-63983EN/02 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC Inhibit items (1) Subprograms are nested. (2) A subprogram is created within the 1st, 2nd, or 3rd level ladder program. - 31 -
  • Page 521.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/02 1.4.4.3 Notes on using subroutines (1) DISPB (2) EXIN (3) WINDR (low-speed type only) (4) WINDW (low-speed type only) (5) AXCTL For the above functional instructions, ACT = 1 must be held until transfer completion information (coil) is set to 1. When using these functi
  • Page 53B-63983EN/02 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC Example: A subprogram is called from two places. (When the WINDR instruction is used) Main program Subprogram 1 Subprogram 2 Set DATA1. Set DATA2. Explanation: Subprogram 1 controls ACT (A) and W1 (B) of WINDR (subprogram 2). The main program determines which data (C1
  • Page 541.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/02 1.4.5 Synchronization Processing of I/O Signals Signals input to the PMC include input signals from the CNC (such as M function and T function signals) and input signals from the machine (such as cycle start and feed hold signals). Signals output from the PMC include o
  • Page 55B-63983EN/02 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC Input signal processing (1) Input memory of the CNC Signals input from the CNC to PMC are set in the memory of the CNC and are normally transferred to the PMC at intervals of 4 or 8 msec. Since the 1st and 3rd level sequence parts directly reference and process these s
  • Page 561.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/02 Output signal processing (1) Output memory to the CNC Signals output from the PMC to CNC are set in the output memory of the CNC. Normally, the PMC transfers signals to the output memory of the CNC at intervals of 4 or 8 msec. (2) Output signals to the machine (DI/DO c
  • Page 57B-63983EN/02 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC Notes on programming asynchronous I/O signals Normal input signals from the CNC are transferred to the PMC at intervals of 4 or 8 msec. Normal output signals to the CNC are transferred from the PMC at intervals of 4 or 8 msec. Therefore, I/O signals exchanged with the
  • Page 581.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/02 Difference in signal status between 1st level and 2nd level sequence parts The status of the same input signal may become different between the 1st and 2nd level sequence parts. The 1st level sequence part uses the input signal memory for signal processing while the 2n
  • Page 59B-63983EN/02 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC 1st level 2nd level Fig. 1.4.5 (d) Fig. 1.4.5 (e) 1.4.6 Interlock In sequence control, considering how to provide an interlock is a key design issue from the safety point of view. Of course, an interlock must be provided by sequence programs. Furthermore, an interlock
  • Page 601.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/02 1.4.7 Notes on I/O Signals Updated by Other Than PMC I/O signals transmitted over networks (such as an Ethernet, I/O Link-II, PROFIBUS, DeviceNet, and FL-net) (signals assigned to addresses R, D, and E) are updated asynchronously with PMC sequence program execution. Si
  • Page 61B-63983EN/02 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC 1.5 MULTI-PMC FUNCTION The multi-PMC function allows one PMC system to execute multiple sequence programs at the same time. PMC memory for each sequence program is basically independent, and the same PMC address can be used for different purposes of the individual PMCs
  • Page 621.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/02 Fig. 1.5 (b) shows a configuration example. CNC PMC Machine 1st PMC Operator's control group panel for machine control, etc. (1) Peripheral 2nd PMC equipment, etc. Loader 3rd PMC Operator's control group panel for loader, etc. Fig. 1.5 (b) Multi-PMC function configurat
  • Page 63B-63983EN/02 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC 1.5.1 Execution Order and Execution Time Percentage For the multi-PMC function, the order of PMC execution and execution time percentages of the PMCs can be set with CNC parameters. Execution order If parameters related to the execution order are not set (0 is set), th
  • Page 641.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/02 An example of changing the execution order and execution time percentages by setting CNC parameters is explained below. In the following, sequence programs are executed in the order from the third PMC to the first PMC to the second PMC with the execution time percentag
  • Page 65B-63983EN/02 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC 1.5.2 Setting I/O Address for I/O Link The I/O addresses of I/O Link channels can be assigned with CNC parameters. If these parameters are not set (0 is set), all channels are assigned to the first PMC by default as follows: 1st PMC Channel 1 X/Y0 to X/Y127 Channel 2 X
  • Page 661.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/02 1.5.3 Interface Between CNC and PMC The PMC to control the interface between the CNC and PMC and PMC addresses (F/G addresses) can be set with CNC parameters. With these parameter settings, a desired interface control system can be built, in which the entire CNC-PMC in
  • Page 67B-63983EN/02 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC In the following example, F/G0 to F/G767 and F/G1000 to F/G1767 of the CNC are assigned to F/G0 to F/G767 and F/G1000 to F/G1767 of the first PMC, and F/G3000 to F/G3767 of the CNC are assigned to F/G0 to F/G767 of the second PMC: CNC 1st PMC F/G0 to F/G767 of CNC F/G0
  • Page 681.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/02 1.5.4 Multi-Path PMC Interface The multi-path PMC interface is the communication means between two PMC paths. Generally, Each path of multi-path PMC system has individual PMC memory space except E address. And, E address can be used to share data of multi-path PMC syst
  • Page 69B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS 2 PMC SPECIFICATIONS - 49 -
  • Page 702.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01 2.1 SPECIFICATIONS 2.1.1 Basic Specifications Table 2.1.1 (a) Basic specifications of the PMCs for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A 30i/31i/32i-A Function Second PMC Third PMC Dual-check safety First PMC (option) (option) PMC (Note 1) Programming language Ladder Ladder Ladd
  • Page 71B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS Table 2.1.1 (b) Basic specifications of the PMCs for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A 30i/31i/32i-A Function First PMC Second PMC Third PMC Dual-check safety (option) (option) PMC (Note 1) PMC memory • Subprograms (P) 5,000 pieces 512 pieces 512 pieces 512 pieces • Labels (
  • Page 722.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01 NOTE 8 Series 30i can use up to four I/O Link channels (4,096 input points and 4,096 output points). Series 31i/32i can use up to three I/O Link channels (3,072 input points and 3,072 output points). However, only one I/O Link channel (1,024 input points and 1,024 o
  • Page 73B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS 2.1.2 Program Capacity Table 2.1.2 (a) Program capacity for the first PMC Maximum program size Number-of-ladder-step option (flash ROM capacity) 3000-step option 5000-step option 8000-step option 128 KB 12000-step option 16000-step option 24000-step option 256 KB 32
  • Page 742.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01 NOTE 1 Conventional symbol and comment are also able to be used. 2 The program size tend to increase when programming with extended symbol and comment. If the program size exceeds the current option, specify next bigger option or extended size option with same step.
  • Page 75B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS 2.1.3 Sequence Program Memory Capacity The following table lists the memory capacity used by sequence programs. When creating sequence programs, keep their total size within this memory capacity. Table 2.1.3 (a) Required memory size Category Item (Note 1) Ladder (No
  • Page 762.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01 NOTE 1 The total sequence program size (including all items such as ladders, symbols/comments, and messages) cannot exceed the sequence program memory storage capacity. If a ladder, symbol/ comment, or message is large, the size of other categories may be limited. 2
  • Page 77B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS 2.1.5 Addresses Table 2.1.5 (a) Addresses of the PMCs for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A 30i/31i/32i-A Dual-check Function Symbol Second PMC Third PMC First PMC safety PMC (option) (option) (option) Signal input to the PMC X X0 to X127 X0 to X127 X0 to X127 X0 to X127 fro
  • Page 782.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01 Table 2.1.5 (b) Addresses of PMCs for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A 30i/31i/32i-A Dual-check Function Symbol Second PMC Third PMC First PMC safety PMC (option) (option) (option) Message display A • Display request A0 to A249 A0 to A249 A0 to A249 A0 to A249 • Status disp
  • Page 79B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS 2.1.6 Basic Instructions Table 2.1.6 Basic instructions for PMCs for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A 30i/31i/32i-A Dual-check Instruction name Second PMC Third PMC First PMC safety PMC (option) (option) (option) RD ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ RD.NOT ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ WRT ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ WRT.NOT ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ AND ¡ ¡
  • Page 802.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01 2.1.7 Functional Instructions (Arranged in Sequence of Instruction Group) Table 2.1.7 (a) Functional instructions for PMCs for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A (arranged in sequence of instruction group) 30i/31i/32i-A Instruction Instruction SUB Second Third Processing DCS
  • Page 81B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS Table 2.1.7 (b) Functional instructions for PMCs for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A (arranged in sequence of instruction group) 30i/31i/32i-A Instruction Instruction SUB Second Third Processing DCS group name No. First PMC PMC PMC (Note 4) (option) (option) Operation 1 AD
  • Page 822.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01 Table 2.1.7 (c) Functional instructions for PMCs for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A (arranged in sequence of instruction group) 30i/31i/32i-A Instruction Instruction SUB Second Third Processing DCS group name No. First PMC PMC PMC (Note 4) (option) (option) Invalid 1 SPCN
  • Page 83B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS 2.1.8 Functional Instructions (Arranged in Sequence of SUB No.) Table 2.1.8 (a) Functional instructions for PMCs for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A 30i/31i/32i-A Instruction SUB Processing Second PMC Third PMC DCS name No. First PMC (option) (option) (Note 4) END1 1 End o
  • Page 842.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01 Table 2.1.8 (b) Functional instructions for PMCs for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A 30i/31i/32i-A Instruction SUB Processing Second PMC Third PMC DCS name No. First PMC (option) (option) (Note 4) SUBB 37 Binary subtraction ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ MULB 38 Binary multiplication ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ DIV
  • Page 85B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS Table 2.1.8 (c) Functional instructions for PMCs for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A 30i/31i/32i-A Instruction SUB Processing Second PMC Third PMC DCS name No. First PMC (option) (option) (Note 4) FNC90 90 Arbitrary-function instruction 1 ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ FNC91 91 Arbitrary-functio
  • Page 862.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01 2.2 PMC SIGNAL ADDRESSES This section describes the use of each PMC address. See Subsection 2.1.4 for explanations about all address types and ranges. 2.2.1 Addresses for Signals Between the PMC and CNC (F, G) This subsection briefly describes interface addresses. R
  • Page 87B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS 2.2.2 Addresses of Signals Between the PMC and Machine (X, Y) (1) If the FANUC I/O Link is used (a) Signals input from the machine to the PMC First/second/third PMC The addresses for four channels, X0 to X127, X200 to X327, X400 to X527, and X600 to X727, can be use
  • Page 882.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01 Table 2.2.2 Address-fixed input signals Address Signal name Symbol Path 1 Path 2 Path 3 Common Common skip signal SKIP X4.7 X13.7 X11.7 to T/M Emergency stop signal (machine group 1) *ESP X8.4 (Note 1) Emergency stop signal (machine group 2) *ESP X8.0 (Note 1) Emerg
  • Page 89B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS NOTE 1 If the Series 30i/31i/32i-A system is used to control more than one path, some paths can be grouped to share data within a group and to stop all the paths in the group if an alarm condition occurs in one of the paths. The group is referred to as the machine g
  • Page 902.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01 2.2.3 Internal Relay Addresses (R) The following table lists the number of signals (bytes) that can be used as internal relays. Signals that interface with other control units can be assigned to these bytes over the FA network. Turning on the power clears these area
  • Page 91B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS 2.2.4 Internal Relay (System Area) Addresses (R) Internal addresses (R) 9000s are an area managed by the system program. Operation results of functional instructions This area holds information necessary for individual ladder levels, such as the operation results of
  • Page 922.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01 System timers Four signals can be used as system timers. Their specifications are as follows. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R9091 Normally OFF signal Normally ON signal 200 ms cyclic signal (104 ms ON and 96 ms OFF) 1 s cyclic signal (504 ms ON and 496 m OFF) CAUTION 1 Each signa
  • Page 93B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS Ladder execution start signal Ladder stop signal Ladder execution status signal Using the ladder execution start and stop signals in a ladder program can detect when the ladder program starts and stops. Referencing the ladder execution status signal from an external
  • Page 942.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01 (1) Ladder execution start signal (R9015.0) When directed to start ladder program execution, the system software starts executing the ladder program, turns on this signal, and keeps it on for the first one scan cycle. Like R9000, this signal indicates the status of
  • Page 95B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS CAUTION 1 Reference this signal only within the ladder program. Do not reference it from an external system or program as it indicates the status of ladder execution separately for each ladder execution level. 2 If the power is turned off or a CNC system alarm occur
  • Page 962.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01 (b) Example of forcibly turning off an output signal programmed on the first ladder level just before the ladder stops Input Output (c) Example of sending an execution-in-progress signal to the outside Outputting the status of this signal as the DO signal (output ad
  • Page 97B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS Extended relay area volatile/nonvolatile status signal The extended relay area (address E) can be optionally configured as nonvolatile. Referencing this signal can check whether the extended relay area is nonvolatile. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R9091 Extended relay (E) area vo
  • Page 982.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01 2.2.5 Extended Relay Addresses (E) The following table lists the number of signals (bytes) that can be used as extended relays. Extended relays can be used in the same manner as for internal relays. Turning on the power clears this area to 0. 30i/31i/32i-A Dual-chec
  • Page 99B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS 2.2.6 Message Display Addresses (A) These addresses are intended to be used for a message display request and message status display. The following table lists how many messages can be used (number of messages = number of bytes × 8). Turning on the power clears this
  • Page 1002.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01 2.2.7 Timer Addresses (T) These addresses are an area for variable timers used with the TMR instruction and an area for the precision of the variable timers. The following table lists how many timers can be used (number of timers = number of bytes/2). The number of
  • Page 101B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS 2.2.8 Counter Addresses (C) These addresses are an area for variable counters used with the CTR instruction and an area for fixed counters used with the CTRB instruction. The numbers of the counters that can be used are: The number of variable counters = number of b
  • Page 1022.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01 Address number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 C0 Variable Second PMC First PMC C1 Preset value counter Third PMC Counter Dual-check C2 No. 1 safety PMC Cumulative value C3 . . . ∼ ∼ C76 Preset value C77 Counter C78 No. 20 Cumulative value C79 . . . ∼ ∼ C396 Preset value C397 Count
  • Page 103B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS 2.2.9 Keep Relay Addresses (K) These addresses are areas for keep relays and PMC parameters. The following table lists the number of bytes that can be used. It also lists information related to the nonvolatile memory control addresses and the area (system area) used
  • Page 1042.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01 2.2.10 Nonvolatile Memory Control Address (K) This address is intended to be used in, for example, the configuration in which the position of a movable mechanical part (such as a lathe turret) is stored as code data (such as BCD) to nonvolatile memory to preserve th
  • Page 105B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS 2.2.11 System Keep Relay Addresses (K) The following table lists the keep relay area used by the system (PMC management software). 30i/31i/32i-A Dual-check Second PMC Third PMC First PMC safety PMC (option) (option) (option) Area used by the K900 to K999 K900 to K99
  • Page 1062.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 K901 EDTENBL [Data type] Bit EDTENBL Editing permit(*) 0: The sequence program is inhibited from being changed. 1: The sequence program is allowed to be changed. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 K902 PROTPRM HIDEPRM ALLWSTOP FROM-WRT [Data type] Bit F
  • Page 107B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 K906 KEEPSYS TRCST EOUTPUT IOLNKCHK IOGRPSEL OVRRID [Data type] Bit OVRRID Override enable(*) 0: The override function is disabled. 1: The override function is enabled. NOTE Using the override function requires setting "Memory write permit" (
  • Page 1082.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01 K916 Message shift start address (LOW) K917 Message shift start address (HIGH) Message shift start address(*) [Valid data range] Range of the A addresses This area is used to specify the message shift start address value (word type) by converting it to bit data form
  • Page 109B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 K922 Group 7 Group 6 Group 5 Group 4 Group 3 Group 2 Group 1 Group 0 [Data type] Bit Groups 0 to 7 For the selectable I/O Link assignment function, whether to enable or disable assignment of groups 0 to 7 to addresses X/Y200 to X/Y327 is spec
  • Page 1102.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 K925 Group 15 Group 14 Group 13 Group 12 Group 11 Group 10 Group 9 Group 8 [Data type] Bit Groups 8 to 15 For the selectable I/O Link assignment function, whether to enable or disable assignment of groups 8 to 15 to addresses X/Y400 to X/Y527
  • Page 111B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS 2.2.12 Data Table Addresses (D) PMC sequence control sometimes requires a sizable amount of numeric data (hereinafter referred to as data table). If the contents of a data table can be set or read freely, they can be used as various PMC sequence control data, such a
  • Page 1122.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01 Table control data Data table Address number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 D0 Data held separately Second PMC First PMC Third PMC ∼ from data table ∼ D1 Dual-check (address D) safety PMC . . . ∼ ∼ D2999 . . . ∼ ∼ D9999 Fig. 2.2.12 (a) General configuration of data table NOTE In s
  • Page 113B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS Number of table n groups Table parameter Data type Table group 1 control data Number of data items Table start address Table parameter Table group 2 Data type Table control data control data Number of data items Table start address Table parameter Data type Table gr
  • Page 1142.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01 (2) Table control data The table control data is used to manage data tables. Unless this data is correctly set up, it is impossible to create data tables, explained in (3), correctly. While referencing the descriptions in this item, first set up table control data a
  • Page 115B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS (iii) Data type This item specifies the length of data in the data table. 0 : 1 byte long 1 : 2 bytes long 2 : 4 bytes long 3 : 8 bits (iv) Number of data items This item specifies the number of data items in the data table. (3) Data table A data table can be divide
  • Page 1162.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01 (4) Creating data for a data table Data for a data table is created by specifying an intra-table number for the data table and entering the data into the table from the DATA TABLE screen. A specific method for specifying intra- table numbers is available for individ
  • Page 117B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS 2.2.15 Label Number Addresses (L) These addresses are used to specify jump destination labels (positions within the sequence program) in the JMPB and JMPC instructions. The same label number can be specified for different instructions as long as the instructions are
  • Page 1182.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01 2.3 PMC PARAMETERS The term "PMC parameter" refers to any of the timer, counter, keep relay parameters, and data table. PMC parameters are held in nonvolatile memory, whose contents are not lost even when the power is turned off. (1) Timer This parameter specifies a
  • Page 119B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS To change the lower digit of the preset value to a certain value, using a 1-byte processing instruction in the sequence program, write the new data by specifying C0 with an output address in the parameter of a functional instruction. (3) Keep relay This parameter is
  • Page 1202.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01 2.3.2 PMC Parameter Format This subsection describes the format used in outputting the contents of the PMC parameter to an external device. As for the operation of output, refer to section 7 “sequence program and PMC parameter I/O”. (1) Header information The data b
  • Page 121B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS 30i/31i/32i-A Dual-check Second PMC Third PMC First PMC safety PMC (option) (option) (option) xxx 498 038 038 038 (3) Counter (C) [Format] N61xxxx Pnnnnn; Counter preset and current values N Sum of the counter address (C) and 610000. The sum can range from N610000 t
  • Page 1222.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01 (4) Keep relay (K) [Format] N62xxxx Pnnnnnnnn; N Sum of the keep relay address (K) offset and 620000. The sum can range from N620000 to N6200xx and from N620900 to N620999. P Keep relay address value in binary notation. It can range from 00000000 to 11111111 for a r
  • Page 123B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS (5) Data (D) (a) Data table control [Format] N630000 Pnn; Total number of table groups (1 to 100) N630002 Pnnnnnnnn; Group 1 table parameter (bit type) N630003 Pn; Group 1 data type (0, 1, 2,3) N630004 Pnnnn; Number of data items in group 1 (1 to xxxxx) N630006 Pnnn
  • Page 1242.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01 "xxxxx" and "nnnn" indicating a range can take the values listed below. 30i/31i/32i-A Dual-check Second PMC Third PMC First PMC safety PMC (option) (option) (option) xxxxx 10000 3000 3000 3000 nnnn 9999 2999 2999 2999 (b) Data table [Format] N64xxxx Pnnnnn; N Sum of
  • Page 125B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS (6) Expansion memory (E) [Format] N69xxxx Pnnnnn; N Sum of the expansion memory (E) offset and 690000. The sum can range from N690000 to N699999. P Expansion memory (E) address value represented using a signed decimal number. It can range from -128 to 127. (Example)
  • Page 1262.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01 2.4 PARAMETERS FOR THE PMC SYSTEM 2.4.1 Setting Parameters The parameters set up on the PMC SETTING screen are called the setting parameters. Part of the system keep relays described earlier can be set up using setting parameters. This subsection describes the setti
  • Page 127B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS (7) PMC parameter change inhibit (K902.7 0: No. 1: Yes.) This item specifies whether to inhibit data from being input from the PMC PARAM screens (TIMER, COUNTER, KEEP RELAY, and DATA TABLE screens) and the PMC parameter data from being input from the outside. The de
  • Page 1282.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01 (16) Selectable I/O Link assignment function: Selecting a valid group: (K920-K927 0: No. 1: Yes.) This item specifies a group to be enabled or disabled for the selectable I/O Link assignment function for individual addresses. The default setting is 0 (disable) for a
  • Page 129B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS 2.4.2 PMC System Parameters The parameters set up on the PMC SYSTEM PARAMETER screen are called the system parameters. This subsection describes the system parameters for each setup menu. See Section 9.8 for explanations about the how to operate the SYSTEM PARAMETER
  • Page 1302.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01 (b) Number of basic groups This item specifies the number of groups that are always enabled no matter what machine configuration is employed. See Section 3.3 for explanations about the selectable I/O Link assignment function. - 110 -
  • Page 131B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS 2.4.3 CNC Parameters Related to the PMCs The CNC parameters related to the PMCs can be divided into those for controlling communication with FANUC LADDER-III and ladder editing package and those for setting up the PMCs. The following table summaries the CNC paramete
  • Page 1322.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01 Communication parameters 00024 Setting up communication with ladder development tools (FANUC LADDER- III and ladder editing package) [Input type] Setting input [Data type] Integer [Valid data range] 0 to 255 This item specifies whether to enable/disable the PMC onli
  • Page 133B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS PMC setup parameters Execution sequence for multiple PMCs 11900 PMC having the first priority in execution sequence 11901 PMC having the second priority in execution sequence 11902 PMC having the third priority in execution sequence NOTE Once any of these parameters
  • Page 1342.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01 Percent execution time for multiple PMCs Percent execution time for the PMC having the first priority in execution 11905 sequence Percent execution time for the PMC having the second priority in execution 11906 sequence Percent execution time for the PMC having the
  • Page 135B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS I/O Link input/output addresses 11910 I/O Link channel 1 input/output addresses 11911 I/O Link channel 2 input/output addresses 11912 I/O Link channel 3 input/output addresses 11913 I/O Link channel 4 input/output addresses NOTE Once any of these parameters is re-se
  • Page 1362.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01 If all these parameters are 0, all channels are assigned to the first PMC (standard setting) as shown below. First PMC Channel 1 X/Y0 to X/Y127 Channel 2 X/Y200 to X/Y327 Channel 3 X/Y400 to X/Y527 Channel 4 X/Y600 to X/Y727 Fig. 2.4.3 (b) Standard input/output addr
  • Page 137B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS CNC-PMC interface 11920 CNC-PMC interface 1 input/output address 11921 CNC-PMC interface 2 input/output address 11922 CNC-PMC interface 3 input/output address 11923 CNC-PMC interface 4 input/output address 11924 CNC-PMC interface 5 input/output address 11925 CNC-PMC
  • Page 1382.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01 Table 2.4.3 (d) CNC-PMC interface input/output address Setting Input/output address 0 Standard setting (see below) 100 F0 to 767/G0 to G767 for the first PMC 101 F1000 to F1767/G1000 to G1767 for the first PMC 102 F2000 to F2767/G2000 to G2767 for the first PMC 103
  • Page 139B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS If all these parameters are 0, the standard setting is used, that is, "CNC F/G address = first-PMC F/G address" is satisfied. CNC First PMC F/G0 to F/G767 for the CNC F/G0 to F/G767 for the first PMC F/G1000 to F/G1767 for the CNC F/G1000 to F/G1767 for the first PM
  • Page 1402.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01 Level 1 execution period 11930 Ladder level execution period NOTE Once this parameters is re-set, it is necessary to turn the power off and on again. [Input type] Byte input [Data type] Integer [Valid data range] 0, 4, 8 This item specifies an execution period for l
  • Page 141B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS Multi-path PMC interface 11932 Multi-path PMC interface NOTE Once this parameters is re-set, it is necessary to turn the power off and on again. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Integer [Valid data range] 0, 1, 2, 3 Select the PMC path to use the Multi-path
  • Page 1422.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01 2.5 COMPATIBILITY WITH CONVENTIONAL MODELS 2.5.1 Compatibility with the PMCs for the 16i/18i/21i-B 30i/31i/32i-A PMC is highly compatible with the PMC-MODEL SB7 (PMC-SB7) and PMC-MODEL SA1 (PMC-SA1) for the Series 16i/18i/21i-MODEL B (16i/18i/21i-B) on the source le
  • Page 143B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS (6) The nonvolatile memory control keep relay (MWRTF and MWRTF2) has been changed from K16 to K909. (7) In the PMC-SA1 and loader control PMCs, the keep relay system area has been changed from "K17 to K20" to "K900 to K999". (8) A part of window function for PMC-MOD
  • Page 1442.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01 2.5.2 Compatibility with the PMCs for the 15i-A/B 30i/31i/32i-A PMC is compatible with the PMC-MODEL NB6 (PMC-NB6) for the Series 15i-MODEL A/B (15i-A/B) with respect to instructions on the source level except for some functions. The specifications of these function
  • Page 145B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS (9) As for the WINDR and WINDW functional instructions, there is no compatibility between the new and conventional PMC models, because the structures of their control data are different. (10) Programs can be created on the third level because of program compatibilit
  • Page 1462.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01 2.5.3 The convert method of source program using FANUC LADDER-III The version of FANUC LADDER-III applied to 30i-A PMC is 4.0 or more. The version of FANUC LADDER-III applied to 31i/32i-A PMC is 4.4 or more. - For new users A08B-9210-J505 - For up grade A08B-9210-J5
  • Page 147B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS 2.6 PMC MESSAGE MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FUNCTION The PMC message multi-language display function manages the language of alarm message and operator message, switching the language according to the language setting of CNC using message data defined in various language
  • Page 1482.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01 2.6.1 Usage of PMC Message Multi-Language Display Function To utilize the PMC message multi-language display function, you need to prepare the data files with FANUC LADDER-III and store them into CNC as described below: Step 1 At first, prepare a ladder program. The
  • Page 149B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS Outline of the process flow from data creation to display them with PMC message multi-language display function Mnemonic file (Message) Step 2 Ladder program ID code:%@4-D (ANSI/Unicode) Message (Standard) Message Japanese ALM1001 “1001 ” ALM1001 “1001 E.STOP” displ
  • Page 1502.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01 2.6.2 Multi-Language Display By setting the display language attribute for each message data item for multi-language display to be edited, the language of alarm/operator messages to be displayed can be dynamically switched to match the CNC display language. Up to 20
  • Page 151B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS NOTE 1 A message defined in multi-language message data will not be displayed unless the corresponding message data in ladder program has valid alarm number. 2 If messages of current language has no corresponding message entry to the bit of “A” address that has turn
  • Page 1522.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01 2.6.4 Display of European characters With the conventional PMC message function, a European character such as “À” can be edited only in the code format notation, enclosing the character code between “@0D” and “01@”. With the PMC message multi-language display functi
  • Page 153B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS 2.7 DATA BACKED UP BY THE BATTERY Some data on the CNC is backed up by the battery so that the data is not lost even when the main power is turned off. The data backed up by the battery is lost when the battery voltage decreases. So, periodically, the data needs to
  • Page 1542.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01 Width the following functions, data backed up by the battery can be saved to an external device. Type of data External device Function Remarks PMC parameters Memory card Writing PMC parameters For details, see Section 7.4, Handy File from the PMC data I/O "SEQUENCE
  • Page 155B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK 3 I/O LINK - 135 -
  • Page 1563.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02 3.1 WHAT IS THE I/O LINK? The FANUC I/O Link is a serial interface which passes input/output signals between the PMC and each I/O device at a high speed. For each channel, up to 1024 DI points and up to 1024 DO points can be connected and controlled from the PMC. NOTE 1 To us
  • Page 157B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK 3.1.1 Configuration of an I/O Link The following figure shows a basic configuration of the I/O Link. Slaves I/O Unit I/O Unit Group 0 I/O Link master Group 1 Operator's panel connection unit Group 2 Power Mate : : : : : : : : : : Group 15 (1) The I/O Link consists of one mast
  • Page 1583.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02 NOTE 1 Turn the power to the slaves and master on simultaneously or turn the power to the slaves on before turning the power to the master. 2 When turning the power to the master off, also turn the power to all slaves off. Turn the power to all slaves on again before turning
  • Page 159B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK 3.1.2 Numbers of Input Points and of Output Points of the I/O Link The I/O Link has up to 1024 input points and up to 1024 output points for each channel when viewed from the master. These I/O points can be assigned to each slave to periodically pass I/O data between the mast
  • Page 1603.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02 3.2 ASSIGNMENT METHOD To use an I/O device as a slave, assign connection information to X addresses (input) and Y addresses (output) of the PMC. The machine tool builder should determine addresses to be used for input/output of each I/O device in a sequence program. Connectio
  • Page 161B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK (3) Type of I/O device whose connection location is specified with its group number Machine operator's panel interface unit, I/O Link connection unit, Power Mate, and other devices are of this type. One unit of this type occupies one group. When using this type, always set th
  • Page 1623.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02 Table 3.2 (a) Module names (1) Module name Occupied Name Specifications (actual module name) address Input modules for ID32A (AID32A1) 4 bytes for input A03B-0807-J101 I/O Unit-MODEL A ID32B (AID32B1) 4 bytes for input A03B-0807-J102 ID32H (AID32H1) 4 bytes for input A03B-080
  • Page 163B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK Table 3.2 (b) Module names (2) Module name Occupied Name Specifications (actual module name) address FANUC CNC SYSTEM 4 bytes for input FANUC Series 0-C FS04A FANUC Power Mate 4 bytes for output (compatible with the FANUC I/O Link) 8 bytes for input FANUC Power Mate-MODEL FS0
  • Page 1643.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02 Table 3.2 (c) Module names (3) Module name Occupied Name Specifications (actual module name) address Distribution I/O CM06I 6 bytes for input operator's panel I/O CM13I 13 bytes for input Uses the first MPG. modules CM14I 14 bytes for input Uses the second MPG. CM15I 15 bytes
  • Page 165B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK 3.2.1 Assignment Method for I/O Unit-MODEL A Figs. 3.2.1 (a) and 3.2.1 (b) show sample configurations of I/O Unit- MODEL A. I/O Unit I/O Unit I/O Link A A Group 0 master I I Slot 1 Slot 1 F Slot 2 Slot 3 F Slot 2 Slot 3 0 Slot 4 Slot 5 0 Slot 4 Slot 5 1 1 A B Base 0 Base 1 Fi
  • Page 1663.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02 Assignment method (1) Group number For I/O Unit-MODEL A, up to two I/O units can be connected when interface module AIF01A is used as the basic unit and expansion interface module AIF01B is also used. This is called the base expansion function. This set of up to two I/O units
  • Page 167B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK NOTE For I/O Unit-MODEL A, when assigning 3, 5, 6, or 7 bytes, change the module name as follows. Do not use IO24I, /3, /5, /6, or /7 as a module name. Module names Before change ® After change IO24I ® /4 /3 ® /4 /5 ® /8 /6 ® /8 /7 ® /8 Number of occupied I/O points Obtain th
  • Page 1683.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02 Related hardware manual "FANUC I/O Unit-MODEL A Connection and Maintenance Manual" (B-61813E) NOTE For the specifications and connection of I/O Unit- MODEL A and related I/O modules, refer to the hardware connection manual for each I/O device. - 148 -
  • Page 169B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK 3.2.2 Assignment Method for I/O Unit-MODEL B I/O Unit-MODEL B can be used together with I/O Link devices such as the Power Mate, operator's panel interface unit, connection unit, and I/O Unit-MODEL A. In this case, I/O Unit-MODEL B comprises one group and other units cannot b
  • Page 1703.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02 Assignment method As the group number, set the group number used in the configuration. As the base number, always set 0. As the slot number, set the unit number of a DI/DO unit of I/O Unit-MODEL B. To assign power on- off information, set 0 for the slot number. Set the follow
  • Page 171B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK Interface module incorporating I/O Unit-MODEL A Interface module AIF02C can control communication both with I/O Unit-MODEL A and with I/O Unit-MODEL B. I/O Unit I/O Unit I/O Link A A master Group 0 I I Slot 1 Slot 1 F Slot 2 Slot 3 F Slot 2 Slot 3 0 Slot 4 Slot 5 0 Slot 4 Slo
  • Page 1723.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02 3.2.3 Assignment Method for Distribution I/O Connection Panel I/O Modules and Distribution I/O Operator's Panel I/O Modules For the I/O Link, when assigning connection information of a connection panel or operator's panel I/O module, set an I/O Link serial number (0 for the m
  • Page 173B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK Group number Base number Slot number Assignment name X004 0 0 1 CM14I X020 1 0 1 CM12I X100 2 0 1 CM03I Y000 0 0 1 CM08O Y010 1 0 1 CM08O Y100 2 0 1 CM02O - 153 -
  • Page 1743.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02 Connection panel I/O modules For signal mapping of connection panel I/O modules, refer to the connection manual (hardware) for the CNC used as the I/O Link master. Assignment data is described below for each configuration of basic and expansion modules. CAUTION Always connect
  • Page 175B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK (2) Basic module + expansion module 1 48 input points, 32 output points Basic Expansion module module 1 JD1B JD1A (a) When DO alarm detection is not used · When no manual pulse generator is used Input: X=CM06I, output: Y=CM04O · When one manual pulse generator is used Input:
  • Page 1763.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02 (4) Basic module + expansion module 1 + expansion module 2 + expansion module 3 96 input points, 64 output points Basic Expansion Expansion Expansion module module 1 module 2 module 3 JD1B JD1A (a) When DO alarm detection is not used · When no manual pulse generator is used I
  • Page 177B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK Operator's panel I/O modules For signal mapping of operator's panel I/O modules, refer to the connection manual (hardware) for the CNC used as the I/O Link master. (1) Operator's panel I/O module (compatible with matrix input, A20B-2002-0470) Input: 16 general-purpose points
  • Page 1783.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02 (2) Operator's panel I/O module (A20B-2002-0520, A20B-2002- 0521) 48 input points 32 output points Operator's panel I/O module JD1B JD1A (a) When DO alarm detection is not used · When no manual pulse generator is used Input: X=CM06I, output: Y=CM04O · When one manual pulse ge
  • Page 179B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK 3.2.4 Assignment Method for the Power Mate To use Power Mate-MODEL D/H, Power Mate i MODEL-D/H, or I/O Link b amplifier as an I/O Link slave, assign its connection information on the I/O Link master. On the I/O Link slave, assignment is not required because the addresses are
  • Page 1803.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02 3.2.5 Assignment Method for I/O Link Connection Units Conventionally, to exchange data between CNCs A and B, the devices indicated by (a) in the figure below must be connected. (Any I/O units can be used to exchange data.) CNC A I/O Unit I/O Unit CNC B Model A Model A (a) I/O
  • Page 181B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK Therefore, when an I/O Link connection unit is used, the connection is as follows. CNC A I/O Unit I/O Unit CNC B Model A Model A I/O Link connection unit I/O Unit I/O Unit Model A Model A Assignment method Assignment data is determined according to the types of I/O devices re
  • Page 1823.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02 3.2.6 Assignment Method for a Handy Machine Operator's Panel An example of connecting a handy machine operator's panel to the I/O Link is shown below. I/O Link Handy machine Group 0 master operator's panel Operator's panel Group 1 connection unit Assignment method Assign 16 b
  • Page 183B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK [Examples of assigning Y addresses] Y address Slot number Assignment Occupied name address Yn+0 7 #2 2 bytes Yn+2 8 #2 2 bytes Yn+4 9 #2 2 bytes Yn+6 10 #2 2 bytes Yn+8 11 #2 2 bytes Yn+10 12 #2 2 bytes Yn+12 13 #2 2 bytes Yn+14 14 #2 2 bytes Yn+16 15 #2 2 bytes Yn+18 16 #2 2
  • Page 1843.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02 3.2.7 Assignment Method for an AS-i Converter Unit An I/O Link-AS-i converter unit converts I/O from the I/O Link to the AS-Interface (called AS-i below) to enable the use of AS-i slave module DI/DO signals as a standalone unit. The AS-i comes in two main versions: Ver 2.0 an
  • Page 185B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK Example of connection for Ver 2.1 AS-i power supply Groups 0 and 1 I/O Link I/O Link-AS-i master converter unit for AS-i slave AS-i slave Ver 2.1 Group 2 Operator's panel connection unit Assignment method for Ver 2.1 For the group number ([GROUP]), set the numbers for two con
  • Page 1863.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02 3.2.8 FS0 Operator's Panel The FS0 operator's panel consists of many key-operated switches, LEDs, a rotary switch, and other components. The status of each of key-operated switches and lamps is coded and as many signal lines as the number of actual switches are not required t
  • Page 187B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK An operator's panel consists of the following keys, LEDs, and other components: · Key-operated switches (sheet keys) 42 keys (0-TC) 46 keys (0-MC) · LEDs (red) on all key-operated switches · Override rotary switch (4 bits) · Emergency stop button (1 bit) · Program protect key
  • Page 1883.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02 Fig. 3.2.8 (d) Machine operator's panel for the 0-TC full-keyboard 9-inch CRT/MDI unit - 168 -
  • Page 189B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK Fig. 3.2.8 (e) Machine operator's panel for the 0-MC full-keyboard 9-inch CRT/MDI unit - 169 -
  • Page 1903.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02 Example of connection CNC MAIN CPU I/O Link I/O unit FS0 operator's panel JD1A JD1B DI M1A (I/O Link) module CP32 PSU DO M2A CP6 JD1A module 24 VDC Another I/O unit DI module: +24 V common, 24 ms (Example) AID32A1 DO module: 0 V common (Example) AOD32A1 Assignment method For
  • Page 191B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK Override signals (*OV1 to *OV8) and program protect key signal (KEY) For these signals, the relevant key-operated switch contact signals are directly input to the PMC. Directly process these signals with a PMC ladder program. For connection, refer to the section describing th
  • Page 1923.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02 The address of an LED signal (Ym: Table 3.2.8 (a)) and the address of its bit image (Rl to Rl+7: Tables 3.2.8 (b) and (c)) can be defined as the fixed address or an unused address without restrictions. Table 3.2.8 (a) Key-operated switch and LED signal addresses #7 #6 #5 #4 #
  • Page 193B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK Table 3.2.8 (c) Key-operated switch and LED signal bit image addresses (for a full-keyboard operator's panel) KEY/LED #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Rk/Rl E1 C1 A1 E6 D6 C6 B6 A6 Rk+1/Rl+1 E2 C2 A2 E7 D7 C7 B7 A7 Rk+2/Rl+2 E3 C3 A3 E8 D8 C8 B8 A8 Rk+3/Rl+3 E5 C4 A4 E9 D9 C9 B9 A9 Rk
  • Page 1943.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02 The addresses shown in Tables 3.2.8 (a), (b), and (c) are set to the following PMC addresses: Xn ® X1000 Xn+1 ® X0001 Xn+2 ® X0002 Ym ® Y1000 Rk / Rl ® R0900 / R0910 Rk+1 / Rl+1 ® R0901 / R0911 Rk+2 / Rl+2 ® R0902 / R0912 Rk+3 / Rl+3 ® R0903 / R0913 Rk+4 / Rl+4 ® R0904 / R091
  • Page 195B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK 3.3 SELECTABLE I/O LINK ASSIGNMENT FUNCTION 3.3.1 Outline This function enables the common use of a sequence program for several machines which have different I/O device configuration with each other, by setting the parameter to enable/disable each group in I/O link assignmen
  • Page 1963.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02 The I/O devices that are used in all machines can be set as basic part of configuration that is always effective. Basic part Machine A: I/O devices Machine B: I/O devices CNC Power Connection CNC Power I/O Mate Unit Mate Unit The I/O link assignment data of the machine A and
  • Page 197B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK Basic part Optional part Power Connection I/O CNC OK Mate Unit Unit CNC Power Connection I/O NG Mate Unit Unit Optional part Basic part This function requires setting the following parameters. These parameters can be set for each channel. For details of each parameter, see Se
  • Page 1983.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02 3.3.2 Example There are three machines which have different configurations of I/O devices, each other. · Configuration A A machine which has a distribution I/O machine operator's panel and a connection panel I/O connected with channel 1 of NC. Channel 1 CNC Distribution I/O m
  • Page 199B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK · Configuration C A machine which has the configuration A on channel 1 and two beta amplifiers on channel 2. Channel 1 CNC Distribution I/O machine Connection panel I/O operator's panel Group 0 Group 1 Channel 2 CNC Beta amp. Beta amp. Group 0 Group 1 These machines can use a
  • Page 2003.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02 (2) The contents of parameter · Configuration A · System parameter X0000/Y0000 ENABLE SELECTION = YES BASIC GROUP COUNT = 1 X0200/Y0200 ENABLE SELECTION = YES BASIC GROUP COUNT = 0 · Setting parameter Group NO.: 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 X0000/Y0000 * 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 08 09 10 11
  • Page 201B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK · Configuration C · System parameter X0000/Y0000 ENABLE SELECTION = YES BASIC GROUP COUNT = 1 X0200/Y0200 ENABLE SELECTION = YES BASIC GROUP COUNT = 0 · Setting parameter Group NO.: 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 X0000/Y0000 * 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Gr
  • Page 2023.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02 · Configuration C Channel 1 Address Group Base Slot Name I/O device X0000 0 0 1 CM12I Distribution I/O machine operator’s panel : : : : : : X0020 1 0 1 CM03I Connection panel I/O : : : : : : Channel 2 Address Group Base Slot Name I/O device X0200 0 0 1 OC02I Beta amp. : : : :
  • Page 203B-63983EN/02 3.I/O LINK 3.3.3 Notes (1) If PMC-parameters are cleared, cycling the power of CNC links only the basic part. (2) After selecting the assignment data, the I/O devices are linked with shifted group number of effective I/O link assignment data. You can check the actual result of connectio
  • Page 2043.I/O LINK B-63983EN/02 3.4 I/O LINK CONNECTION CHECK FUNCTION The I/O Link connection check function always checks whether the number of I/O Link groups defined in a sequence program is the same as that of actually connected groups. When the selectable I/O Link assignment function is used, the I/O
  • Page 205B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4 LADDER LANGUAGE - 185 -
  • Page 2064.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4.1 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS Designing a sequence program entails drawing a ladder diagram. Draw a ladder diagram by using relay contact symbols as well as symbols representing the functional instructions described later. The logic laid out in the ladder diagram is input to
  • Page 207B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE (2) Types of instruction There are two types of PMC instruction - basic instructions and functional instructions. (a) Basic instructions The basic instructions are most frequently used in designing a sequence program. There are 14 instructions, including AND and OR, ea
  • Page 2084.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4.1.1 Details of the Basic Instructions Table 4.1.1 lists the types of the basic instructions and explains the processing they perform. The difference between the two types of formats shown under Instruction is described below. Mnemonic format: The instructions are dis
  • Page 209B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.1.2 RD Instruction (1) Format W1 A B C X10.1 X2.0 R2.1 R200.0 RD W2 D G instruction X5.1 R5.4 R200.1 E Y5.2 F Y5.3 Fig. 4.1.2 (Address) RD . Bit number Address number (2) Use this instruction to start coding from contact A (−−). For examples of how the RD instructi
  • Page 2104.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4.1.3 RD.NOT Instruction (1) Format A B C W1 R1.1 F2.2 F3.3 R210.1 RD.NOT?? RD.NOT instruction D G W2 G5.1 R10.5 R210.2 E X4.2 F Y10.7 Fig. 4.1.3 (Address) RD.NOT . Bit number Address number (2) Use this instruction to start coding from contact B (−/−). For examples
  • Page 211B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.1.4 WRT Instruction (1) Format A C W1 R220.1 G2.2 Y11.1 B W2 WRT X4.2 Y14.6 instruction Fig. 4.1.4 (Address) WRT . Bit number Address number (2) The WRT instruction outputs the result of the logical operation, namely the status of the ST0 bit (0 or 1), to the specifi
  • Page 2124.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4.1.5 WRT.NOT Instruction (1) Format A C W1 R220.1 G2.2 Y11.1 B W2 X4.2 Y14.6 WRT.NOT instruction Fig. 4.1.5 (Address) WRT.NOT . Bit number Address number (2) The WRT.NOT instruction reverses and outputs the result of the logical operation, namely the status of the ST0
  • Page 213B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.1.6 AND Instruction (1) Format A B C W1 X10.1 X2.0 R2.1 R200.0 D G W2 X5.1 R5.4 R200.1 E Y5.2 F AND AND?? instruction Y5.3 Fig. 4.1.6 (Address) AND . Bit number Address number (2) This instruction produces a logical product. (3) For examples of how the AND instructio
  • Page 2144.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4.1.7 AND.NOT Instruction (1) Format A B C W1 X10.1 X2.0 R2.1 R200.0 D G W2 X5.1 R5.4 R200.1 E AND.NOT instruction Y5.2 F Y5.3 Fig. 4.1.7 (Address) AND.NOT . Bit number Address number (2) This instruction reverses the status of the signal at the specified address and p
  • Page 215B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.1.8 OR Instruction (1) Format A B C W1 X10.1 X2.0 R2.1 R200.0 D G W2 X5.1 R5.4 R200.1 E Y5.2 F Y5.3 OR instruction Fig. 4.1.8 (Address) OR . Bit number Address number (2) This instruction produces a logical sum. (3) For examples of how the OR instruction is used, see
  • Page 2164.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4.1.9 OR.NOT Instruction (1) Format A B C W1 X10.1 X2.0 R2.1 R200.0 D G W2 X5.1 R5.4 R200.1 E Y5.2 OR.NOT instruction F Y5.3 Fig. 4.1.9 (Address) OR.NOT . Bit number Address number (2) This instruction reverses the status of the signal at the specified address and prod
  • Page 217B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.1.10 RD.STK Instruction (1) Format A C W1 X1.1 Y1.2 Y15.0 B D X1.3 Y1.4 E F R2.1 R3.5 RD.STK instruction Fig. 4.1.10 (Address) RD.STK . Bit number Address number (2) The RD.STK instruction stacks the interim result of a logical operation. Use this instruction when th
  • Page 2184.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4.1.11 RD.NOT.STK Instruction (1) Format A B E F W1 RD.NOT.STK instruction X1.0 X1.1 Y1.2 Y1.3 Y15.7 C D G H R1.4 R1.5 X1.6 Y1.7 Fig. 4.1.11 (Address) RD.NOT.STK . Bit number Address number (2) The RD.NOT.STK instruction stacks the interim result of a logical operation
  • Page 219B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.1.12 AND.STK Instruction (1) Format A B E F W1 X1.0 X1.1 Y1.2 Y1.3 Y15.7 C D G H AND.STK instruction R1.4 R1.5 X1.6 Y1.7 Fig. 4.1.12 (a) AND.STK (2) The AND.STK instruction finds the logical product of the operation result stored in the ST0 bit and that stored in the
  • Page 2204.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 (3) For examples of how the AND.STK instruction is used, see Fig. 4.1.12 (a) and Table 4.1.12. Table 4.1.12 Mnemonic format Status of operation result Step Address Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST2 ST1 ST0 number No. 1 RD X1 .0 A A 2 AND.NOT X1 .1 B A⋅B 3 RD.NOT.STK R1 .
  • Page 221B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.1.13 OR.STK Instruction (1) Format A C W1 X1.1 Y1.2 Y15.0 B D X1.3 Y1.4 E F R2.1 R3.5 OR.STK RD.STK??instruction Fig. 4.1.13 (a) OR.STK (2) The OR.STK instruction finds the logical sum of the operation result stored in the ST0 bit and that stored in the ST1 bit and s
  • Page 2224.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 (3) For examples of how the OR.STK instruction is used, see Fig. 4.1.13 (a) and Table 4.1.13. Table 4.1.13 Mnemonic format Status of operation result Step Address Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST2 ST1 ST0 number No. 1 RD X1 .1 A A 2 AND Y1 .2 C A⋅C 3 RD.STK X1 .3 B A⋅C B
  • Page 223B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.1.14 SET Instruction (1) Format A C (S) R0.0 Y0.0 B X0.0 SET instruction Fig. 4.1.14 (Address) SET . Bit number Address number (2) This instruction keeps the status of the specified address to ON. It finds the logical sum of the operation result (ST0) and the specifi
  • Page 2244.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4.1.15 RST Instruction (1) Format A C (R) R0.0 Y0.0 B X0.0 RST instruction Fig. 4.1.15 (Address) RST . Bit number Address number (2) This instruction keeps the status of the specified address to OFF. It finds the logical product of the operation result (ST0) and the sp
  • Page 225B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.2 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS When creating a sequence program, you may find it difficult to code certain types of functions with the basic instructions alone that perform a one-bit logical operation each. One example is a shortcut control function for a rotating part th
  • Page 2264.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 Control conditions Parameters A B (3) L0 L1 Instruction Parameter 1 C D (2) Parameter 2 W1 R 2.4 R 3.1 Parameter 3 RST (1) Parameter 4 R 10.1 R 5.7 ACT (0) (Note 1) R 7.1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R9000 R9001 R9002 R9003 R9004 R9005 Fig. 4.2.1 (a) Structure of a functional instr
  • Page 227B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE Table 4.2.1 (a) Coding format of the functional instructions Mnemonic format Status of operation result Step Address Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0 number No. 1 RD R1 . 0 A A 2 AND R1 . 1 B A⋅B 3 RD.STK R2 . 4 C A⋅B C 4 AND.NOT R3 . 1 D A⋅B C⋅D 5 RD.STK R5
  • Page 2284.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 (3) Instruction For the types of functional instructions, see Subsection 2.1.6. To input the instruction with relay symbols, use the soft keys of the programmer. (4) Parameters Unlike the basic instructions, the functional instructions deal with numeric values. Therefo
  • Page 229B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE (7) Examples of numeric data (a) BCD format data Basically, the data processed in the BCD format is handled in units of one byte (0 to 99), two bytes (0 to 9999), or four bytes (0 to 99,999,999; for the DCNVB instruction only). A four-digit BCD data block is stored in
  • Page 2304.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 (b) Binary format data Basically, the data processed in the binary format is handled in units of one byte (−128 to +127), two bytes (−32,768 to +32,767), or four bytes (−2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647). The data is stored at addresses R200, R201, R202, and R203, as sh
  • Page 231B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE (8) Addresses of numeric data processed by functional instructions When the numeric data to be processed by a functional instruction consists of two or four bytes, it is recommended to specify an even number or a multiple of four as the address of the numeric data in t
  • Page 2324.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 (9) Functional instruction operation result register (R9000 to R9005) (See Fig. 4.2.1 (c).) The results of executing functional instructions are set in this register. The register is shared by all the functional instructions. Therefore, if you do not reference the regi
  • Page 233B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.3 TIMER The following types of timer instruction are available. Use any of these instructions as appropriate for your purpose. Instruction Sub Processing name number 1 TMR 3 Timer processing 2 TMRB 24 Fixed timer processing 3 TMRC 54 Timer processing - 213 -
  • Page 2344.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4.3.1 TMR (Timer: SUB 3) This is an on-delay timer. Since you set the time in nonvolatile memory (T address) using the timer screen, you can change the set time without changing the ladder diagram. The timer number you specify in the parameter is a number displayed on
  • Page 235B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE Parameter Set the timer number. WARNING If the timer number is duplicated, or falls outside the valid range, the operation will be unpredictable. Setting timers The initial value of the timer setting time can be set in steps of 48 msec for timer numbers 1 to 8 and in s
  • Page 2364.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4.3.2 TMRB (Fixed Timer: SUB 24) This timer is used as a fixed on-delay timer. Time present in this fixed timer is written to the memory together with the sequence program, so the time once set cannot be changed unless the whole sequence program is exchanged. The data
  • Page 237B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE Parameters Specify the timer number of a fixed timer. The timer numbers and the setting time range are as shown below. 30i/31i/32i-A 1st PMC 2nd PMC 3rd PMC Dual check (option) (option) safety PMC(option) Timer number 1 to 500 1 to 100 1 to 100 1 to 100 Setting time 1
  • Page 2384.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4.3.3 TMRC (Timer: SUB 54) This is the on-delay timer. A timer setting time is set at an arbitrary address. There is no limit to the number of timers as long as memory areas can be allocated for the timer instruction to use. The data type in this instruction is binary
  • Page 239B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE Parameters (a) Timer accuracy The timer accuracy values, setting time range, and error are as shown below. Timer Setting The range of setting time (Note) Margin of error accuracy number 8 msec 0 8 msec to about 262.1 sec 0 to ±1st level sweep interval (4/8 msec) 48 mse
  • Page 2404.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 (b) Timer set time address Sets the first address of the timer set time field. The continuous 2-byte memory space is required for the timer set time field. The data table (field D) is normally used as this field. Timer set time + 0 TIME Timer set time + 1 TIME: Timer s
  • Page 241B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.4 COUNTER The following types of counter instruction are available. Use any of these instructions as appropriate for your purpose. Instruction Sub Processing name number 1 CTR 5 Counter processing 2 CTRB 56 Fixed counter processing 3 CTRC 55 Counter processing - 221
  • Page 2424.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4.4.1 CTR (Counter: SUB 5) CTR is used as a counter. Counters are used for various purposes for NC machine tools. Numerical data such as preset values and count values can be used with either BCD format or binary format by a system parameter of PMC. WARNING When a inco
  • Page 243B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE Format Fig. 4.4.1 (a) shows the ladder format and Table 4.4.1 shows the mnemonic format. Countup output W1 CN0 ¡¡¡¡.¡ SUB 5 ¡¡¡¡.¡ UPDOWN ¡¡¡ CTR Counter ¡¡¡¡.¡ number RST ¡¡¡¡.¡ ACT ¡¡¡¡.¡ Control condition Fig. 4.4.1 (a) Format of CTR instruction Table 4.4.1 Mnemonic
  • Page 2444.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 (c) Reset (RST) RST = 0: Releases reset. RST = 1: Enables reset. W1 becomes 0. The integrated value is reset to the initial value. CAUTION Set RST to 1, only when reset is required. (d) Count signal (ACT) "1" "0" Count Count 0: Counter does not operate. W1 does not cha
  • Page 245B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE Examples of using the counter [Example 1] As a preset counter (See Fig. 4.4.1 (b).) The number of workpieces to be machined is counted. When the number reaches the preset count, a signal is output. • L1 is a circuit to make logic 1. • Since the count ranges from 0 to 9
  • Page 2464.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 [Example 2] Use of the counter to store the position of a rotor. (See Fig. 4.4.1 (c).) L1 "1" R200.1 R200.1 L1 R200.1 L1 (CN0) R200.1 SUB 5 R200.0 REV (UPDOWN) CTR 0002 R200.1 L1 (RST) R200.1 POS (ACT) X36.0 Fig. 4.4.1 (c) Ladder diagram for the counter, example 2 3 4
  • Page 247B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE (b) Specify up and down The signal REV changes according to the then direction of rotation. It becomes 0 for forward rotation and 1 for reverse rotation. Thus, the counter is an up counter for forward rotation and a down counter for reverse rotation. (c) Reset In this
  • Page 2484.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4.4.2 CTRB (Fixed counter: SUB 56) CTRB is used as a counter. Numerical data such as preset values and count values can be used with binary format. This counter has the following functions to meet various applications. (a) Preset counter Preset the count value. If the
  • Page 249B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE Table 4.4.2 Mnemonic of CTRB instruction Mnemonic format Memory status of control condition Step Address Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0 number No. 1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ CN0 CN0 2 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ UPDOWN CN0 UPDOWN 3 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RST CN0 UPDOWN RST 4 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡
  • Page 2504.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 Countup output (W1) In case of the up couter mode (UPDOWN=0), when the counter value reaches the preset value, W1 is set to 1. In case of the down couter mode (UPDOWN=1) and initial value 0(CN0=0), when the counter value reaches 0, W1 is set to 1. In case of the down c
  • Page 251B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.4.3 CTRC (Counter: SUB 55) The numeral data of this counter are all binary. This counter has the following functions and can be used according to the application: (a) Preset counter Preset the count value and if the count reaches this preset value, outputs to show th
  • Page 2524.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 Table 4.4.3 Mnemonic of CTRC instruction Mnemonic format Memory status of control condition Step Address Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0 number No. 1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ CN0 CN0 2 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ UPDOWN CN0 UPDOWN 3 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RST CN0 UPDOWN RST 4 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡
  • Page 253B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE (b) Counter register address The first address of the counter register field is set. The continuous 4-byte memory space from the first address is required for this field. Field D is normally used. Counter register +0 CTR Count value Counter register +1 Counter register
  • Page 2544.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4.5 DATA TRANSFER The following types of data transfer instruction are available. Use any of these instructions as appropriate for your purpose. Instruction Sub Processing name number 1 MOVB 43 Transfer of 1 byte 2 MOVW 44 Transfer of 2 bytes 3 MOVD 47 Transfer of 4 by
  • Page 255B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.5.1 MOVB (Transfer of 1 Byte: SUB 43) The MOVB instruction transfers 1-byte data from a specified source address to a specified destination address. Format Fig. 4.5.1 shows the ladder format and Table 4.5.1 shows the mnemonic format. ACT SUB 43 MOVB ¡¡¡¡ Transfer sou
  • Page 2564.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4.5.2 MOVW (Transfer of 2 Bytes: SUB 44) The MOVW instruction transfers 2-byte data from a specified source address to a specified destination address. Format Fig. 4.5.2 shows the ladder format and Table 4.5.2 shows the mnemonic format. ACT SUB 44 MOVW ¡¡¡¡ Transfer so
  • Page 257B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.5.3 MOVD (Transfer of 4 Bytes: SUB 47) The MOVD instruction transfers 4-byte data from a specified source address to a specified destination address. Format Fig. 4.5.3 shows the ladder format and Table 4.5.3 shows the mnemonic format. ACT SUB 47 MOVD ¡¡¡¡ Transfer so
  • Page 2584.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4.5.4 MOVN (Transfer of an Arbitrary Number of Bytes: SUB 45) The MOVN instruction transfers data consisting of an arbitrary number of bytes from a specified source address to a specified destination address. Format Fig. 4.5.4 shows the ladder format and Table 4.5.4 sh
  • Page 259B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE Parameters (a) Number of bytes to be transferred Specify the number of bytes to be transferred. An odd number can also be specified. A number from 1 to 9,999 can be specified. CAUTION Make sure that the source data area and destination data area are within the PMC addr
  • Page 2604.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4.5.5 MOVE (Logical Product Transfer: SUB 8) ANDs logical multiplication data and input data, and outputs the results to a specified address. Can also be used to remove unnecessary bits from an eight-bit signal in a specific address, etc. (Logical multiplication data)
  • Page 261B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE Execution command ACT = 0: MOVE instruction not executed. ACT = 1: Executed. Example of using the MOVE instruction If a code signal and another signal co-exist at address X35 for an input signal from the machine tool, to compare the code signal and a code signal at ano
  • Page 2624.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4.5.6 MOVOR (Data Transfer After Logical Sum: SUB 28) This instruction ORs the input data and the logical sum data and transfers the result to the destination. Input data Logical sum data OR Output data Format Fig. 4.5.6 shows the ladder format and Table 4.5.6 shows th
  • Page 263B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE Control condition (a) Command (ACT) ACT = 0: Do not execute MOVOR. ACT = 1: Execute MOVOR. Parameters (a) Input data address Specifies the address for the input data. (b) Logical sum data address Specifies the address of the logical sum data with which to OR the transf
  • Page 2644.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4.5.7 XMOVB (Binary Index Modifier Data Tranfer: SUB 35) Reads or rewrites the contents of the data table. The value type in this instruction ia binary. There are two specifications - basic specification and extended specification - for setting the format specification
  • Page 265B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE (a) Read data from data table The number of data table elements: M (It specifies the storage address of number of data table elements) DT[0] D I 3 S B DT[1] A Index: I Input/output data: S DT[2] DT[3] B DT[4] DT[5] C −1] DT[M− Data table: DT The operation of the instru
  • Page 2664.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 (b) Write data to data table The number of data table elements: M (It specifies the storage address of number of data table elements) S B I 3 DT[0] Input/output data: S Index: I DT[1] DT[2] DT[3] B DT[4] DT[5] DT[M− −1] Data table: DT The operation of the instruction:
  • Page 267B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE Format Figs. 4.5.7 (e) and (f) show the ladder format and Tables 4.5.7 (a) and (b) show the mnemonic format. W1 RW SUB 35 RST XMOVB ¡ Format specification ¡¡¡¡ Storage address of number of data table elements ¡¡¡¡ Data table head address DT[ ] ACT ¡¡¡¡ I/O data storage
  • Page 2684.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 W1 RW SUB 35 RST XMOVB ¡¡¡¡ Format specification ¡¡¡¡ Storage address of number of data table elements ¡¡¡¡ Data table head address DT[ ] ACT ¡¡¡¡ I/O data storage address S[ ] ¡¡¡¡ Index storage address I[ ] Fig. 4.5.7 (f) Format of XMOVB instruction (extended specifi
  • Page 269B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE Parameters (a) Format specification Specifies data length. Specify byte length in the first digit of the parameter. 0001: 1-byte long data 0002: 2-byte long data 0004: 4-byte long data When setting format specification in the following extended format, XMOVB can read/w
  • Page 2704.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 (c) Data table head address Sets head address in the data table. The memory of (byte length) × (number of data table elements) which was set in "(a) Format specification" and "(b) Storage address of number of data table elements" is necessary. (d) Input/Output data sto
  • Page 271B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE WARNING 1 You can not specify the table that includes different kind of address type or discontinuous address area. In this case, operation is not guaranteed. 2 You have to set the "Storage address of number of data table elements" and the "Data table head address" not
  • Page 2724.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 Example for extended specification (a) Read data from data table (extended specification) The number of data table elements: R0 = 9 The number of index array elements: 4 RW = 0 W1 SUB 35 XMOVB 0041 RST = 0 R0 R100 ACT = 1 R200 D0 R100 D D0 2 R200 A R101 D1 5 R201 B R10
  • Page 273B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE (b) Write data to data table (extended specification) The number of data table elements: R0 = 9 The number of index array elements: 4 RW = 1 W1 SUB 35 XMOVB 0041 RST = 0 R0 R200 ACT = 1 R100 D0 R100 A D0 2 R200 D R101 B D1 5 R201 R102 C D2 8 R202 A R103 D D3 0 R203 Inp
  • Page 2744.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4.5.8 XMOV (Indexed Data Transfer: SUB 18) Reads or rewrites the contents of the data table. The value type in this instruction ia binary. CAUTION The data table heading address specified here is table internal number 0. The table internal number specified here, howeve
  • Page 275B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE Table 4.5.8 Mnemonic of XMOV instruction Memory status of control Mnemonic format condition Step Address Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0 number No. 1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ BYT BYT 2 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RW BYT RW 3 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RST BYT RW RST 4 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT BYT R
  • Page 2764.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 (c) Address storing input/output data The input/output data storage address is the address storing the specified data, and is external to the data table. The contents of the data table is read or rewritten. (d) Address storing table internal number The table internal n
  • Page 277B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.6 COMPARISON The following types of comparison instruction are available. Use any of these instructions as appropriate for your purpose. Instruction Sub Processing name number 1 COMPB 32 Comparison between binary data 2 COMP 15 Comparison 3 COIN 16 Coincidence check
  • Page 2784.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4.6.1 COMPB (Comparison Between Binary Data: SUB 32) This instruction compares 1, 2, and 4-byte binary data with one another. Results of comparison are set in the operation output register (R9000). Sufficient number of bytes are necessary in the memory to hold the inpu
  • Page 279B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE Parameters (a) Format specification Specify data length (1,2, or 4 bytes) and format for the input data ('constants data' or 'address data'). 0 0 Specification of data length 1: 1-byte length data 2: 2-byte length data 4: 4-byte length data Specification of format 0: C
  • Page 2804.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 Programming examples for the operation output register Programming examples of comparison between two positive value are shown bellow. (1) When checking that [input data] = [data compared] ACT R9000.5 R9000.0 Check result (2) When checking that [input data] != [data co
  • Page 281B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.6.2 COMP (Comparison: SUB 15) Compares input and comparison values. The value type in this instruction is BCD. Format Fig. 4.6.2 shows the ladder format and Table 4.6.2 shows the mnemonic format. W1 BYT Comparison result output SUB 15 ¡¡¡¡.¡ COMP ¡¡¡¡.¡ ACT ¡ Specifi
  • Page 2824.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 Control conditions (a) Specify the data size. (BYT) BYT = 0: Process data (input value and comparison value) is BCD two digits long. BYT = 1: Process data (input value and comparison value) is BCD four digits long. (b) Execution command (ACT) ACT = 0: The COMP instruct
  • Page 283B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.6.3 COIN (Coincidence Check: SUB 16) Checks whether the input value and comparison value coincide. The value type in this instruction is BCD. Format Fig. 4.6.3 shows the ladder format and Table 4.6.3 shows the mnemonic format. W1 Comparison BYT result output SUB 16 ¡
  • Page 2844.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 Control conditions (a) Specify the data size. BYT = 0: Process data (input value, and comparison values). Each BCD is two digits long. BYT = 1: Each BCD four digits long. (b) Execution command ACT = 0: The COIN instruction is not executed. W1 does not change. ACT = 1:
  • Page 285B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.7 DATA SEARCH The following types of data search instruction are available. Use any of these instructions as appropriate for your purpose. Instruction Sub Processing name number 1 DSCHB 34 Binary data search 2 DSCH 17 Data search - 265 -
  • Page 2864.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4.7.1 DSCHB (Binary Data Search: SUB 34) This function instruction instructs data search in the data table. DSCHB searches the data table for a specified data, outputs an address storing it counting from the beginning of the data table. If the data cannot be found, an
  • Page 287B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE Table 4.7.1 Mnemonic of DSCHB instruction Mnemonic format Status of operation result Step Address Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0 number No. 1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RST RST 2 RD.STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT RST ACT 3 SUB 34 DSCHB instruction 4 (PRM) ¡ Format designation 5 (PRM) ¡¡
  • Page 2884.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 Parameters (a) Format designation Specifies data length. Specify byte length in the first digit of the parameter. 1: 1 byte length 2: 2 bytes length 4: 4 bytes length (b) Storage address of number of data in data table Specifies address in which number of data in the d
  • Page 289B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.7.2 DSCH (Data Search: SUB 17) This function instruction instructs data search in the data table. DSCH searches the data table for a specified data, outputs an address storing it counting from the beginning of the data table. If the data cannot be found, an output is
  • Page 2904.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 Table 4.7.2 Mnemonic of DSCH instruction Mnemonic format Memory status of control condition Step Address Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0 number No. 1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ BYT BYT 2 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RST BYT RST 3 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT BYT RST ACT 4 SUB 17 DSCH instructio
  • Page 291B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE Parameters (a) Number of data of the data table Specifies the size of the data table. If the beginning of the data table is 0 and the end is n, n + 1 is set as the number of data of the data table. (b) Data table heading address Addresses that can be used in a data tab
  • Page 2924.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4.8 BIT OPERATION The following types of bit operation instruction are available. Use any of these instructions as appropriate for your purpose. Instruction Sub Processing name number 1 DIFU 57 Rising edge detection 2 DIFD 58 Falling edge detection 3 EOR 59 Exclusive O
  • Page 293B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.8.1 DIFU (Rising Edge Detection: SUB 57) The DIFU instruction sets the output signal to 1 for one scanning cycle on a rising edge of the input signal. Format Fig. 4.8.1 shows the ladder format and Table 4.8.1 shows the mnemonic format. ACT OUT SUB 57 DIFU Rising edge
  • Page 2944.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 Parameters 30i/31i/32i-A Dual check safety 1st PMC 2nd PMC (option) 3rd PMC (option) PMC (option) Rising edge 1 to 1000 1 to 256 1 to 256 1 to 256 number WARNING If the same number is used for another DIFU instruction or a DIFD instruction (described later) in one Ladd
  • Page 295B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.8.2 DIFD (Falling Edge Detection: SUB 58) The DIFD instruction set the output signal to 1 for one scanning period on a falling edge of the input signal. Format Fig. 4.8.2 shows the ladder format and Table 4.8.2 shows the mnemonic format. ACT OUT SUB 58 DIFD ¡¡¡¡ Fall
  • Page 2964.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 Parameters 30i/31i/32i-A Dual check safety 1st PMC 2nd PMC (option) 3rd PMC (option) PMC (option) Falling edge 1 to 1000 1 to 256 1 to 256 1 to 256 number WARNING If the same number is used for another DIFD instruction or a DIFU instruction (described above) in one lad
  • Page 297B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.8.3 EOR (Exclusive OR: SUB 59) The EOR instruction exclusive-ORs the contents of address A with a constant (or the contents of address B), and stores the result at address C. The value type in this instruction is binary. Format Fig. 4.8.3 shows the ladder format and
  • Page 2984.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 Parameters (a) Format specification Specify a data length (1, 2, or 4 bytes), and an input data format (constant or address specification). o 0 0 o Data length specification Format specification 1:1 byte 0: Constant 2:2 bytes 1: Address specification 4:4 bytes (b) Addr
  • Page 299B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.8.4 AND (Logical AND: SUB 60) The AND instruction ANDs the contents of address A with a constant (or the contents of address B), and stores the result at address C. The value type in this instruction is binary. Format Fig. 4.8.4 shows the ladder format and Table 4.8.
  • Page 3004.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 Parameters (a) Format specification Specify a data length (1, 2, or 4 bytes), and an input data format (constant or address specification). o 0 0 o Data length specification Format specification 1: 1 byte 0: Constant 2: 2 bytes 1: Address specification 4: 4 bytes (b) A
  • Page 301B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.8.5 OR (Logical OR: SUB 61) The OR instruction ORs the contents of address A with a constant (or the contents of address B), and stores the result at address C. The value type in this instruction is binary. Format Fig. 4.8.5 shows the ladder format and Table 4.8.5 sh
  • Page 3024.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 Parameters (a) Format specification Specify a data length (1, 2, or 4 bytes), and an input data format (constant or address specification). o 0 0 o Data length specification Format specification 1: 1 byte 0: Constant 2: 2 bytes 1: Address specification 4: 4 bytes (b) A
  • Page 303B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.8.6 NOT (Logical NOT: SUB 62) The NOT instruction inverts each bit of the contents of address A, and stores the result at address B. Format Fig. 4.8.6 shows the ladder format and Table 4.8.6 shows the mnemonic format. ACT SUB 62 000o Format specification NOT ¡¡¡¡ Add
  • Page 3044.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 Parameters (a) Format specification Specify a data length (1, 2, or 4 bytes). 0 0 0 o Data length specification 1: 1 byte 2: 2 bytes 4: 4 bytes (b) Address A Input data to be inverted bit by bit. The data that is held starting at this address and has the data length sp
  • Page 305B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.8.7 PARI (Parity Check: SUB 11) Checks the parity of code signals, and outputs an error if an abnormality is detected. Specifies either an even- or odd-parity check. Only one-byte (eight bits) of data can be checked. Format Fig. 4.8.7 (a) shows the ladder format and
  • Page 3064.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 (b) Reset (RST) RST=0: Disables reset. RST=1: Sets error output W1 to 0. That is, when a parity error occurs, setting RST to 1 results in resetting. (c) Execution command (ACT) ACT=0: Parity checks are not performed. W1 does not alter. ACT=1: Executes the PARI instruct
  • Page 307B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.8.8 SFT (Shift Register: SUB 33) This instruction shifts 2-byte (16-bit) data by a bit to the left or right. Note that W1=1 when data "1" is shifted from the left extremity (bit 15) in left shift or from the right extremity (bit 0) in right shift. Format Fig. 4.8.8 s
  • Page 3084.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 Control conditions (a) Shift direction specification (DIR)] DIR=0: Left shift DIR=1: Right shift (b) Condition specification (CONT) CONT=0: On "1" bit shifts by one bit in the specified direction. The condition of an adjacent bit (either right or left adjacent bit acco
  • Page 309B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE Parameters (a) Shift data addresses Sets shift data addresses. These designated addresses require a continuous 2-byte memory for shift data. Bit numbers are represented by bit 0 to 15 as shown below. When addresses are designated for programming, an address number is a
  • Page 3104.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4.9 CODE CONVERSION The following types of code conversion instruction are available. Use any of these instructions as appropriate for your purpose. Instruction Sub Processing name number 1 COD 7 Code conversion 2 CODB 27 Binary code conversion 3 DCNV 14 Data conversio
  • Page 311B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.9.1 COD (Code Conversion: SUB 7) Converts BCD codes into an arbitrary two- or four-digits BCD numbers. For code conversion shown in Fig. 4.9.1 (a) the conversion input data address, conversion table, and convert data output address must be provided. Set a table addre
  • Page 3124.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 Format Fig. 4.9.1 (b) shows the ladder format and Table 4.9.1 shows the mnemonic format. BYT Error output W1 ¡¡¡¡. ¡ SUB 7 RST ¡¡¡ Size of table data COD ¡¡¡¡ Conversion input data address ¡¡¡¡. ¡ ¡¡¡¡ Converted data output address ACT ¡¡¡¡. ¡ Control condition Table a
  • Page 313B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE Control conditions (a) Specify the data size. (BYT) BYT=0: Specifies that the conversion table data is to be BCD two digits. BYT=1: Specifies that the conversion table data is to be BCD four digits. (b) Error output reset (RST) RST=0: Disable reset RST=1: Sets error ou
  • Page 3144.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 Error output (W1) If an error occurs in the conversion input address during execution of the COD instruction, W1=1 to indicate an error. For example, W1=1 results if a number exceeding the table size specified in the sequence program is specified as the conversion inpu
  • Page 315B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.9.2 CODB (Binary Code Conversion: SUB 27) This instruction converts data in binary format to an optional binary format 1-byte, 2-byte, or 4-byte data. Conversion input data address, conversion table, and conversion data output address are necessary for data conversio
  • Page 3164.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 Format Fig. 4.9.2 (b) shows the ladder format and Table 4.9.2 shows the mnemonic format. Error output W1 RST SUB 27 CODB ACT ¡ Format designation ¡¡¡ Number of conversion table data ¡¡¡¡ Conversion input data address ¡¡¡¡ * Conversion data output address Fig. 4.9.2 (b)
  • Page 317B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE Parameters (a) Format designation Designates binary numerical size in the conversion table. 1: Numerical data is binary 1-byte data. 2: Numerical data is binary 2-byte data. 4: Numerical data is binary 4-byte data. (b) Number of conversion table data Designates size of
  • Page 3184.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4.9.3 DCNV (Data Conversion: SUB 14) Converts binary-code into BCD-code and vice versa. Format Fig. 4.9.3 shows the ladder format and Table 4.9.3 shows the mnemonic format. Error output BYT W1 ¡¡¡¡.¡ SUB 14 CNV ¡¡¡¡.¡ DCNV ¡¡¡¡.¡ ¡¡¡¡ Input data address RST ¡¡¡¡ Conver
  • Page 319B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE Control conditions (a) Specify data size. (BYT) BYT=0: Process data in length of one byte (8 bits) BYT=1: Process data in length of two bytes (16 bits) (b) Specify the type of conversion (CNV) CNV=0: Converts binary-code into BCD-code. CNV=1: Converts BCD-code into bin
  • Page 3204.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4.9.4 DCNVB (Extended Data Conversion: SUB 31) This instruction converts 1, 2, and 4-byte binary code into BCD code or vice versa. To execute this instruction, you must preserve the necessary number of bytes in the memory for the conversion result output data. Format F
  • Page 321B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE Control conditions (a) Sign of the data to be converted (SIN) This parameter is significant only when you are converting BCD data into binary coded data. It gives the sign of the BCD data. Note that though it is insignificant when you are converting binary into BCD dat
  • Page 3224.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 Error output (W1) W1=0: Correct conversion W1=1: Abnormally (The data to be converted is specified as BCD data but is found to be binary data, or the specified number of bytes cannot contain (and hence an overflow occurs) the BCD data into which a binary data is conver
  • Page 323B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.9.5 DEC (Decode: SUB 4) Outputs 1 when the two-digit BCD code signal is equal to a specified number, and 0 when not. Is used mainly to decode M or T function. The value type in this instruction is BCD. Format Fig. 4.9.5 (a) shows the ladder format and Table 4.9.5 (a)
  • Page 3244.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 Parameters (a) Code signal address Specify the address containing two-digit BCD code signals. (b) Decode specification There are two paths, the number and the number of digits. Decode specification ¡¡ ¡¡ Number of digits specification Number specification (i) Number: S
  • Page 325B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.9.6 DECB (Binary Decoding: SUB 25) DECB decodes one, two, or four-byte binary code data. When one of the specified eight consecutive numbers matches the code data, a logical high value (value 1) is set in the output data bit which corresponds to the specified number.
  • Page 3264.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 Decode result output SUB 25 0ooo Code ¡¡¡¡ 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 data DECB ¡¡¡¡ ¡¡¡¡ Decode designating number +0 1, 2 or 4-byte 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 binary code data Decode designating number +8 8n-1 8(n-1) Decode designating number +(8n-1) Decode designating numbers 8n nu
  • Page 327B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE ACT SUB 25 0ooo Format specification DECB ¡¡¡¡ * Code data address ¡¡¡¡ Decode designation ¡¡¡¡ Decode result output address Fig. 4.9.6 (d) Format of DECB instruction (extended specification) Table 4.9.6 (b) Mnemonic of DECB instruction (extended specification) Mnemoni
  • Page 3284.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 Parameters (a) Format specification Set the size of code data to the 1st digit of the parameter. 0001: Code data is in binary format of 1 byte length 0002: Code data is in binary format of 2 bytes length 0004: Code data is in binary format of 4 bytes length When settin
  • Page 329B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.10 OPERATION INSTRUCTION The following types of operation instruction are available. Use any of these instructions as appropriate for your purpose. Instruction Sub Processing name number 1 ADDB 36 Binary addition 2 SUBB 37 Binary subtraction 3 MULB 38 Binary multipli
  • Page 3304.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4.10.1 ADDB (Binary Addition: SUB 36) This instruction performs binary addition between 1-, 2-, and 4-byte data. In the operation result register (R9000), operating data is set besides the numerical data representing the operation results. The required number of bytes
  • Page 331B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE Control conditions (a) Reset (RST) RST=0: Release reset RST=1: Resets error output W1. In other words, makes W1=0. (b) Command (ACT) ACT=0: Do not execute ADDB. W1 does not change now. ACT=1: Execute ADDB. Parameters (a) Format specification Specifies data length (1, 2
  • Page 3324.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 Operation output register (R9000) This register is set with data on operation. If register bit is on, they signify the following operation data: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R9000 Zero Negative Overflow - 312 -
  • Page 333B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.10.2 SUBB (Binary Subtraction: SUB 37) This instruction subtracts one data from another, both data being in the binary format of 1, 2 or 4 bytes. In the operation result register (R9000), operation data is set besides the numerical data representing the operation. A
  • Page 3344.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 Control conditions (a) Reset (RST) RST=0: Release reset RST=1: Resets error output W1. (Set W1 to 0.) (b) Command (ACT) ACT=0: Do not execute SUBB. W1 does not change now. ACT=1: Execute SUBB. Parameters (a) Format specification Specifies data length (1, 2, and 4 bytes
  • Page 335B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE Operation output register (R9000) This register is set with data on operation. If register bit is on, they signify the following operation data: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R9000 Zero Negative Overflow - 315 -
  • Page 3364.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4.10.3 MULB (Binary Multiplication: SUB 38) This instruction multiplies 1-, 2-, and 4-byte binary data items. In the operation result register (R9000), operation data is set besides the numerical data representing the operation. A required number of bytes is necessary
  • Page 337B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE Control conditions (a) Reset (RST) RST=0: Release reset RST=1: Resets error output W1. In other words, makes W1=0. (b) Command (ACT) ACT=0: Do not execute MULB. W1 does not change now. ACT=1: Execute MULB. Parameters (a) Format specification Specifies data length (1, 2
  • Page 3384.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 Operation output register (R9000) This register is set with data on operation. If register bit is on, they signify the following operation data: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R9000 Zero Negative Overflow - 318 -
  • Page 339B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.10.4 DIVB (Binary Division: SUB 39) This instruction divides binary data items 1, 2, and 4 byte in length. In the operation result register (R9000), operation data is set and remainder is set to R9002 and following addresses. A required number of bytes is necessary t
  • Page 3404.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 Control conditions (a) Reset (RST) RST=0: Release reset RST=1: Resets error output W1. In other words, makes W1=0. (b) Command (ACT) ACT=0: Do not execute DIVB. W1 does not change now. ACT=1: Execute DIVB. Parameters (a) Format specification Specifies data length (1, 2
  • Page 341B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE Operation output register (R9000) This register is set with data on operation. If register bit is on, they signify the following operation data: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R9000 Zero Negative Overflow Remainder output address Depending on its length, the remainder is stored in on
  • Page 3424.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4.10.5 ADD (BCD Addition: SUB 19) Adds BCD two- or four-digit data. Format Fig. 4.10.5 shows the ladder format and Table 4.10.5 shows the mnemonic format. BYT W1 Error output ¡¡¡¡.¡ SUB 19 RST ADD ¡¡¡¡.¡ ¡¡¡¡.¡ ¡ Data format of addend (Constant or address) ACT ¡¡¡¡ Sum
  • Page 343B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE Control conditions (a) Specify the number of digits of data. (BYT) BYT=0: Data is BCD two digits long. BYT=1: Data is BCD four digits long. (b) Reset (RST) RST=0: Release reset. RST=1: Resets error output W1, that is, sets W1 to 0. (c) Execution command (ACT) ACT=0: Th
  • Page 3444.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4.10.6 SUB (BCD Subtraction: SUB 20) Subtracts BCD two- or four-digit data. Format Fig. 4.10.6 shows the ladder format and Table 4.10.6 shows the mnemonic format. BYT W1 Error output ¡¡¡¡.¡ SUB 20 RST SUB ¡¡¡¡.¡ ¡¡¡¡.¡ ¡ Data format of subtrahend ACT ¡¡¡¡ Minuend addre
  • Page 345B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE Control conditions (a) Specification of the number of digits of data. (BYT) BYT=0: Data BCD two digits long BYT=1: Data BCD four digits long (b) Reset (RST) RST=0: Release reset. RST=1: Resets error output W1, that is, sets W1 to 0. (c) Execution command (ACT) ACT=0: T
  • Page 3464.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4.10.7 MUL (BCD Multiplication: SUB 21) Multiplies BCD two- or four-digit data. The product must also be BCD two- or four-digit data. Format Fig. 4.10.7 shows the ladder format and Table 4.10.7 shows the mnemonic format. BYT W1 Error output ¡¡¡¡.¡ SUB 21 RST MUL ¡¡¡¡.¡
  • Page 347B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE Control conditions (a) Specify the number of digits of data. (BYT) BYT=0: Data is BCD two digits long. BYT=1: Data is BCD four digits long. (b) Reset (RST) RST=0: Releases reset. RST=1: Resets error output W1, that is, sets W1 to 0. (c) Execution command (ACT) ACT=0: T
  • Page 3484.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4.10.8 DIV (BCD Division: SUB 22) Divides BCD two- or four-digit data. Remainders are discarded. Format Fig. 4.10.8 shows the ladder format and Table 4.10.8 shows the mnemonic format. BYT W1 Error output ¡¡¡¡.¡ SUB 22 RST DIV ¡¡¡¡.¡ ¡¡¡¡.¡ ¡ Divisor data format designa
  • Page 349B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE Control conditions (a) Specify the number of digits of data. (BYT) BYT=0: Data is BCD two digits long. BYT=1: Data is BCD four digits long. (b) Reset (RST) RST=0: Releases reset. RST=1: Resets error output W1, that is, sets W1 to 0. (c) Execution command (ACT) ACT=0: T
  • Page 3504.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4.10.9 NUMEB (Definition of Binary Constants: SUB 40) This instruction defines 1, 2, or 4-bytes long binary constant. Data entered in decimal during programming is converted into binary data during program execution. The binary data is stored in the specified memory ad
  • Page 351B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE ACT SUB 40 0ooo Format specification NUMEB ¡¡¡¡ Constant ¡¡¡¡ Constant output address Fig. 4.10.9 (b) Format of NUMEB instruction (extended specification) Table 4.10.9 (b) Mnemonic of NUMEB instruction (extended specification) Mnemonic format Status of operation result
  • Page 3524.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 Parameters (a) Format specification Specifies data length (1, 2, or 4 bytes). Use the first parameter digit to specify byte length: 0001: Binary data of 1 byte length 0002: Binary data of 2 byte length 0004: Binary data of 4 byte length When setting format specificatio
  • Page 353B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.10.10 NUME (BCD Definition of Constant: SUB 23) Defines constants, when required. In this case, constants are defined with this instructions. The value type in this instruction is BCD. Format Fig. 4.10.10 shows the ladder format and Table 4.10.10 shows the mnemonic f
  • Page 3544.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 Parameters (a) Constant Sets the constant as the number of digits specified for control condition (a). (b) Constant output address Sets the address to which the constant defined in parameter (a) is output. - 334 -
  • Page 355B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.11 INSTRUCTIONS RELATED TO CNC FUNCTIONS The functions of the CNC can be used by means of the functional instructions of the PMC system. The following types of instruction are available. Use any of these instructions as appropriate for your purpose. Instruction Sub P
  • Page 3564.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4.11.1 DISPB (Display Message: SUB 41) This instruction displays messages on the CNC screen. You can also specify the message number to generate an alarm in the CNC. You can program up to 2000 messages. You must use the special message addresses in your program to simp
  • Page 357B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE Message display request memory Message data table 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 A000.0 (Message data corresponding to A0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 address A000.0) A1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 A000.1 (Message data corresponding to A2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 address A000.1) | | ∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼
  • Page 3584.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 (ii) Message display status memory This memory locates at the address A9000 to A9249 and has 2000 bits. Each bit corresponds to a message. While displaying a message in CNC screen, the corresponding bit is set to 1. The ladder can not write on this memory. (iii) Messag
  • Page 359B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE • Standard specification (applicable when the number of paths to be controlled is three or less) This message number consisting of 4 digits must always be defined at the start of each message data. Using this four- digit number, set the type and number of the message a
  • Page 3604.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 • Extended specification Set an eight-digit or nine-digit alphanumeric character string at the start of each set of message data to indicate the type and number of the message and the CNC screen on which the message is to be displayed. The format is as follows: Alarm m
  • Page 361B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE The following table shows the message numbers and the corresponding CNC screens. Message CNC screen Display contents number AL1+000= to Alarm screen Alarm message AL1+999= (Path 1) • Path 1 is placed in the alarm state. AL2+000= to Alarm screen Alarm message AL2+999= (
  • Page 3624.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 (c) If you write the message data items in the ROM after programming, you cannot change them any more (they will become fixed data items). The only exception is numerical values you want to use as variables. You can display these values, existing in memory at the time
  • Page 363B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE Parameter This parameter is not used. Enter "0" as the input value. (NOTE) NOTE Thanks to the compatibility with the former models, the instruction runs normally if the entered value is in the range between 1 and 2000. Numerical data display To change the numerical dat
  • Page 3644.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 NOTE 1 Sum of integer part digits and fractional part digits must be within 8. 2 Blank is displayed for digits exceeding 8 digits. 3 Do not use any space between the brackets, [ ]. (b) Example The following message includes 3 digits tool number at the spindle and the o
  • Page 365B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE Defining characters not found in the CNC screen Message characters not covered by the CNC screen keys (kanji and half-width kana characters) can be input as follows: (a) Half-width kana characters (i) Data format Numerical code enclosed by @ and @ (ii) Input method Ent
  • Page 3664.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 (iii) Example CAUTION 1 To define @, enter @40...@, where 40 is the code corresponding to @40 . . . . . @ Code for @ 2 To renew the message line displayed on the CNC screen, input as:@ 0A @ at the end of the data. 3 When using numerical codes, @ code occupies 1 byte, a
  • Page 367B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE Message shift function (a) General In the message data areas corresponding to contiguous message display request memory locations, message data can be displayed in any of several languages. The language in which a message is displayed is selected by shifting the messag
  • Page 3684.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 Example 2:. As common alarm messages, English message data is displayed with A0.0 through A9.7. Operator messages are set starting at A10.0 in the order of Japanese, English, Italian, German and so on, and German message data is displayed. Set the parameters as follows
  • Page 369B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE Example 3: As common alarm messages, English message data is displayed with A0.0 through A9.7. Operator messages are set starting at A10.0 in the order of Japanese, English, Italian, German and so on, with 40 successive messages assigned to each language. For these mes
  • Page 3704.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 (c) Notes The same message number should be assigned to a message in each language that has the same meaning. Message table A0.0 1000 English A (ALARM) ∼ A0.1 1001 English B (ALARM) ∼ A10.0 1000 Japanese 1 (OPE) A10.1 1001 Japanese 2 (OPE) PMC message multi-language di
  • Page 371B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.11.2 EXIN (External Data Input: SUB 42) This instruction enables the use of the external data input functions (options) of the CNC. It controls the "external data input signals" to be exchanged between CNC and PMC and automatically executes the CNC-PMC handshake sequ
  • Page 3724.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 Format Fig. 4.11.2 shows the ladder format and Table 4.11.2 shows the mnemonic format. ACT W1 SUB 42 EXIN ¡¡¡¡ Control data address Fig. 4.11.2 Format of EXIN instruction Table 4.11.2 Mnemonic of EXIN instruction Mnemonic format Status of operation result Step Address
  • Page 373B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE Parameter (a) Control data The control data needs 4 continuous bytes from the specification address. The path is specified to the 1st byte. The addresses G0 to G2 of the interface from PMC to NC are specified by after 3 bytes. For 2nd path, the addresses G1000 to G1002
  • Page 3744.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 [For multi path control] (1) 1st path CTL+0 : 0 or 1 CTL+1 to CTL+3 : Data to be specified for G0 to G2 In case of the extended specification (program number O8 digits etc.), it sets CTL+1 to CTL+5 as follows. CTL+1 to CTL+2 : Data to be specified for G0 to G1 CTL+3 to
  • Page 375B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE (5) 5th path CTL+0 : 5 CTL+1 to CTL+3 : Data to be specified for G4000 to G4002 In case of the extended specification (program number O8 digits etc.), it sets CTL+1 to CTL+5 as follows. CTL+1 to CTL+2 : Data to be specified for G4000 to G4001 CTL+3 to CTL+4 : Data to b
  • Page 3764.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 (9) 9th path CTL+0 : 9 CTL+1 to CTL+3 : Data to be specified for G8000 to G8002 In case of the extended specification (program number O8 digits etc.), it sets CTL+1 to CTL+5 as follows. CTL+1 to CTL+2 : Data to be specified for G8000 to G8001 CTL+3 to CTL+4 : Data to b
  • Page 377B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE End of transfer (W1) This indicates end of transfer of external data. This transfer end condition shows the end of a series of external data input sequence. This functional instruction executes a series of transfer sequence, and finally sets ESTB = 0 in the PMC → NC in
  • Page 3784.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4.11.3 WINDR (Reading CNC Window Data: SUB 51) This function reads various data items via the window between the PMC and the CNC. The "WINDR" is classified into two types. One type completes reading a data during one scan time. Another type completes reading a data dur
  • Page 379B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE Parameter (a) Control data address The PMC byte address is used to specify the area where control data is stored. Control data CTL+0 Function code * Set the control data area by sequence program before executing the +2 Completion code "WINDR" or "WINDW". +4 Data length
  • Page 3804.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 Notes when this functional instruction is used in subroutine When you use the function of a low-speed response, there are a few limitations. See Subsection 1.4.4.3. When you use the function of a high-speed response, there is no limitation. - 360 -
  • Page 381B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.11.4 WINDW (Writing CNC Window Data: SUB 52) This function writes various data items via the window between the PMC and the CNC. Format Fig. 4.11.4 shows the ladder format and Table 4.11.4 shows the mnemonic format. ACT W1 SUB 52 ¡¡¡¡ Control data WINDW address Fig.
  • Page 3824.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 Control data CTL+0 Function code * Set the control data area by sequence program before executing the +2 Completion code "WINDR" or "WINDW". +4 Data length +6 Data number +8 Data attribute +10 Writing data ∼ ∼ +n See Chapter 5. Writing completion (W1) W1=0: "W1" is usu
  • Page 383B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.11.5 AXCTL (Axis Control by PMC: SUB 53) NOTE To use this function requires that the PMC axis control option be set on the CNC side. Function This function simplifies the handshake of DI/DO signal for the axis control by PMC. Format Fig. 4.11.5 shows the ladder forma
  • Page 3844.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 Control condition ACT=0: The AXCTL function is not executed. If RST is 1, PMC axis control instruction reset processing is performed. ACT=1: The AXCTL function is executed. ACT is to be maintained '1' till the end of AXCTL processing. And reset ACT immediately after th
  • Page 385B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE Parameters (a) Group number of DI/DO signal Specify the DI/DO signal group by the number. Signal Set value group DI address DO address number 1 1 G142 to G149, G150.5 F130 to F132, F142 2 2 G154 to G161, G162.5 F133 to F135, F145 3 3 G166 to G173, G174.5 F136 to F138,
  • Page 3864.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 (b) Axis control data address Select the addresses of the locations that contain PMC axis control data. +0 Not used Specify 0. 1 Control command (EC0x to EC6x) 2 Command data 1 (EIF0x to EIF15x) 3 4 Command data 2 (EID0x to EID31x) 5 6 (x=A/B/C/D) 7 - 366 -
  • Page 387B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE The following functions are available. Operation Control Command data 1 Command data 2 Rapid traverse 00H Feedrate Total travel (Note 1) amount Cutting feed (feed per min.) 01H Feedrate Total travel (Note 2) amount Cutting feed 02H Feedrate per Total travel (feed per r
  • Page 3884.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 CAUTION 1 The rapid traverse rate is effective when parameter RPD (No. 8002#0) is set to 1. 2 When you specify 0 for feedrate, CNC does not work. Please release this state by RST = 1. 3 When you end a continuous feed or external pulse synchronization, set RST to 1. And
  • Page 389B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE Example 2) In case of machine coordinate positioning. +0 0H Not used (Specify 0). Command code for machine coordinate 1 20H selection. 2 0 or In case of CNC PRM8002#0 = 0 not used. Feedrate = 1 Feedrate. 3 Position in machine 4 coordinate system (Absolute) 5 6 7 CAUTIO
  • Page 3904.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 Operation output register (R9000) When error occurs by processing the axis control by PMC, the bit of the operation output register will be set. At the same time, processing is over (W1=1). 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R9000 Group number of DI/DO signal specification error NOTE 1 W
  • Page 391B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE Remarks (1) The following signals cannot be operated from this function. Please operate by LADDER. • Axis control stop signal ESTPx (G142.5, G154.5, G166.5, G178.5) • Servo-off signal ESOFx (G142.4, G154.4, G166.4, G178.4) • Block stop signal ESBKx (G142.3, G154.3, G16
  • Page 3924.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4.12 PROGRAM CONTROL The following types of program control instruction are available. Use any of these instructions as appropriate for your purpose. Instruction Sub Processing name number 1 COM 9 Common line control 2 COME 29 Common line control end 3 JMP 10 Jump 4 JM
  • Page 393B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.12.1 COM (Common Line Control: SUB 9) The coils in a region up to the common line control end instruction (COME) are controlled. Set 0 for the number of coils, and specify the range to be controlled using the common line control end instruction. If the common line co
  • Page 3944.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 Control conditions ACT=0: The coils within the region specified are unconditionally turned off (set to 0). ACT=1: The program operates in the same way as when COM is not used. Parameter (a) Specify 0. (Range specification only) CAUTION 1 Operation of the COM instructio
  • Page 395B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE Caution Do not create a program in which a combination of JMP and JMPE instructions is used to cause a jump to and from a sequence between the COM and COME instructions; the ladder sequence may not be able to operate normally after the jump. JMP instruction COM instruc
  • Page 3964.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4.12.2 COME (Common Line Control End: SUB 29) This instruction indicates the division in the region specification of the common line control instruction (COM). This instruction cannot be used alone. It must he used together with the COM instruction. Format Fig. 4.12.2
  • Page 397B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.12.3 JMP (Jump: SUB 10) The JMP instruction causes a departure from the normal sequence to executing instructions. When a JMP instruction is specified, processing jumps to a jump end instruction (JMPE) without executing the logical instructions (including functional
  • Page 3984.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 Format Fig. 4.12.3 (b) shows the ladder format and Table 4.12.3 shows the mnemonic format. ACT SUB 10 0 JMP Fig. 4.12.3 (b) Format of JMP instruction Table 4.12.3 Mnemonic of JMP instruction Mnemonic format Status of operation result Step Address Instruction Bit No. Re
  • Page 399B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE Caution Do not create a program in which a combination of JMP and JMPE instructions is used to cause a jump to and from a sequence between the COM and COME instructions; the ladder sequence may not be able to operate normally after the jump. JMP instruction COM instruc
  • Page 4004.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4.12.4 JMPE (Jump End: SUB 30) This instruction indicates the division in the region specification of the jump instruction (JMP). It cannot be used alone. It must be used together with the JMP instruction. Format Fig. 4.12.4 shows the ladder format and Table 4.12.4 sho
  • Page 401B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.12.5 JMPB (Label Jump 1: SUB 68) The JMPB functional instruction transfers control to a Ladder immediately after the label set in a Ladder program. The jump instruction can transfer control freely before and after the instruction within the program unit (main program
  • Page 4024.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 Control conditions ACT=0: The next instruction after the JMPB instruction is executed. ACT=1: Control is transferred to the Ladder immediately after the specified label. Parameters (a) Label specification Specifies the label of the jump destination. The label number mu
  • Page 403B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.12.6 JMPC (Label Jump 2: SUB 73) The JMPC functional instruction returns control from a subprogram to the main program. Be sure to code the destination label in the main program. The specifications of this JMPC functional instruction are the same as those of the JMPB
  • Page 4044.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 Control conditions ACT=0: The instruction after the JMPC instruction is executed. ACT=1: Control is transferred to the Ladder after the specified label. Parameters (a) Label specification Specifies the label of the jump destination. The label number must be specified i
  • Page 405B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.12.7 LBL (Label: SUB 69) The LBL functional instruction specifies a label in a Ladder program. It specifies the jump destination for the JMPB and JMPC functional instructions. (See the explanation of the JMPB and JMPC functional instructions.) Ladder program LBL AA L
  • Page 4064.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 Parameters (a) Label specification Specifies the jump destination for the JMPB and JMPC functional instructions. The label number must be specified in the L address form. A label number from L1 to L9999 can be specified. A label number can be used more than once as lon
  • Page 407B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.12.8 CALL (Conditional Subprogram Call: SUB 65) The CALL functional instruction calls a subprogram. When a subprogram number is specified in CALL, a jump occurs to the subprogram if a condition is satisfied. Format Fig. 4.12.8 shows the ladder format and Table 4.12.8
  • Page 4084.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 Parameters (a) Subprogram number Specifies the subprogram number of a subprogram to be called. The subprogram number must be specified in the P address form. Example: To call subprogram 1 ACT SUB 65 P1 CALL CAUTION Be careful when using the CALL instruction with the CO
  • Page 409B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.12.9 CALLU (Unconditional Subprogram Call: SUB 66) The CALLU functional instruction calls a subprogram. When a subprogram number is specified, a jump occurs to the subprogram. Format Fig. 4.12.9 shows the ladder format and Table 4.12.9 shows the mnemonic format. SUB
  • Page 4104.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4.12.10 SP (Subprogram: SUB 71) The SP functional instruction is used to create a subprogram. A subprogram number is specified as a subprogram name. SP is used with the SPE functional instruction (mentioned later) to specify the subprogram range. Format Fig. 4.12.10 sh
  • Page 411B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.12.11 SPE (End of a Subprogram: SUB 72) The SPE functional instruction is used to create a subprogram. SPE is used with the SP functional instruction. It specifies the range of a subprogram. When this functional instruction has been executed, control is returned to t
  • Page 4124.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4.12.12 END1 (1st Level Sequence Program End: SUB 1) Must be specifies once in a sequence program, either at the end of the 1st level sequence, or at the beginning of the 2nd level sequence when there is no 1st level sequence. SUB 1 END1 Fig. 4.12.12 Format of END1 ins
  • Page 413B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.12.14 END3 (3rd Level Sequence Program End: SUB 48) Specify this command at the end of the 3rd level sequence program, i.e. it indicates the end of the sequence program. If there is no 3rd level sequence program, this instruction need not be specified. SUB 48 END3 Fi
  • Page 4144.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4.12.17 CS (Case Call: SUB 74) The combination of one CS, one or more CM and one CE is used to construct a case call block. The CS starts the case call block and the CE ends the block. Each CM that should be located between the CS and CE specifies a sub program to be c
  • Page 415B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE In the following example program, the sub program corresponding to the case number is called. • R100 = 0 The sub program P10 is called. • R100 = 1 The sub program P20 is called. • R100 = 2 The sub program P50 is called. • R100 = n The sub program P15 is called. SUB10 J
  • Page 4164.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 Format Fig. 4.12.17 shows the ladder format and Table 4.12.17 shows the mnemonic format. SUB74 CS ¡¡¡¡ Case number (Signed integer in 2 bytes length) Fig. 4.12.17 Format of CS instruction Table 4.12.17 Mnemonic of CS instruction Mnemonic format Status of operation resu
  • Page 417B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.12.18 CM (Sub Program Call in Case Call: SUB 75) The combination of one CS, one or more CM and one CE is used to construct a case call block. The CM that should be located between the CS and CE is used to specify a sub program to be called when the case number meets
  • Page 4184.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4.12.19 CE (End of Case Call: SUB 76) The combination of one CS, one or more CM and one CE is used to construct a case call block. The CE ends the case call block. See the section 4.12.17 CS (Case Call: SUB 74) in details. Format Fig.4.12.19 shows the ladder format and
  • Page 419B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.13 ROTATION CONTROL The following types of rotation control instruction are available. Use any of these instructions as appropriate for your purpose. Instruction Sub Processing name number 1 ROT 6 Rotation control 2 ROTB 26 Binary rotation control - 399 -
  • Page 4204.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4.13.1 ROT (Rotation Control: SUB 6) Controls rotors, such as the tool post, ATC, rotary table, etc., and is used for the following functions. (a) Selection of the rotation direction via the shorter path (b) Calculation of the number of steps between the current positi
  • Page 421B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE Table 4.13.1 Mnemonic of ROT instruction Mnemonic format Status of operation result Step Address Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST5 ST4 ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0 number No. 1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RN0 RN0 2 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ BYT RN0 BYT 3 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ DIR RN0 BYT DIR 4 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ POS RN
  • Page 4224.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 (e) Specify the position or the number of steps. (INC) INC=0: Calculates the number of the position. If the position one position before the goal position is to be calculated, specify INC=0 and POS=1 INC=1: Calculates the number of steps. If the difference between the
  • Page 423B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE Rotating direction output (W1) The direction of rotation for control of rotation via the shorter path is output to W1. When W1=0, the direction is forward (FOR) when 1, reverse (REV). The definition of FOR and REV is shown in Fig. 4.13.1 (b). If the number given to the
  • Page 4244.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4.13.2 ROTB (Binary Rotation Control: SUB 26) This instruction is used to control rotating elements including the tool post, ATC (Automatic Tool Changer), rotary table, etc. In the ROT command a parameter indicating the number of rotating element indexing positions is
  • Page 425B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE Table 4.13.2 Mnemonic of ROTB instruction Mnemonic format Status of operation result Step Address Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST4 ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0 number No. 1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RN0 RN0 3 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ DIR RN0 DIR 4 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ POS RN0 BYT POS 5 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ INC RN0 B
  • Page 4264.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 Output for rotational direction (W1) See the ROT instruction. Example of using the ROTB instruction Fig. 4.13.2 (b) illustrates a ladder diagram for a 12-position rotor to be controlled for rotation via the shorter path and for deceleration at the position one position
  • Page 427B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE A A Logic 1 R0228.0 R0228.0 A R0228.0 A CR- CCW Shorter path or R0228.0 SUB 26 4 Reference data format not A ROTB D0000 Rotor indexing number R0228.1 X0041 Current position address F0026 Goal position address R0228.0 R0230 Calculation result output address A R0228.0 A
  • Page 4284.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4.14 INVALID INSTRUCTIONS The instructions listed below are invalid for 30i/31i/32i-A PMC. If a ladder program used for another model is run on 30i/31i/32i-A PMC, these instructions are not executed. They cause no error but are treated as NOP instructions (which perfor
  • Page 429B-63983EN/02 4.LADDER LANGUAGE 4.15 NOTE ON PROGRAMMING Some functional instructions may cause the ladder program to take a long time to stop or make it unable to stop, if their ACT or RST condition remains on for no apparent reason. If the ladder program does not stop, all operations aimed at chang
  • Page 4304.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/02 4. Write the resulting logic to flash ROM using the I/O screen. 5. Run the ladder program. If the ladder program does not stop or cannot be changed even after you make the correction, there may be other functional instructions that have the same condition settings. Che
  • Page 431B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5 WINDOW FUNCTIONS This chapter describes the functions that can be executed with the WINDR (SUB 51) and WINDW (SUB 52) functional instructions, as well as the formats and other details of the control data to be set for executing these functions. 1. Compatibility with
  • Page 4325.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 5.1 FORMATS OF CONTROL DATA Input and output control data has the following structure. Top address +0 Function code 2 Completion code 4 These data set as input data are remain Data length (Byte length of data area) unchanged in the output data. 6 Data number 8 Data at
  • Page 433B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.2 LOW-SPEED RESPONSE AND HIGH-SPEED RESPONSE There are two types of window function - one executed at high speed and the other executed at low speed. Number of scans to be executed until the window TYPE instruction is completed TWO SCAN TIMES OR MORE (Depends on the
  • Page 4345.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 5.2.1 Note on the Programming of a Low-speed Response Window Instruction If a low-speed response window instruction is programmed to keep its ACT condition to on for no apparent reason, it may result in the ladder program taking a long time to stop or not being able t
  • Page 435B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.3 LIST OF WINDOW FUNCTIONS Function group order Function Group Description Response R/W code CNC information 1 Reading CNC system information 0 High-speed R (Section 5.4) 2 Reading a tool offset 13 High-speed R 3 Write a tool offset 14 Low-speed W 4 Reading a workpi
  • Page 4365.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 Function Group Description Response R/W code Axis information 8 Reading the actual spindle speed 50 High-speed R (Section 5.5) 9 Reading the relative position on a controlled axis 74 High-speed R 10 Reading the remaining travel 75 High-speed R 11 Reading the actual ve
  • Page 437B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS Function Group Description Response R/W code Tool life 22 Writing tool life management data (tool information (1): 171 Low-speed W management Tool number) functions 23 Writing the tool management data (tool information (2): 172 Low-speed W (Section 5.6) Tool order num
  • Page 4385.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 *1 Function codes that have R in the R/W column are window read functions specifiable with the WINDR function command. Function codes that have W in the R/W column are window write functions specifiable with the WINDW function command. *2 Functions of "High-speed" in
  • Page 439B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS Function code order Function Description Response R/W code 0 Reading CNC system information High-speed R 13 Reading a tool offset High-speed R 14 Writing a tool offset Low-speed W 15 Reading a workpiece origin offset value High-speed R 16 Writing a workpiece origin of
  • Page 4405.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 Function Description Response R/W code 59 Reading the P-code macro variable High-speed R 60 Writing the P-code macro variable Low-speed W 74 Reading the relative position on a controlled axis High-speed R 75 Reading the remaining travel High-speed R 76 Reading CNC sta
  • Page 441B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS Function Description Response R/W code 231 Writing the tool life management data (tool information (1): Tool number) (8-digit Low-speed W tool number) 249 Presetting the relative coordinate Low-speed W 321 Reading a real type parameter High-speed R 323 Writing a real
  • Page 4425.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 5.4 CNC INFORMATION 5.4.1 Reading CNC System Information (High-speed Response) [Description] The system information specific to the CNC can be read including the CNC type (e.g., series name like 30), the distinction between the machining center system (M) and the lath
  • Page 443B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 0 2 (Completion code) 0 (Always terminates normally.) 4 (Data length) 14 6 (Data number) − 8 (Data attribute) − Value 10 ASCII characters CNC series name (2 bytes) (30) 12 ASCII characters Machine type M/T (2 byt
  • Page 4445.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 5.4.2 Reading a Tool Offset (High-speed Response) [Description] A tool offset value recorded in the CNC can be read. Wear offset data, geometric offset data, cutter compensation data, and tool length offset data can be read as a tool offset. [Input data structure] Top
  • Page 445B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS [Completion codes] 0: The tool offset has been read normally. 3: The offset number specified for reading is invalid. (This completion code is returned when the specified offset number data is not from 1 to the maximum number of offsets.) 4: There are mistakes in the d
  • Page 4465.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 5.4.3 Writing a Tool Offset (Low-speed Response) [Description] The tool offset value can be directly written into the CNC. Wear offset data, geometric offset data, cutter compensation data, and tool length offset data can be written as a tool offset. [Input data struc
  • Page 447B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS [Input data unit] Input Increment system system IS-A IS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E Machining center mm, deg 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 system inch 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001 Radius mm, deg 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 specification Diameter 0.01 0.001
  • Page 4485.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 14 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation of the completion codes.) 4 (Data length) L (L: Input data) 6 (Data number) N (N = Input data) 8 (Data attribute) M (Input data) Value 10 Signed binary (A negative va
  • Page 449B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.4.4 Reading a Workpiece Origin Offset Value (High-speed Response) [Description] The workpiece origin offset recorded in the CNC can be read. A workpiece origin offset is provided for each controlled axis (the first axis to the 32nd axis) in the CNC. Either the workp
  • Page 4505.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Completion codes] 0: The workpiece origin offset has been read normally. 3: The specified offset number is invalid. 4: The specified axis number is invalid. [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 15 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation of the c
  • Page 451B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.4.5 Writing a Workpiece Origin Offset Value (Low-speed Response) [Description] Data can be written directly as a workpiece origin offset value in the CNC. A workpiece origin offset is provided for each controlled axis (the first axis to the 32nd axis) in the CNC. Ei
  • Page 4525.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Input data unit] Input Increment system system IS-A IS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E Machining center mm, deg 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 system inch 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001 Radius mm, deg 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 specification Diameter 0.01 0.001
  • Page 453B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.4.6 Reading a Parameter (High-speed Response) [Description] The integer type parameter data of the CNC is read by directly accessing the CNC. There are four types of the integer parameters in the CNC: Bit parameters having a definite meaning for each bit, byte param
  • Page 4545.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Completion codes] 0: Parameter data has been read normally. 3: The parameter number specified for reading is invalid. 4: The specified data attribute is invalid because it is neither 0, -1, nor a value 1 to n (n is the number of axes). [Output data structure] Top add
  • Page 455B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.4.7 Writing a Parameter (Low-speed Response) [Description] Data can be written in an integer parameter in the CNC. There are four types of the integer parameters in the CNC: Bit parameters having a definite meaning for each bit, byte parameters holding 1-byte data,
  • Page 4565.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Completion codes] 0: Parameter data has been written normally. 2: The data byte length of the parameter specified for writing is invalid. 3: The parameter number specified for writing is invalid. 4: The specified data attribute is invalid because it is neither 0, -1,
  • Page 457B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.4.8 Reading a Real Type Parameter (High-speed Response) [Description] The real type parameter data of the CNC is read by directly accessing the CNC. [Input data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 321 2 (Completion code) − (Need not be set) 4 (Data length) −
  • Page 4585.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 321 2 (Completion code) ? (See the above explanation of the completion codes.) 4 (Data length) 6 6 (Data number) N 8 (N = input data) 10 (Data attribute) M (M = input data) 12 (Decimal point position) (Input data
  • Page 459B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.4.9 Writing a Real Type Parameter (Low-speed Response) [Description] Data can be written to a real type parameter data of the CNC. [Input data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 323 2 (Completion code) − (Need not be set) 4 (Data length) 6 6 (Data number) 8
  • Page 4605.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 323 2 (Completion code) ? (See the above explanation of the completion codes.) 4 (Data length) 6 6 (Data number) N 8 (N = input data) 10 (Data attribute) M (M = input data) 12 Decimal point position (Input data)
  • Page 461B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.4.10 Reading Setting Data (High-speed Response) [Description] The data set in the CNC is read by directly accessing the CNC. There are four types of setting data in the CNC: Bit setting data having a definite meaning for each bit, byte setting data stored in bytes,
  • Page 4625.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Completion codes] 0: Setting data has been read normally. 3: The setting number specified for reading is invalid. 4: The specified data attribute is invalid because it is neither 0, -1, nor a value from 1 to n (n is the number of axes). [Output data structure] Top ad
  • Page 463B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.4.11 Writing Setting Data (Low-speed Response) [Description] Data can be written as setting data in the CNC. For details of setting data, refer to the Operator's manual of the CNC. [Input data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 20 2 When no axis or one axis
  • Page 4645.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 20 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation of the completion codes.) 4 (Data length) L (N = Input data) 6 (Data number) N (N = Input data) 8 (Data attribute) M (M = Input data) Value 10 Setting data: Input dat
  • Page 465B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.4.12 Reading a Custom Macro Variable (High-speed Response) [Description] A custom macro variable in the CNC can be read. Custom macro variables may or may not be read depending on the variable type. (1) Local variables Local variables (#1 to #33) cannot be read. (2)
  • Page 4665.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Completion codes] 0: The custom macro variable has been read normally. 3: The number of a custom macro variable that cannot be read was specified as the data number. 4: The mantissa is out of range. [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 21 2 (Comple
  • Page 467B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.4.13 Writing a Custom Macro Variable (Low-speed Response) [Description] Data can be written in a custom macro variable in the CNC. For details of common variables, refer to the Operator's manual of the CNC. [Input data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 22 2
  • Page 4685.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 22 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation of the completion codes.) 4 (Data length) L (N: Input data) 6 (Data number) N (N = Input data) 8 (Data attribute) − (Need not be set) Value 10 Custom macro variable d
  • Page 469B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.4.14 Reading the CNC Alarm Status (High-speed Response) [Description] When the CNC is in the alarm status, the alarm status data can be read. The following alarm status data can be read: (1) First byte of alarm status data 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SW PW IO PS OT OH SV SR SW
  • Page 4705.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 (3) Third byte of alarm status data 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved) (4) Fourth byte of alarm status data 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved
  • Page 471B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS [Input data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 23 2 (Completion code) − (Need not be set) 4 (Data length) − (Need not be set) 6 (Data number) 0 8 (Data attribute) 0 10 (Data area) − (Need not be set) ≈ ≈ 42 - 451 -
  • Page 4725.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 23 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation of the completion codes.) 4 (Data length) L (L = 4) 6 (Data number) − 8 (Data attribute) − Value 10 Alarm status 4bytes bit type 14 CAUTION In the previous CNC model
  • Page 473B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.4.15 Reading the Current Program Number (High-speed Response) [Description] The program number of a machining program being executed or selected on the CNC can be read. When a subprogram is executed on the CNC, the program number of the main program can also be read
  • Page 4745.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 24 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation above.) 4 (Data length) 4 6 (Data number) − 8 (Data attribute) − Value 10 Current program number: ON Unsigned binary, 2 bytes long 12 Program number of main program:
  • Page 475B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.4.16 Reading the Current Sequence Number (High-speed Response) [Description] The sequence number of a machining program being executed on the CNC can be read. If sequence numbers are not assigned to all blocks of the machining program, the sequence number of the mos
  • Page 4765.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 25 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation of the completion codes.) 4 (Data length) L Note that the data length must be set to 4 bytes (L = 4) even though the current program number is 2 bytes long (the seque
  • Page 477B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS Data type Data Data type Data Identification G code for machining G code for lathe (T, G) Code in a Code in a group code center (M) A series B series C series group G00 0 G00 G00 G00 0 G01 1 G01 G01 G01 1 G02 2 G02 G02 G02 2 G03 3 G03 G03 G03 3 G33 4 G32 G33 G33 4 0 G
  • Page 4785.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 Data type Data Data type Data Identification G code for machining G code for lathe (T, G) Code in a Code in a group code center (M) A series B series C series group G50 0 G98 G98 0 10 G51 1 G99 G99 1 G66 1 G66 G66 G66 1 11 G67 0 G67 G67 G67 0 G54 0 G54 G54 G54 0 G55 1
  • Page 479B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS (2) Format and types of modal data for other than the G function Data 4 bytes FLAG1 1 byte FLAG2 1 byte 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - - - - - 0: Positive 1: Negative 0: A decimal point not specified 1: A decimal point specified 0: Not specified in the current block 1: Specified i
  • Page 4805.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 Data type Identification code Specified address Enter identification Description −2 codes 100 to 126 at one time. 100 B (Second auxiliary 101 D function) 102 E 103 F (Reserved) 104 H 105 L 106 M 107 S 108 T 109 R 110 P 111 Q 112 A 113 C 114 I 115 J 116 K 117 N 118 O 1
  • Page 481B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS [Input data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 32 2 (Completion code) − (Need not be set) 4 (Data length) − (Need not be set) 6 N = 0 to: See the identification codes of list of data (Data number) explained above. N N = −1: All data for G function (N: Data typ
  • Page 4825.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 32 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation of the completion codes.) 4 L=2 : G function (Data length) L L = 2*n : All data for G function (L = 2, 6, 2*n, 6*m) L=6 : Other than G function 6 (Data number) L = 6*
  • Page 483B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.4.18 Reading Diagnosis Data (Low-speed Response) [Description] The information displayed on the diagnosis data screen is read by directly accessing the CNC. [Input data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 33 2 (Completion code) − (Need not be set) 4 (Data len
  • Page 4845.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 33 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation of When no axis or one axis is specified the completion codes.) L = 1: Bit or byte data 4 L = 2: Word data (Data length) L = 4: Double word data L L = 6: Real type da
  • Page 485B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.4.19 Reading Value of the P-code Macro Variable (High-speed Response) [Description] This function gets the value of variable for Macro-compiler (P-code macro variable) of specified number. [Input data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 59 +2 (Completion code
  • Page 4865.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 59 +2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation above) +4 (Data length) 6 +6 (Data number) N (Same as input data) + 10 (Data attribute) − (Same as input data) Value + 12 Signed binary Value of P-code macro variabl
  • Page 487B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.4.20 Writing Value of the P-code Macro Variable (Low-speed Response) [Description] This function stores the value into the variable for Macro-compiler (P- code macro variable) of specified number. The extended P-code macro variable can not be written into. [Input da
  • Page 4885.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 60 +2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation above) +4 (Data length) 6 (Same as input data) +6 (Data number) N (Same as input data) + 10 (Data attribute) − (Same as input data) + 12 Value of P-code macro variab
  • Page 489B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.4.21 Reading CNC Status Information (High-speed Response) [Description] Status information (status indication on the screen) can be read from the CNC. The types of status information that can be read are as follows. (1) Indication of which mode is selected, automati
  • Page 4905.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 76 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation of the completion codes.) 4 (Data length) 14 6 (Data number) − (Input data) 8 (Data attribute) − (Input data) Value 10 Indication of which mode is currently 0 : MDI s
  • Page 491B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.4.22 Reading the Current Program Number (8-digit Program Numbers) (High-speed Response) [Description] This function reads CNC program numbers extended to 8 digits from the usual 4 digits. Basically, this function is the same as function code 24 excluding the differe
  • Page 4925.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 90 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation of the completion codes, above.) 4 (Data length) 8 6 (Data number) - 8 (Data attribute) - Value 10 Number of the program currently Unsigned binary format, 4-byte leng
  • Page 493B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.4.22 Entering Data on the Program Check Screen (Low-speed Response) [Description] On the program check screen of the CNC, data can be entered for the spindle tool No. (HD.T) and the next tool No. (NX.T). This function is effective only when bit 2 of parameter 3108 i
  • Page 4945.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 150 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation of the completion codes.) 4 (Data length) 4 (Input data) 6 N = 0 : Spindle tool No. (Data number) N (Input data) N = 1 : Next tool No. 8 (Data attribute) - (Input da
  • Page 495B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.4.23 Reading Clock Data (Date and Time) (High-speed Response) [Description] The current date (year, month, day) and time (hours, minutes, seconds) can be read from the clock built into the CNC. [Input data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 151 2 (Completion
  • Page 4965.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 151 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation of the completion codes.) 4 (Data length) 6/12 6 (Data number) N (Input data) 8 (Data attribute) - (Input data) Value 10 Current date (year) or time (hours) Unsigned
  • Page 497B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.4.24 Reading the Pitch Error Compensation Value (High-speed Response) [Description] The pitch error compensation value on CNC can be read. [Input data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 395 2 (Completion code) - (Need not be set) 4 (Data length) - (Need not
  • Page 4985.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 395 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation of the completion codes.) 4 (Data length) L (L = 1) 6 (Data number) - 8 (Data attribute) - 10 Pitch error compensation value (1 byte) 11 - 478 -
  • Page 499B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.4.25 Writing the Pitch Error Compensation Value (Low-speed Response) [Description] Data can be written as pitch error compensation value on the CNC. [Input data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 396 2 (Completion code) - (Need not be set) 4 (Data length) 1
  • Page 5005.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 396 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation of the completion codes.) 4 (Data length) L (L : Input data) 6 (Data number) N (N : Input data) 8 (Data attribute) M (M : Input data) 10 Pitch error compensation val
  • Page 501B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.5 AXIS INFORMATION 5.5.1 Reading the Actual Velocity of Controlled Axes (High-speed Response) [Description] The actual velocity of a movement on CNC-controlled axes can be read. Note that the read speed is the composite velocity for the controlled axes. When movemen
  • Page 5025.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 26 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation of the completion codes.) 4 (Data length) L (L = 4) 6 (Data number) - 8 (Data attribute) - Value 10 Actual velocity for controlled axes Unsigned binary
  • Page 503B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.5.2 Reading the Absolute Position (Absolute Coordinates) of Controlled Axes (High-speed Response) [Description] The absolute coordinates of the CNC-controlled axes for movement can be read. The absolute coordinates indicate those after cutter compensation or tool le
  • Page 5045.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 27 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation of the completion codes.) 4 (Data length) L (L = 4*n, n is the number of axes specified.) 6 (Data number) - 8 (Data attribute) M (M: Input data) Value 10 Absolute coo
  • Page 505B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.5.3 Reading the Machine Position (Machine Coordinates) of Controlled Axes (High-speed Response) [Description] The machine coordinates of CNC-controlled axes for movement can be read. The read value equals the machine coordinate indicated on the current position disp
  • Page 5065.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Completion codes] 0: The machine coordinates of the controlled axes have been read normally. 4: Data specified as the data attribute is invalid because it is neither -1 nor a value from 1 to n (n is the number of axes). Alternatively, the specified axis number is gre
  • Page 507B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS [Output data unit] Input Increment system system IS-A IS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E Machining center mm, deg 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 system inch 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001 Radius mm, deg 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 specification Diameter 0.01 0.00
  • Page 5085.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 5.5.4 Reading a Skip Position (Stop Coordinates of Skip Operation (G31)) of Controlled Axes (High-speed Response) [Description] When a block of the skip operation (G31) is executed by the CNC and the skip signal goes on to stop the machine, the absolute coordinates of
  • Page 509B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 29 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation of the completion codes.) 4 (Data length) L (L = 4*n, n is the number of axes specified.) 6 (Data number) - 8 (Data attribute) M (M: Input data) Value 10 Skip coordin
  • Page 5105.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 5.5.5 Reading the Servo Delay for Controlled Axes (High-speed Response) [Description] The servo delay, which is the difference between the specified coordinates of CNC-controlled axes and the actual servo position, can be read. [Input data structure] Top address + 0 (
  • Page 511B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 30 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation of the completion codes.) 4 (Data length) L (L = 4*n, n is the number of axes specified.) 6 (Data number) - 8 (Data attribute) M (M: Input data) Value 10 Servo delay
  • Page 5125.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 5.5.6 Reading the Acceleration/Deceleration Delay on Controlled Axes (High-speed Response) [Description] The acceleration/deceleration delay, which is the difference between the coordinates of controlled axes programmed in the CNC and the position after acceleration/d
  • Page 513B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 31 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation of the completion codes.) 4 (Data length) L (L = 4*n, n is the number of axes specified.) 6 (Data number) - 8 (Data attribute) M (M: Input data) Value 10 Acceleration
  • Page 5145.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 5.5.7 Reading the Feed Motor Load Current Value (A/D Conversion Data) (High-speed Response) [Description] The digital value converted from the load current of the CNC- controlled axis can be read. [Input data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 34 2 (Completion
  • Page 515B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS (b) Specifying a CNC-controlled axis (data attribute) Specify a CNC-controlled axis number for which the voltage conversion data for the load current is to be read. CAUTION There is no general-purpose analog input on 30i/31i/32i-A. If you need such a function, use the
  • Page 5165.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 34 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation of the completion codes.) 4 (Data length) 2 6 (Data number) N (Input data) 8 (Data attribute) M (Input data) Value 10 A/D conversion data (2 bytes) Binary number from
  • Page 517B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.5.8 Reading the Actual Spindle Speed (High-speed Response) [Description] The actual speed of the spindle can be read from the CNC. [Input data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 50 2 (Completion code) - (Need not be set) 4 (Data length) - (Need not be set) 6
  • Page 5185.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 50 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation of the completion codes.) 4 (Data length) 4 6 (Data number) - 8 (Data attribute) - Value 10 Actual spindle speed Unsigned binary min-1 - 498 -
  • Page 519B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.5.9 Reading the Relative Position on a Controlled Axis (High- speed Response) [Description] The relative coordinates of the machine moving along an axis controlled by the CNC can be read. [Input data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 74 2 (Completion code)
  • Page 5205.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 74 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation of the completion codes.) 4 (Data length) L (L = 4*n. n is the number of specified axes.) 6 (Data number) - 8 (Data attribute) M (M: Input data) Value 10 Relative coo
  • Page 521B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.5.10 Reading the Remaining Travel (High-speed Response) [Description] The remaining travel of the machine along an axis controlled by the CNC can be read. The read value equals the remaining travel indicated on the current position display screen on the CNC. (This s
  • Page 5225.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 75 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation of the completion codes.) 4 (Data length) L (L = 4*n. n is the number of specified axes.) 6 (Data number) - 8 (Data attribute) M (M: Input data) Value 10 Remaining tr
  • Page 523B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.5.11 Reading the Actual Velocity of each Controlled Axis (High- speed Response) [Description] The actual velocity of each controlled axis can be read. [Input data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 91 2 (Completion code) - (Need not be set) 4 (Data length) -
  • Page 5245.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 91 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation of the completion codes.) 4 (Data length) L (L=4*n, n is number of specified axes) 6 (Data number) - 8 (Data attribute) M (M: Input data) Value 10 Actual velocity of
  • Page 525B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.5.12 Reading Actual Spindle Speeds (High-speed Response) (1) Actual spindle speed [Description] This function reads the actual speed of the serial spindles. [Input data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 138 +2 (Completion code) - (Need not be set) +4 (Data
  • Page 5265.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 138 +2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation above.) +4 (Data length) L (L = 4 ´ n) +6 (Data number) - +8 (Data attribute) M (Entered data) Value +10 Actual speed of specified spindle Signed binary
  • Page 527B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS (2) Position coder-less actual spindle speed [Description] This function reads the actual spindle speed (position coder-less actual spindle speed) obtained by calculating the spindle motor speed of the serial spindles. [Input data structure] Top address + 0 (Function
  • Page 5285.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 138 +2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation above.) +4 (Data length) L (L = 4 ´ n) +6 (Data number) - +8 (Data attribute) M (Entered data) Value +10 Position coder-less actual spindle Signed binary speed
  • Page 529B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.5.13 Entering Torque Limit Data for the Digital Servo Motor (Low- speed Response) [Description] Torque limit values for the digital servo motor can be entered. [Input data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 152 2 (Completion code) - (Need not be set) 4 (Data
  • Page 5305.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 152 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation of the completion codes.) 4 (Data length) 2 (Input data) 6 (Data number) - (Input data) 8 (Data attribute) M (M: Input data) Value 10 Torque limit data (1 byte): Inp
  • Page 531B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.5.13 Reading Load Information of the Spindle Motor (Serial Interface) (High-speed Response) [Description] Load information of the serial spindle can be read. The equation to normalize the load information is shown below L Load(%) = l 32767 L: Data read from the wind
  • Page 5325.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Completion codes] 0: Load information of the serial spindle has been read normally. [Output data structure] L = 2: Specifies the first axis. L = 4: Specifies the second axis. (when N = -1) L = 6: Specifies the third axis. (when N = -2) L = 8: Specifies the fourth axi
  • Page 533B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS When three axes are specified 8 (Data attribute) - Value 10 First axis in the load information of Unsigned binary, 2 bytes long the serial spindle 12 Second axis in the load information of the serial spindle 14 Third axis in the load information of the serial spindle
  • Page 5345.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 5.5.14 Reading the Estimate Disturbance Torque Data (High-speed Response) Using the abnormal load detection function, the CNC constantly calculates an estimated load torque. Enabling the estimated load torque output function makes you able to read the data by using th
  • Page 535B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS [Input data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 211 +2 (Completion code) - (Need not to be set) +4 (Data length) - (Need not to be set) +6 (Data number) 0 +8 (Data attribute) M = 1 to n: Estimate disturbance torque M data for specific axis. "n" is the (M = Axis
  • Page 5365.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Completion codes] 0: The estimate disturbance torque data have been read normally. 4: The data specified as the data attribute is invalid because it is neither -1 nor a value from 1 to n (n is the number of axes). Alternatively, the specified axis number is greater t
  • Page 537B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS (2) Spindle axis [Description] This function can read the estimate disturbance torque data. The estimate disturbance torque data is the load torque data except a necessary torque data for acceleration / deceleration of the spindle motor. This read value is normalized
  • Page 5385.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Completion codes] 0: The estimate disturbance torque data have been read normally. 4: The data specified as the data attribute is invalid because it is neither -1 nor a value from 1 to n (n is the number of axes). Alternatively, the specified axis number is greater t
  • Page 539B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.5.15 Presetting the Relative Coordinate (Low-speed Response) [Description] The preset data is set to the relative coordinate controlled by CNC. If 0 is set as preset data it becomes to origin. But it is impossible to write the value of preset data to the transferrin
  • Page 5405.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Input data unit] Input Increment system system IS-A IS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E Machining center mm, deg 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 system inch 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001 Radius mm, deg 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 specification Diameter 0.01 0.001
  • Page 541B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS [Completion codes] 0: Success to set the value of relative coordinate. 4: Data specified for the data attribute is invalid because it is neither -1 nor a value from 1 to n (n is the number of axes). Alternatively, the specified axis number is greater than the number o
  • Page 5425.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 5.6 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT FUNCTION 5.6.1 Reading The Tool Life Management Data (Tool Group Number) (High-speed Response) [Description] This function reads the tool group number in which the specified tool number is registered. [Input data structure] Top address + 0 (Fu
  • Page 543B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS [Completion codes] 0: The tool group number is read successfully. 4: The tool number in 'Data Attribute' has a wrong value. 5: The tool number is not registered. 6: The tool life management option has not been added on. [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Functio
  • Page 5445.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 5.6.2 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Number of Tool Groups) (High-speed Response) [Description] This function reads the number of tool groups in the tool life management data. The maximum number of pairs of tool life management data in whole CNC system is 256 pair
  • Page 545B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS [Input data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 39 2 (Completion code) - (Need not be set) 4 (Data length) - (Need not be set) 6 (Data number) 0 8 (Data attribute) 0 10 (Data area) - (Need not be set) » » 42 [Completion codes] 0: The number of tool group number
  • Page 5465.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 39 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation of the completion codes.) 4 (Data length) 4 6 (Data number) - 8 (Data attribute) - Value 10 Number of tool groups (4 bytes) Unsigned binary - 526 -
  • Page 547B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.6.3 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Number of Tools) (High- speed Response) [Description] This function reads the number of tools that belong to the tool group specified by tool group number, from the tool life management data. The number of tools that can be reg
  • Page 5485.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Input data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 40 2 (Completion code) - (Need not be set) 4 (Data length) - (Need not be set) 6 (Data number) N (N: Tool group number) 8 (Data attribute) 0 10 (Data area) - (Need not be set) » » 42 CAUTION Specifying "0" to the
  • Page 549B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 40 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation of the completion codes.) 4 (Data length) 4 6 (Data number) N (N: Input data) 8 (Data attribute) - Value 10 Number of tools (4 bytes) Unsigned binary - 529 -
  • Page 5505.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 5.6.4 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life) (High-speed Response) [Description] This function reads the tool life value of the tool group specified by tool group number, from the tool life management data. You can choose the method to manage tool lives by peri
  • Page 551B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS [Completion codes] 0: The tool life has been read successfully. 3: The specified tool group number is incorrect. 6: No option for the tool life management. [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 41 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation of the com
  • Page 5525.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 5.6.5 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life Counter) (High-speed Response) [Description] This function reads the tool life counter of the tool group specified by tool group number, from the tool life management data. [Input data structure] Top address + 0 (Func
  • Page 553B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS [Completion codes] 0: The tool life has been read successfully. 3: The specified tool group number is incorrect. 6: No option for the tool life management. [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 42 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation of the com
  • Page 5545.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 5.6.6 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Compensation Number (1): Tool Number) (High-speed Response) [Description] This function reads the tool length compensation number of the tool specified by tool group number and tool number, from the tool life manage
  • Page 555B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS [Completion codes] 0: The tool length compensation number has been read successfully. 3: The specified tool group number is incorrect. 4: The specified tool number is incorrect. 5: The specified tool number is not found in the specified tool group. 6: No option for th
  • Page 5565.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 5.6.7 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Compensation Number (2): Tool Order Number) (High-speed Response) [Description] This function reads the tool length compensation number of the tool specified by tool group number and tool order number, from the tool
  • Page 557B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS CAUTION Specifying "0" to the tool group number means the tool group that is currently selected. While no tool group is selected yet after power-on of CNC, specifying the current group results "0" of tool length compensation number. Specifying "0" to the tool order nu
  • Page 5585.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 5.6.8 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Radius Compensation Number (1): Tool Number) (High-speed Response) [Description] This function reads the cutter radius compensation number of the tool specified by tool group number and tool number, from the tool life ma
  • Page 559B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS [Completion codes] 0: The cutter radius compensation number has been read successfully. 3: The specified tool group number is incorrect. 4: The specified tool number is incorrect. 5: The specified tool number was not found in the specified tool group. 6: No option for
  • Page 5605.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 5.6.9 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Radius Compensation Number (2): Tool Order Number) (High-speed Response) [Description] This function reads the cutter radius compensation number of the tool specified by tool group number and tool order number, from the
  • Page 561B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS CAUTION If 0 is specified for the tool group number, the tool group currently used is referred. In this case, if any tool group has not been used since the power to the CNC was turned on, 0 is read. When 0 is specified for the tool order number, the data of the curren
  • Page 5625.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 5.6.10 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Information (1): Tool Number) (High-speed Response) [Description] This function reads the status information of the tool specified by tool group number and tool number, from the tool life management data. [Input data stru
  • Page 563B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS [Completion codes] 0: The tool status information has been read successfully. 3: The specified tool group number is incorrect. 4: The specified tool number is incorrect. 5: The specified tool number was not found in the specified tool group. 6: No option for the tool
  • Page 5645.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 5.6.11 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Information (2): Tool Order Number) (High-speed Response) [Description] This function reads the status information of the tool specified by tool group number and tool order number, from the tool life management data. [Inp
  • Page 565B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS [Completion codes] 0: The tool status information has been read successfully. 3: The specified tool group number is incorrect. 4: The specified tool order number is incorrect. 5: The specified tool group has no tool in the specified tool order position. 6: No option f
  • Page 5665.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 5.6.12 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Number) (High- speed Response) [Description] This function reads the tool number of the tool specified by tool group number and tool order number, from the tool life management data. [Input data structure] Top address + 0
  • Page 567B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS [Completion codes] 0: The tool number has been read successfully. 3: The specified tool group number is incorrect. 4: The specified tool order number is incorrect. 5: The specified tool group has no tool in the specified tool order position. 6: No option for the tool
  • Page 5685.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 5.6.13 Reading the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life Counter Type) (High-speed Response) [Description] This function reads the tool life counter type of the tool group specified by tool group number, from the tool life management data. [Input data structure] Top ad
  • Page 569B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 160 +2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation above) +4 (Data length) 2 +6 (Data number) N (Same as input data) +8 (Data attribute) - (Same as input data) Value + 10 Tool life counter type (2 bytes) 0 : No coun
  • Page 5705.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 5.6.14 Registering Tool Life Management Data (Tool Group) (Low-speed Response) [Description] This function registers a tool group in the tool life management data, with tool number, length of life and tool life counter type. [Input data structure] Top address + 0 (Fun
  • Page 571B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS [Completion codes] 0: Succeeded to register the tool group. 3: The specified tool group number is incorrect. 4: The tool number in 'Data attribute' has wrong value. 5: The length of tool life in 'Data area' is out of range. 6: No option for the tool life management. [
  • Page 5725.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 5.6.15 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life) (Low-speed Response) [Description] This function sets the length of tool life of the specified tool group in the tool life management data. [Input data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 164 +2 (Completion c
  • Page 573B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS [Completion codes] 0: Succeeded to set the length of tool life. 3: The specified tool group number is incorrect. 5: The length of tool life is out of range. 6: No option for the tool life management. 13: The data of the currently selected tool group or the next tool g
  • Page 5745.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 5.6.16 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life Counter) (Low-speed Response) [Description] This function sets the tool life counter in the specified tool group in the tool life management data. [Input data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 165 +2 (Comple
  • Page 575B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 165 +2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation above) +4 (Data length) 4 (Same as input data) +6 (Data number) N (Same as input data) +8 (Data attribute) - (Same as input data) + 10 Length of Tool life (4 bytes)
  • Page 5765.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 5.6.17 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life Counter Type) (Low-speed Response) [Description] This function sets the tool life counter type of specified tool group in the tool life management data. [Input data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 166 +2 (
  • Page 577B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 166 +2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation above) +4 (Data length) 2 (Same as input data) +6 (Data number) N (Same as input data) +8 (Data attribute) - (Same as input data) + 10 Tool life counter type (2 byt
  • Page 5785.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 5.6.18 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Compensation Number (1): Tool Number) (Low-speed Response) [Description] This function sets the tool length compensation number of the specified tool group in the tool life management data. [Input data structure] T
  • Page 579B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 167 +2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation above) +4 (Data length) 4 (Same as input data) +6 (Data number) N (Same as input data) +8 (Data attribute) M (Same as input data) + 10 Tool length compensation numb
  • Page 5805.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 5.6.19 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Compensation Number (2): Tool Order Number) (Low-speed Response) [Description] This function sets the tool length compensation number of the tool of the specified tool order number in the tool life management data.
  • Page 581B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 168 +2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation above) +4 (Data length) 4 (Same as input data) +6 (Data number) N (Same as input data) +8 (Data attribute) M (Same as input data) + 10 Tool length compensation numb
  • Page 5825.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 5.6.20 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Radius Compensation Number (1): Tool Number) (Low-speed Response) [Description] This function sets the cutter radius compensation number of the specified tool group in the tool life management data. [Input data structur
  • Page 583B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 169 +2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation above) +4 (Data length) 4 (Same as input data) +6 (Data number) N (Same as input data) +8 (Data attribute) M (Same as input data) + 10 Cutter radius compensation nu
  • Page 5845.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 5.6.21 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Radius Compensation Number (2): Tool Order Number) (Low-speed Response) [Description] This function sets the cutter radius compensation number of the tool of the specified tool order number in the tool life management d
  • Page 585B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 170 +2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation above) +4 (Data length) 4 (Same as input data) +6 (Data number) N (Same as input data) +8 (Data attribute) M (Same as input data) +10 Cutter radius compensation num
  • Page 5865.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 5.6.22 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Information (1): Tool Number) (Low-speed Response) [Description] This function sets the Tool condition of the specified Tool group in the Tool life management data. [Input data structure] Top address + 0 (Function cod
  • Page 587B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 171 +2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation above) +4 (Data length) 2 (Same as input data) +6 (Data number) N (Same as input data) +8 (Data attribute) M (Same as input data) +10 Tool information (2 bytes) +12
  • Page 5885.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 5.6.23 Writing the Tool Management Data (Tool Information (2): Tool Order Number) (Low-speed Response) [Description] This function changes the status of the tool specified by tool group number and tool order number, in the tool life management data. [Input data struct
  • Page 589B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 172 +2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation above) +4 (Data length) 2 (Same as input data) +6 (Data number) N (Same as input data) +8 (Data attribute) M (Same as input data) +10 Tool information (2 bytes) Thi
  • Page 5905.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 5.6.24 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Number) (Low-speed Response) [Description] This function registers a tool to the specified tool group in the tool life management data. [Input data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 173 +2 (Completion code) - (Ne
  • Page 591B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 173 +2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation above) +4 (Data length) 4 (Same as input data) +6 (Data number) N (Same as input data) +8 (Data attribute) M (Same as input data) +10 Tool number (4 bytes) - 571 -
  • Page 5925.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 5.6.25 Reading The Tool Life Management Data (Tool Group Number) (High-speed Response) (8-digit tool number) [Description] This function reads the tool group number in which the specified tool number is registered. This function supports 8 digits tool number. [Input d
  • Page 593B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS [Completion codes] 0: The tool group number is read successfully. 4: The tool number in 'Data Attribute' has a wrong value. 5: The tool number is not registered. 6: The tool life management option has not been added on. [Output data structure] Top address 0 (Function
  • Page 5945.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 5.6.26 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Information (1): Tool Number) (High-speed Response) (8-digit tool number) [Description] This function reads the status information of the tool specified by tool group number and tool number, from the tool life management
  • Page 595B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS [Completion codes] 0: The tool information was read successfully. 3: The specified tool group number is incorrect. 4: The specified tool number is incorrect. 5: The specified tool number is not registered to the specified tool group. 6: No option for the tool life man
  • Page 5965.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 5.6.27 Registering Tool Life Management Data (Tool Group Number) (Low-speed Response) (8-digit tool number) [Description] This function registers the tool group number to tool life management data. Set the tool number, life value and life counter type to the specified
  • Page 597B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS NOTE CNC parameter FCO(6805#0) decides the unit of tool life value of real time counter type as follows: 6805#0 = 0 : 1 minute (1–4300) 6805#0 = 1 : 0.1 minute (1–43000) With the tool life management B function, this parameter also decides the effective region of life
  • Page 5985.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Output data structure] Top address 0 (Function code) 202 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation above.) 4 (Data length) 8 (Same as input data) 6 (Data number) - (Same as input data) 8 (Data attribute) M (Same as input data) 12 Tool group number (2 bytes) (Same as
  • Page 599B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.6.28 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Compensation Number (1): Tool Number) (High-speed Response) (8-digit tool number) [Description] This function reads the tool length compensation number of the tool specified by tool group number and tool number, fr
  • Page 6005.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Completion codes] 0: The tool length compensation number was read successfully. 3: The specified tool group number is incorrect. 4: The specified tool number is incorrect. 5: The specified tool number is not registered to the specified tool group. 6: No option for th
  • Page 601B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.6.29 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Radius Compensation Number (1): Tool Number) (High-speed Response) (8-digit tool number) [Description] This function reads the cutter radius compensation number of the tool specified by tool group number and tool number
  • Page 6025.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Completion codes] 0: The cutter radius compensation number was read successfully. 3: The specified tool group number is incorrect. 4: The specified tool number is incorrect. 5: The specified tool number is not registered to the specified tool group. 6: No option for
  • Page 603B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.6.30 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Compensation Number (1): Tool Number) (Low-speed Response) (8-digit tool number) [Description] This function sets the tool length compensation number of a specified tool group in the tool life management data. [Inp
  • Page 6045.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Output data structure] Top address 0 (Function code) 229 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation above.) 4 (Data length) 4 (Same as input data) 6 (Data number) N (Same as input data) 8 (Data attribute) M (Same as input data) 12 Tool length compensation number (4 b
  • Page 605B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.6.31 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Radius Compensation Number (1): Tool Number) (Low-speed Response) (8-digit tool number) [Description] This function sets the cutter radius compensation number of a tool belonging to a specified tool group in the tool li
  • Page 6065.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Output data structure] Top address 0 (Function code) 230 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation above.) 4 (Data length) 4 (Same as input data) 6 (Data number) N (Same as input data) 8 (Data attribute) M (Same as input data) 12 Cutter radius compensation number (4
  • Page 607B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.6.32 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Information (1): Tool Number) (Low-speed Response) (8-digit tool number) [Description] This function sets the tool information of a tool belonging to a specified tool group in the tool life management data. This funct
  • Page 6085.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Output data structure] Top address 0 (Function code) 231 2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation above.) 4 (Data length) 2 (Entered data) 6 (Data number) N (Entered data) 8 (Data attribute) M (Entered data) 12 Tool information (2 bytes) 14 This function changes to
  • Page 609B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.6.33 Deleting Tool life Management Data (Tool Group) (Low-speed Response) [Description] This function deletes the specified tool group in the tool life management data. In other words, it makes the tool group to be unregistered. [Input data structure] Top address +
  • Page 6105.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 324 +2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation above) +4 (Data length) 0 (Same as input data) +6 (Data number) N (Same as input data) +8 (Data attribute) 0 (Same as input data) +10 - 590 -
  • Page 611B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.6.34 Deleting Tool life Management Data (Tool Data) (Low-speed Response) [Description] This function deletes the tool data at the specified tool order number in the tool life management data. [Input data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 325 +2 (Completion
  • Page 6125.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 325 +2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation above) +4 (Data length) 0 (Same as input data) +6 (Data number) N (Same as input data) +8 (Data attribute) M (Same as input data) +10 - 592 -
  • Page 613B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.6.35 Clearing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life Counter and Tool Information) (Low-speed Response) [Description] This function clears the tool life counter and all tool information of the specified tool group in the tool life management data. [Input data structur
  • Page 6145.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 326 +2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation above) +4 (Data length) 0 (Same as input data) +6 (Data number) N (Same as input data) +8 (Data attribute) 0 (Same as input data) +10 - 594 -
  • Page 615B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.6.36 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Arbitrary Group Number) (Low-speed Response) [Description] This function sets arbitrary group number of the specified tool group in the tool life management data. [Input data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 327 +2 (
  • Page 6165.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 327 +2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation above) +4 (Data length) 4 (Same as input data) +6 (Data number) N (Same as input data) +8 (Data attribute) 0 (Same as input data) +10 Arbitrary group number (4 byte
  • Page 617B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.6.37 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Remaining Tool Life) (Low-speed Response) [Description] This function sets the length of remaining tool life of the specified tool group in the tool life management data. [Input data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code)
  • Page 6185.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 328 +2 (Completion code) ? (See the explanation above) +4 (Data length) 4 (Same as input data) +6 (Data number) N (Same as input data) +8 (Data attribute) 0 (Same as input data) +10 Remaining tool life (4 bytes)
  • Page 619B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.7 TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Commands regarding the main axis position and standby position of a multi- path system In a multi-path system, the tool management data and the cartridge data are shared by the paths. Regarding the main axis position and standby position,
  • Page 6205.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 5.7.1 Moving (Exchanging) Tool Management Data Numbers in a Cartridge Management Table (Low-speed Response) [Description] The tool management data numbers of the two pot numbers of the specified cartridge numbers are exchanged. When the cartridge number is in the rang
  • Page 621B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS [Completion codes] 0: The processing has been executed normally. 2: The data length is invalid. 5: The specified cartridge number or pot number is not registered. 6: The necessary option is not found. [Detailed completion codes] The detailed completion code is always
  • Page 6225.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 5.7.2 Searching for a Free Pot (Low-speed Response) [Description] The nearest free pot (one whose tool management data number is 0) in the same cartridge is searched for, with reference to the specified pot position. The main axis and standby positions are not regarde
  • Page 623B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS [Detailed completion codes] The detailed completion code is always 0 when the completion code is other than 3. When the completion code is 3, the detailed completion code is one of the following values: 21: The cartridge number is invalid. 22: The pot number is invali
  • Page 6245.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 5.7.3 Registering New Tool Management Data (Low-speed Response) [Description] A new tool is registered, based on the specified cartridge number and pot number. The system searches for a free area, starting from the top of the memory space, and registers the specified
  • Page 625B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS [Input data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 331 +2 (Completion code) - +4 (Need not be set) (Data length) 76, 140, or 220 +6 (Data number) Cartridge number +8 (Data attribute) - (Need not be set) +10 (Data number 2) Pot number +12 (Detailed completion code)
  • Page 6265.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 » » Top address + 22 Maximum tool life value (4 bytes) +26 Predicted tool life value (4 bytes) +30 Tool life status (1 byte) +31 Customized data 0 (1 byte) +32 Tool information (2 bytes) +34 Tool length compensation H (2 bytes) For the machining and lathe systems +36
  • Page 627B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS » » Top address + 86 Customized data 4 (4 bytes) +90 Customized data 5 (4 bytes) +94 Customized data 6 (4 bytes) » » +150 Customized data 20 (4 bytes) +154 Customized data 21 (4 bytes) » » +230 Customized data 40 (4 bytes) [Completion codes] 0: The processing has been
  • Page 6285.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 12: The specified tool geometry compensation number (G) is invalid (for the lathe system only). 13: The specified tool wear compensation number (W) is invalid (for the lathe system only). 31 to 70: The specified customized data (1 to 40) is invalid. [Output data struc
  • Page 629B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 5.7.4 Writing Tool Management Data (Low-speed Response) [Description] The tool management data is changed, based on the specified cartridge number, pot number, or tool management data number. In the case of a free pot (a tool management data number is not assigned), e
  • Page 6305.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Input data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 332 +2 (Completion code) - (Need not be set) +4 (Data length) 76, 140, or 220 +6 (Data number) Cartridge number +8 (Data attribute) - (Need not be set) +10 (Data number 2) Pot number +12 (Detailed completion code)
  • Page 631B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS » » Top address + 22 Maximum tool life value (4 bytes) +26 Predicted tool life value (4 bytes) +30 Tool life status (1 byte) +31 Customized data 0 (1 byte) +32 Tool information (2 bytes) +34 Tool length compensation H (2 bytes) For the machining and lathe systems +36
  • Page 6325.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 » » Top address + 86 Customized data 4 (4 bytes) +90 Customized data 5 (4 bytes) +94 Customized data 6 (4 bytes) » » +150 Customized data 20 (4 bytes) +154 Customized data 21 (4 bytes) » » +230 Customized data 40 (4 bytes) [Completion codes] 0: The processing has been
  • Page 633B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 9: The specified cutter compensation number (D) is invalid [for the machining and lathe systems (compound)]. 10: The specified main axis rotation speed (S) is invalid. 11: The specified cutting feedrate (F) is invalid. 12: The specified tool geometry compensation numb
  • Page 6345.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 5.7.5 Deleting Tool Management Data (Low-speed Response) [Description] The tool management data is deleted, based on the specified cartridge number and pot number. In the case of a free pot (a tool management data number is not assigned), error code 9 is returned. [In
  • Page 635B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 333 +2 (Completion code) See the above explanation of the completion codes. +4 (Data length) 0 +6 (Data number) Cartridge number +8 (Data attribute) - +10 (Data number 2) Pot number +12 (Detailed completion code)
  • Page 6365.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 5.7.6 Reading Tool Management Data (Low-speed Response) [Description] The tool management data is read, based on the specified cartridge number, pot number, or tool management data number. In the case of a free pot (a tool management data number is not assigned), erro
  • Page 637B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS [Detailed completion codes] The detailed completion code is always 0 when the completion code is other than 3. When the completion code is 3, the detailed completion code is one of the following values: 21: The cartridge number is invalid. 22: The pot number is invali
  • Page 6385.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 334 +2 (Completion code) See the above explanation of the completion codes. +4 (Data length) 76 or 140 +6 (Data number) Cartridge number +8 (Data attribute) - +10 (Data number 2) Pot number +12 (Detailed completi
  • Page 639B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS » » Top address + 38 Main axis rotation speed S (4 bytes) +42 Cutting feedrate F (4 bytes) +46 Dummy (cartridge number) (2 bytes) +48 Dummy (pot number) (2 bytes) +50 Tool geometry compensation number G (2 bytes) For the lathe system only +52 Tool wear compensation nu
  • Page 6405.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 5.7.7 Writing a Specified Type of Tool Management Data (Low- speed Response) [Description] A specified type of tool management data is written to memory. Enter the type of data to be written, as the data attribute. The size of the required data area varies depending o
  • Page 641B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS NOTE Customized data 5 to 20 can be written to memory when the "tool management function customized data extension (5 to 20)" option is present. Customized data 5 to 40 can be written when the "tool management function customized data extension (5 to 40)" option is pr
  • Page 6425.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 [Detailed completion codes] The detailed completion code is always 0 when the completion code is other than 3 or 5. When the completion code is 3, the detailed completion code is one of the following values: 21: The cartridge number is invalid. 22: The pot number is i
  • Page 643B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 335 +2 (Completion code) See the above explanation of the completion codes. +4 (Data length) 1, 2, 4 +6 (Data number) Cartridge number +8 (Data attribute) Data type +10 (Data number 2) Pot number +12 (Detailed co
  • Page 6445.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 5.7.8 Searching for Tool Management Data (Low-speed Response) [Description] Tool data is searched, based on the customized data. A search is conducted to see whether any tool data that matches the specified customized data is registered in the cartridge management tab
  • Page 645B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 366 +2 (Completion code) See the above explanation of the completion codes. +4 (Data length) 4 or 0 +6 (Data number) - +8 (Data attribute) - +10 (Data number 2) - +12 (Detailed completion code) See the above expl
  • Page 6465.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 5.7.9 Shifting Tool Management Data (Low-speed Response) [Description] The pot numbers in the cartridge management table are shifted. In the case of a cartridge with fixed pot numbers, the tool management data numbers registered for the specified cartridge are shifted
  • Page 647B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 367 +2 (Completion code) See the above explanation of the completion codes. +4 (Data length) 0 +6 (Data number) Cartridge number +8 (Data attribute) Shift direction +10 (Data number 2) Shift amount +12 (Detailed
  • Page 6485.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/02 5.7.10 Searching for a Free Pot (oversize tools supported)(Low- speed Response) [Description] The nearest free pot (one whose tool management data number is 0) in the same cartridge is searched for, with reference to the specified pot position. The main axis and stand
  • Page 649B-63983EN/02 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS [Detailed completion codes] The detailed completion code is always 0 when the completion code is other than 3. When the completion code is 3, the detailed completion code is one of the following values: 21: The cartridge number is invalid. 22: The pot number is invali
  • Page 6506.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN B-63983EN/02 6 OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN The basic configuration of the PMC screen is described below. Screen title Ladder PMC alarm PMC path NC program number execution status NC status indication [+] Soft key page turning key Key entry line Message display line Return key
  • Page 651B-63983EN/02 6.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN · Key entry line: Line for entering a numerical value or character key string. · Message display line: Displays an error or warning message. · NC status indication: Displays the NC mode, the execution status of the NC program, the currently selected NC path nu
  • Page 6526.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN B-63983EN/02 6.1 OPERATION SCREENS OF THE PMC AND SOFT KEY ORGANIZATION 6.1.1 Transition of the PMC Screens SYSTEM PMC main menu PMC maintenance submenu STATUS Signal status screen (See Section 7.1.) PMC MAINTE I/O LINK I/O link connection status screen (See Section 7.5.)
  • Page 653B-63983EN/02 6.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN 6.1.2 Basic Screen Operations Use the operation soft keys to operate the individual screens. To switch to the operation soft keys, do the following: · Click the [(OPRT)] soft key, which is one of the PMC submenu soft key. · Enter a numerical value or character
  • Page 6546.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN B-63983EN/02 Example) Ladder display/editing screen Operate the ladder display/editing screen by switching three layers of operation soft keys - ladder display operation soft keys (1st layer), ladder editing operation soft keys (2nd layer), and ladder net editing operation
  • Page 655B-63983EN/02 6.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN 6.2 DISPLAY AND OPERATION CONDITIONS FOR SCREENS Several PMC screens can be protected from unauthorized attempts to display data or operate the screen, based on preset conditions. This section describes such display and operation conditions. There are two kind
  • Page 6566.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN B-63983EN/02 PROGRAMMER ENABLE (K900.1) If you set "PROGRAMMER ENABLE" to "YES", it enables the following functions as a supervisor mode. · Ladder editing screen · Title data editing screen · Symbol/comment data editing screen · Message data editing screen · I/O unit addre
  • Page 657B-63983EN/02 6.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN HIDE PMC PROGRAM (K900.0) If you set "HIDE PMC PROGRAM" to "YES", it disables the following functions which have the sequence program display. · Ladder monitor screen · Ladder editing screen · Title data screen · Title data (message) screen · Title data editor
  • Page 6586.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN B-63983EN/02 EDIT ENABLE (K901.6) If you set "EDIT ENABLE" to "YES", it enables the following functions which can edit the program. · Ladder editing screen*1 · Title data editing screen*1 · Symbol/comment data editing screen*1*2 · Message data editing screen*1*2 · I/O unit
  • Page 659B-63983EN/02 6.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN ALLOW PMC STOP (K902.2) If you set "ALLOW PMC STOP" to "YES", it enables the following functions which require stop/start of ladder program. *1 · Symbol/comment data editing screen*2 · Message data editing screen*2 · I/O unit address setting screen*2 · Clear o
  • Page 6606.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN B-63983EN/02 CAUTION Set this setting to "NO"(0) before shipment of the machine. If this setting is left as "YES"(1), the operator may modify PMC parameters or PMC signals by mistake. If you want to protect this setting, please make a sequence that always writes 0 in this
  • Page 661B-63983EN/02 6.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN PROTECT PMC PARAM (K902.7) If you set "PROTECT PMC PARAM" to "YES", functions that are related to the PMC parameters are protected, as follows: · The change of the PMC parameters from the timer, counter, keep relay, and data screens is disabled. · The input of
  • Page 6626.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN B-63983EN/02 Example for setting parameters (1) If you want to prohibit completely operator from accessing the sequence program; · PROGRAMMER ENABLE (K900.1) "NO" · HIDE PMC PROGRAM (K900.0) "YES" · EDIT ENABLE (K901.6) "NO" · ALLOW PMC STOP (K902.2) "NO" (2) If you want t
  • Page 663B-63983EN/02 6.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN (4) If you want to allow operator monitoring and editing the sequence program which requires stop of ladder; · PROGRAMMER ENABLE (K900.1) "NO" · HIDE PMC PROGRAM (K900.0) "NO" · EDIT ENABLE (K901.6) "YES" · ALLOW PMC STOP (K902.2) "YES" NOTE Please use the pas
  • Page 6646.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN B-63983EN/02 (6) If you want to prohibit the editing and input/output of the ladder and allow the input/output of the PMC parameters: · PROGRAMMER ENABLE (K900.1) "NO" · RAM WRITE ENABLE (K900.4) "NO" · HIDE PMC PROGRAM (K900.0) "YES" · EDIT ENABLE (K901.6) "NO" · ALLOW PM
  • Page 665B-63983EN/02 6.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN 6.2.2 PMC Parameter Input/Output Conditions Input from the PMC parameter screen Usually, no data can be entered for PMC parameters because they are protected. The following methods can be used to make it possible to enter data for them. (1) If the sequence pro
  • Page 6666.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN B-63983EN/02 The guidance message displayed when protected PMC parameters are inputted on the PMC parameters screen. Guidance message Contents MUST BE IN EMERGENCY STOP NC is not in edit mode and not in OR IN MDI MODE emergency stop mode. PWE MUST BE ON PWE is 0. EITHER PW
  • Page 667B-63983EN/02 6.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN The guidance message displayed when protected PMC parameters are inputted on the I/O screen. Guidance message Contents MUST BE IN EMERGENCY STOP NC is not in emergency stop mode. PWE MUST BE ON PWE is 0. THIS FUNCTION IS PROTECTED This function is protected by
  • Page 6686.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN B-63983EN/02 6.2.3 Password Function The password function provides protection against unauthorized attempts to display or edit the content of the ladder program. When the password function is in use, the ladder program cannot be displayed or edited without entering the "p
  • Page 669B-63983EN/02 6.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN Switching of the password-protected screens PMC main menu When the message appears When the message appears prompting you to enter the prompting you to enter the [PMC LADDER] password for displaying data, password for displaying data, enter the display permiss
  • Page 6706.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN B-63983EN/02 6.2.4 Partial protection function for ladder program This function classifies subprograms into two areas, protected area and unprotected area, and the password protection affects only the protected area. As a result, it enables the partial protection for ladde
  • Page 671B-63983EN/02 6.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN 6.2.5 Protection of Data at 8 Levels The protection of data at 8 levels is a common function of CNC and PMC. 8 operation levels can be set for CNC and PMC operation, and 8 protection levels can be set for various types of CNC and PMC data. When various types o
  • Page 6726.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN B-63983EN/02 Operation level 8 operation levels can be set for CNC and PMC operation. Operation levels 0 to 3 are selected by the memory protection key signal. Operation levels 4 to 7 are selected by password. Operation Setting method Sample classification level 7 (High) P
  • Page 673B-63983EN/02 6.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN Data protection level A data protection level can be set for each of the following types of data. There are two data protection levels as shown below. - Change protection level Protection level used for changing data. - Output protection level Protection level
  • Page 6746.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN B-63983EN/02 NOTE 1 These items are common setting of all PMC paths when using multi-path PMC function. 2 Some data types do not have an output function. 3 For data whose protection level is higher than the operation level, the protection level cannot be changed. 4 The cur
  • Page 675B-63983EN/02 6.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN 6.3 MULTI-PMC DISPLAY In the case of a multi-PMC system, when you select a specific PMC on the PMC status screen, each of the PMC screens listed below displays the information regarding that selected PMC. By default, the PMC screens display the information reg
  • Page 6766.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN B-63983EN/02 The screens listed below display the information regarding all the PMC on the same screen space, regardless of the switching of the PMC. Screens intended to display or manipulate all the PMCs l PMC alarm screen l I/O Link connection status screen l Data I/O sc
  • Page 677B-63983EN/02 6.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN 6.4 DISPLAYING EXTENDED SYMBOL AND COMMENT Extended symbol and comment is displayed on the PMC screen. For details of Extended symbol and comment, see " SPECIFICATION OF EXTENDED SYMBOL AND COMMENT " in Subsection 1.2.7. Maximum 7 characters of a local symbol
  • Page 6786.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN B-63983EN/02 When using extended symbol and comment, you can define local symbols in each sub-program. Moreover, you can define multiple symbol and comment to one signal. However, only one symbol and comment can to be displayed on PMC screen except I/O diagnosis screen and
  • Page 679B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) 7 PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) The PMC maintenance menu displays the screens related to PMC maintenance including PMC signal status monitoring, trace, and PMC data display/editing. In order to move to the PMC
  • Page 6807.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 7.1 MONITORING PMC SIGNAL STATUS ([STATUS] SCREEN) The SIGNAL STATUS screen displays the data at all addresses specified in the program. The data of each address consists of a bit pattern (0s and/or 1s) and a hexadecimal or decimal
  • Page 681B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) Operation procedure (1) Press the [STATUS] soft key. The screen shown above appears. (2) Key in an address whose data to be displayed, then press the [SEARCH] soft key. (3) The data starting at the input address is displayed as a bi
  • Page 6827.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 Soft keys on the Signal Status screen Address search Switching to the forced I/O screen PMC path switching Switching to display in decimal Switching to display in hexadecimal Fig. 7.1.1 (a) Soft keys on the SIGNAL STATUS screen Oper
  • Page 683B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) 7.1.1 Forced I/O Function The forced I/O function enables a value to be input forcibly for the signal at an arbitrary PMC address. With this function, for example, a sequence program can be debugged without using an I/O device by fo
  • Page 6847.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 Example 2: Forced I/O is performed for X0 in a configuration where the I/O Unit-MODEL A is connected to X0 via the I/O Link. A value input from the I/O Unit-MODEL A is transferred to X0 cyclically. So, even if the value of X0 is mod
  • Page 685B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) (2) Override mode The state that disables a sequence program and machine signal from overwriting a value modified by forced I/O is referred to as override. In the override mode, override can be set for arbitrary X and Y signals. To
  • Page 6867.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 CAUTION 1 In the override mode, the I/O signal update period matches the first level of the ladder. With the I/O Link, which is usually updated at intervals of 2 msec, the timing of I/O signals delays. So, note that a sequence that
  • Page 687B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) 7.1.2 Forced I/O Screen On the forced I/O screen, the value of an arbitrary signal can be modified forcibly. The forced I/O screen can be used in one of two input modes: the forced I/O mode and the override mode. To move to the forc
  • Page 6887.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 (1) X signal (Input signal from the I/O device) ® (Input signal to the ladder) The hexadecimal or decimal display field on the rightmost position of the screen displays the value of the input signal to the ladder on the right side.
  • Page 689B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) Operations using the soft keys (1) [SEARCH] Search for an address Searches for a byte address or bit address. (2) [DEC] Switching to decimal input Displays and inputs the data of each byte in decimal. This soft key is enabled only w
  • Page 6907.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 (b) Byte-by-byte setting In the case of the byte cursor, input up to eight binary digits then press the input key. (When an input value is shorter than eight digits, the value is input from bit 0.) Example: When 100 is input, this v
  • Page 691B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) 7.2 CHECKING PMC ALARMS ([PMC ALARM] SCREEN) On this screen, an alarm message output from the PMC is displayed. To move to the PMC alarm screen, press the [PMC ALARM] soft key. Page display Alarm message display area In the alarm me
  • Page 6927.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 7.3 SETTING AND DISPLAYING PMC PARAMETERS PMC parameters (timer, counter, keep relay, and data table) can be set and displayed on each screen. Moreover, data items can be input successively. The cursor moves to the last data item su
  • Page 693B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) 7.3.1 Setting and Displaying Variable Timers ([TIMER] Screen) This screen is used to set and display timer values for functional instruction variable timers (TMR:SUB 3). This screen can be used in one of two modes: the simple displa
  • Page 6947.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 Table contents · NO.: Timer number specified for a functional instruction timer. · ADDRESS: Address referenced by a sequence program · PRESET: Timer setting value · ACC: Timer accuracy · COMMENT: T address comment In the PRESET colu
  • Page 695B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) Operations using the soft keys (1) [SWITCH] Switching the display mode Switches the display mode. (2) [ACCRCY] Switching to the soft keys for accuracy setting Switches to the soft keys for timer accuracy setting. (3) [SEARCH] T addr
  • Page 6967.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 7.3.2 Setting and Displaying Counter Values ([COUNTR] Screen) This screen is used to set and display the maximum and minimum counter values for functional instruction counters (SUB 5). This screen can be used in one of two modes: th
  • Page 697B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) Table contents · NO.: Counter number specified for a functional instruction counter · ADDRESS: Address referenced by a sequence program · PRESET: Maximum counter value (a minimum counter value is specified by a counter instruction)
  • Page 6987.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 7.3.3 Setting and Displaying Keep Relays ([KEEP RELAY] Screen) This screen is used for setting and displaying the Keep Relays. To move to the KEEP RELAY screen, press the [KEEP RELAY] soft key. Page display Key input line Message di
  • Page 699B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) For details of the area for the PMC management software, see Subsection 2.2.11. CAUTION If the area for the PMC management software is protected by the programmer protection function, the area is not displayed on the KEEP RELAY scre
  • Page 7007.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 Cursor keys With the cursor keys, select a signal to be modified. If you press the cursor key for moving left when the cursor is placed at bit 7 of an arbitrary address, the cursor changes to a byte cursor. If you press the cursor k
  • Page 701B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) 7.3.4 Setting and Displaying Data Tables ([DATA] Screen) There are two data table types (data table control data table and data table). To move to the data screen, press the [DATA] soft key. (1) DATA TABLE CONTROL screen ([List] scr
  • Page 7027.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 Table contents · GROUP TABLE COUNT: Number of data items in the data table · NO.: Group number · ADDRESS: Data table start address · PARAMETER: Data table control parameter · TYPE: Data length (0 = 1 byte, 1 = 2 bytes, 2 = 4 bytes,
  • Page 703B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) Soft keys on the DATA TABLE CONTROL screen Display mode switching Data table control data initialization Switching to the zoom screen Switching to the soft keys for parameter setting Input of the number Symbol display Switching to t
  • Page 7047.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 (f) [ADRESS] Address display switching Displays the start address of a data table in the ADDRESS column. This soft key is valid for symbol display. (g) [INIT] Data table control data initialization Initializes the setting of data ta
  • Page 705B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) (r) [DWORD] Setting for double word Sets the data size to four bytes. (s) [BIT] Setting for bit Sets the data size to one bit. When the data size is one bit, the unit for the number of data items is one byte. (2) DATA TABLE screen (
  • Page 7067.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 Bit display mode Table contents · NO. · ADDRESS: Address used by the sequence program · DATA: Data value of data table · COMMENT: Comment on the D address · 0 to 7: Data of each bit · HEX: Display of each byte in hexadecimal The gro
  • Page 707B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) Operations using the soft keys (1) [SWITCH] Display mode switching Switches the mode between the simple display mode and comment display mode when the data size is one byte, two bytes, or four bytes. When the data size is one bit, t
  • Page 7087.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 7.4 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT ([I/O] SCREEN) To move to the I/O screen, press the [I/O] soft key. On this screen, sequence programs, PMC parameters and PMC message data for multi-language display can be written to the specified device, read
  • Page 709B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) In STATUS in the lower part of the screen, a detailed explanation of execution and the execution status are displayed. During write, read, and comparison, the size of the data already transferred is indicated as the execution (inter
  • Page 7107.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 (2) [LIST] Switching to the list screen Switches the screen display to the file list screen. This soft key is valid only when MEMORY CARD or FLOPPY is selected for DEVICE. (3) [PORT SETING] Switching to the port setting screen Switc
  • Page 711B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) 7.4.1 Writing to the Memory Card A memory card used to input/output sequence programs with the I/O screen can directly transfer data to and from the programmer device (FANUC LADDER-III). The table below indicates the available memor
  • Page 7127.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 Before a write File-A File-B File-C Added File-D 128K bytes After a write File-A File-B File-C File-D 128K bytes Fig. 7.4.1 If an attempt is made to write File-D in Fig. 7.4.1, an error occurs. Actually, the data of File-D is writte
  • Page 713B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) 7.4.2 Setting the Communication Port ([PORT SETING] Screen) When FLOPPY or OTHERS is selected for DEVICE on the I/O screen, the [PORT SETING] soft key is displayed. When you press this soft key, the screen display changes to the por
  • Page 7147.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 · WRITE CODE "WRITE CODE" is displayed when "OTHERS" is selected for "DEVICE". ASCII: Sets the output code to "ASCII". ISO: Sets the output code to "ISO". NOTE Parity is always "NONE". Soft keys on the port setting screen Setting in
  • Page 715B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) 7.4.3 Displaying a File List ([LIST] Screen) When MEMORY CARD or FLOPPY is selected for DEVICE on the I/O screen, the [LIST] soft key is displayed. When you press this soft key, the screen display changes to the file list screen. Th
  • Page 7167.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 When a file is selected on this screen, the screen display can be returned to the I/O screen. To select a file, place the cursor at the name of the file, then press either the [SELECT] soft key or the INPUT key. After the key entry,
  • Page 717B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) Soft keys on the file list screen File selection Switching to the I/O screen List updating Fig. 7.4.3 Soft keys on the file list screen Explanation of soft keys (1) [SELECT] File selection Selects a file, and returns the screen disp
  • Page 7187.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 7.4.4 Setting an I/O Target PMC The multi-path PMC system enables an I/O target PMC to be selected on the I/O screen. Specification of a PMC in the item of PMC Select PMC with the query selection cursor then select an I/O target PMC
  • Page 719B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) Specification of a PMC when a sequence program is read When the data of the I/O screen is read, the type of data is automatically identified. The procedure for reading a sequence program is described below. Soft keys for reading a s
  • Page 7207.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 Specification of a PMC when PMC parameters are read When the data of the I/O screen is read, the type of data is automatically identified. The procedure for reading PMC parameters is described below. Soft keys for reading PMC parame
  • Page 721B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) 7.4.5 Outputting a Sequence Program to the Memory Card A sequence program can be output from a PMC to the memory card. To use this function, perform the operation described below on the I/O screen. NOTE This operation can be perform
  • Page 7227.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 7.4.6 Inputting a Sequence Program from the Memory Card A sequence program can be input from the memory card to a PMC. To use this function, perform the operation described below on the I/O screen. NOTE This operation can be perform
  • Page 723B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) * When a sequence program is read during operation, the program being executed is automatically stopped. (As PMCx, the PMC number embedded in the data is displayed. "PMC DCS" is displayed for a program for dual check safety.) Press
  • Page 7247.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 7.4.7 Comparing Sequence Programs with Memory Card Files A sequence program comparison can be made between the PMC and memory card. To use this function, perform the operation described below on the I/O screen. NOTE Compare operatio
  • Page 725B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) (3) Press the [EXEC] soft key to execute a sequence program comparison. Press the [CANCEL] soft key to stop the operation. NOTE 1 When the format of a specified file cannot be recognized, the compare operation is terminated abnormal
  • Page 7267.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 7.4.8 Saving Sequence Programs to the Flash ROM Sequence programs can be saved from a PMC to the flash ROM. To use this function, perform the operation described below on the I/O screen. NOTE This operation can be performed only whe
  • Page 727B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) 7.4.9 Inputting Sequence Programs from the Flash ROM Sequence programs can be inputted from the flash ROM to a PMC. To use this function, perform the operation described below on the I/O screen. NOTE This operation can be performed
  • Page 7287.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 7.4.10 Comparing Sequence Programs with Flash ROM Files A sequence program comparison can be made between the PMC and flash ROM. To use this function, perform the operation described below on the I/O screen. NOTE Compare operation c
  • Page 729B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) 7.4.11 Outputting a Sequence Program to the FLOPPY A sequence program can be output from a PMC to a Floppy Cassette or Handy File connected via RS-232C. To use this function, perform the operation described below on the I/O screen.
  • Page 7307.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 7.4.12 Inputting a Sequence Program from the FLOPPY A sequence program can be input to a PMC from a Floppy Cassette or Handy File connected via RS-232C. To use this function, perform the operation described below on the I/O screen.
  • Page 731B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) (3) Press the [EXEC] soft key. Before the reading of the file is started, the following message is displayed to check if read processing may be executed: "READING SEQUENCE PROGRAM PMCx" (As PMCx, the PMC number embedded in the data
  • Page 7327.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 7.4.13 Comparing Sequence Programs with FLOPPY Files A sequence program comparison can be made between the PMC and Floppy Cassette or Handy File connected via RS-232C. To use this function, perform the operation described below on t
  • Page 733B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) (3) Press the [EXEC] soft key to execute a sequence program comparison. Press the [CANCEL] soft key to stop the operation. NOTE 1 When the format of a specified file cannot be recognized, the compare operation is terminated abnormal
  • Page 7347.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 7.4.14 Outputting Sequence Programs to Other Devices (via the RS-232C Port) Sequence programs can be output from a PMC to another type of device connected via RS-232C. To use this function, perform the operation described below on t
  • Page 735B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) 7.4.15 Inputting Sequence Programs from Other Devices (via the RS-232C Port) Sequence programs can be input to a PMC from another type of device connected via RS-232C. To use this function, perform the operation described below on t
  • Page 7367.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 WARNING 1 If a ladder program is read while another ladder program is being executed, the ladder program being executed is automatically stopped. Take special care when stopping a ladder program. If a ladder program is stopped at an
  • Page 737B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) 7.4.16 Comparing Sequence Programs with Files of Other Devices (via the RS-232C Port) A sequence program comparison can be made between the PMC and another type of device connected via RS-232C. To use this function, perform the oper
  • Page 7387.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 7.4.17 Outputting PMC Parameters to the Memory Card PMC parameters can be output from a PMC to the memory card. To use this function, perform the operation described below on the I/O screen. NOTE This operation can be performed only
  • Page 739B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) (3) Press the [EXEC] soft key to output PMC parameters. Press the [CANCEL] soft key to stop the operation. For the supported memory cards, see the pertinent table in Subsection 7.4.1. NOTE For writing to the flash memory card, see "
  • Page 7407.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 7.4.18 Inputting PMC Parameters from the Memory Card PMC parameters can be input from the memory card to a PMC. To use this function, perform the operation described below on the I/O screen. NOTE This operation can be performed only
  • Page 741B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) (3) Press the [EXEC] soft key. Before the reading of the file is started, the following message is displayed to check if read processing may be executed: "READING PMC PARAMETER (PMCx)" (As PMCx, the PMC number embedded in the data i
  • Page 7427.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 7.4.19 Comparing PMC Parameters with Memory Card Files A PMC parameter comparison can be made between the PMC and memory card. To use this function, perform the operation described below on the I/O screen. NOTE Compare operation can
  • Page 743B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) (3) Press the [EXEC] soft key to execute a PMC parameter comparison. When PMC parameters for the conventional model are to be read with the multi-PMC system, select a read source PMC with soft key operation. For PMC selection, see S
  • Page 7447.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 7.4.20 Outputting PMC Parameters to the FLOPPY PMC parameters can be output from a PMC to a Floppy Cassette or Handy File connected via RS-232C. To use this function, perform the operation described below on the I/O screen. To set t
  • Page 745B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) 7.4.21 Inputting PMC Parameters from the FLOPPY PMC parameters can be input to a PMC from a Floppy Cassette or Handy File connected via RS-232C. To use this function, perform the operation described below on the I/O screen. To set t
  • Page 7467.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 (3) Press the [EXEC] soft key. Before the reading of the file is started, the following message is displayed to check if read processing may be executed: "READING PMC PARAMETER (PMCx)" (As PMCx, the PMC number embedded in the data i
  • Page 747B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) 7.4.22 Comparing PMC Parameters with FLOPPY Files A PMC parameter comparison can be made between the PMC and Floppy Cassette or Handy File connected via RS-232C. To use this function, perform the operation described below on the I/O
  • Page 7487.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 (3) Press the [EXEC] soft key to execute a PMC parameter comparison. When PMC parameters for the conventional model are to be read with the multi-PMC system, select a read source PMC with soft key operation. For PMC selection, see S
  • Page 749B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) 7.4.23 Outputting PMC Parameters to Other Devices (via the RS-232C Port) PMC parameters can be output from a PMC to another type of device connected via RS-232C. To use this function, perform the operation described below on the I/O
  • Page 7507.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 7.4.24 Inputting PMC Parameters from Other Devices (via the RS-232C Port) PMC parameters can be input to a PMC from another type of device connected via RS-232C. To use this function, perform the operation described below on the I/O
  • Page 751B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) WARNING When PMC parameters are read, a modified parameter can exercise an unexpected influence on ladder operation. Before reading PMC parameters, make sure that the parameters to be read do not affect ladder operation. 7.4.25 Comp
  • Page 7527.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 7.4.26 Outputting a Message Data for Multi-Language Display to the Memory Card A message data for multi-language display can be output from a PMC to the memory card. To use this function, perform the operation described below on the
  • Page 753B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) 7.4.27 Inputting a Message Data for Multi-Language Display from the Memory Card A message data for multi-language display can be input from the memory card to a PMC. To use this function, perform the operation described below on the
  • Page 7547.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 * When an inadequate file is read, the machine can make an unexpected movement. * When a sequence program is read during operation, the program being executed is automatically stopped. (As PMCx, the PMC number embedded in the data i
  • Page 755B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) 7.4.28 Comparing Message Data for Multi-Language Display with Memory Card Files A message data for multi-language display comparison can be made between the PMC and memory card. To use this function, perform the operation described
  • Page 7567.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 (3) Press the [EXEC] soft key to execute a message data for multi- language display comparison. Press the [CANCEL] soft key to stop the operation. NOTE 1 When the format of a specified file cannot be recognized, the compare operatio
  • Page 757B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) 7.4.29 Saving Message Data for Multi-Language Display to the Flash ROM Message data for multi-language display can be saved from a PMC to the flash ROM. To use this function, perform the operation described below on the I/O screen.
  • Page 7587.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 7.4.30 Inputting Message Data for Multi-Language Display from the Flash ROM Message data for multi-language display can be inputted from the flash ROM to a PMC. To use this function, perform the operation described below on the I/O
  • Page 759B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) WARNING 1 If a message data for multi-language display is read while ladder program is being executed, the ladder program being executed is automatically stopped. Take special care when stopping a ladder program. If a ladder program
  • Page 7607.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 7.4.31 Comparing Message Data for Multi-Language Display with Flash ROM Files A message data for multi-language display comparison can be made between the PMC and flash ROM. To use this function, perform the operation described belo
  • Page 761B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) 7.4.32 Deleting Memory Card Files or Formatting a Memory Card A file on a memory card can be deleted, or a memory card can be formatted. To use this function, perform the operation described below on the I/O screen. Deleting memory
  • Page 7627.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 Formatting a memory card (1) On the I/O screen, make the following settings with the query selection cursor and option selection cursor: Query Setting DEVICE MEMORY CARD FUNCTION FORMAT (2) Press the [EXEC] soft key to format the me
  • Page 763B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) 7.4.33 Deleting One or All FLOPPY Files A specified file or all files on a Floppy Cassette or Handy File connected via RS-232C can be deleted. To use this function, perform the operation described below on the I/O screen. To set the
  • Page 7647.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 Deleting all files on the FLOPPY (1) On the I/O screen, make the following settings with the query selection cursor and option selection cursor: Query Setting DEVICE FLOPPY FUNCTION DELETE ALL (2) Press the [EXEC] soft key to delete
  • Page 765B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) 7.5 DISPLAYING I/O LINK CONNECTION STATUS ([I/O LINK] SCREEN) I/O LINK MONITOR screen shows the types and the ID codes of I/O Units that are connected to I/O Link in order of Group number. To switch the screen display to the I/O LIN
  • Page 7667.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 Table 7.5 Displayed type and true type of I/O Units Displayed I/O Unit ID True I/O Unit OPERATOR PANEL A1 AA I/O module for operator's panel OPERATOR I/F BOARD (MPG3) 6B Operator Interface(with MPG) LOADER I/O AF I/O Board for Loade
  • Page 767B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) 7.6 TRACING AND DISPLAYING PMC SIGNAL STATUS After setting a signal sampling condition on the trace parameter setting screen, PMC signal transitions can be traced on the SIGNAL TRACE screen by executing the trace function. To switch
  • Page 7687.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 7.6.1 Signal Trace Function ([TRACE] Screen) SIGNAL TRACE screen (initial screen) Before trace operation can be executed, the trace parameters must be set. Press the [TRACE SETING] soft key to switch the screen display to the trace
  • Page 769B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) 7.6.2 Setting of Trace Parameter ([TRACE SETING] Screen) On the trace parameter setting screen, a sampling condition can be set. The screen consists of two pages. Use the page keys to switch between the pages. Trace parameter settin
  • Page 7707.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 (d) SAMPLING/ FRAME This parameter is displayed when "SIGNAL TRANSITION" is set on SAMPLING/ MODE". The number of sampling is inputted. The value of "SAMPLING/ RESOLUTION" or the number of specified signal addresses changes the rang
  • Page 771B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) h) STOP CONDITION/ TRIGGER/ POSITION When "TRIGGER" is set on "STOP CONDITION", this parameter is enabled. Input the ratio of the sampling time or number which specifies the position where specified trigger condition is on. If you w
  • Page 7727.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 (k) SAMPLING CONDITION/ TRIGGER/ MODE When "SIGNAL TRANSITION" is set on "TRACE MODE", and "TRIGGER" is set on "SAMPLING CONDITION", this parameter is enabled. Input trigger mode that determines the condition of specified trigger. ·
  • Page 773B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) In page 2 of the PARAMETER SETTING screen, you can set the addresses or symbols that should be sampled. Trace parameter setting screen (second page) a) Setting addresses In case of inputting discrete bit addresses, any bit address c
  • Page 7747.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 NOTE 1 For the PMC numbers, see Section 1.5. 2 If there is not “:” key in your keybord, use “;” or “/”. 3 The signals of the PMC for dual check safety cannot be traced. 4 Increasing the number of the signal address changes the capac
  • Page 775B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) 7.6.3 Execution of Trace After the trace parameters are set, a trace operation can be started by pressing the [(OPRT)] soft key and the [RUN] soft key on the SIGNAL TRACE screen. The following is the screen examples of the trace exe
  • Page 7767.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 The result of trace is immediately displayed during execution of the trace. When the stop conditions that is set in parameter setting screen is satisfied the execution is finished. Pushing [STOP] soft key aborts the execution. In "S
  • Page 777B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) 7.6.4 Operation after Execution of Trace When the execution is finished, the result of trace is displayed. The followings are the screen examples of trace by "TIME CYCLE" and "SIGNAL TRANSITION" mode. Result of trace screen (TIME CY
  • Page 7787.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 The cursor indicating current position is initially displayed on the original point (0 point). The position of the cursor is displayed in "CURSOR POSITION" in the upper of the screen. The cursor can move horizontally with the <¬> or
  • Page 779B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) c) Zoom in/Zoom out of waveform Pushing [ZOOM IN] soft key magnifies the display of chart. Pushing [ZOOM OUT] soft key reduces the display of chart. Pushing these soft keys also change the scale value of the graduation on the graph.
  • Page 7807.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 7.6.5 Automatic Start of Trace Setting Trace execution is automatically started after power-on by setting a PMC setting data. · TRACE START = MANUAL/AUTO NOTE For details of the method of setting PMC setting data, see Section 9.5. -
  • Page 781B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) 7.6.6 Trace Result Output If trace result data is present when a trace operation has been executed, the data can be output to the memory card. Output trace result data can be input to application software such as spreadsheet softwar
  • Page 7827.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 · setting-number Numeric data The numbers (starting with 1) assigned to setting items in ascending order are output. · setting-item-name Character string data The character string of each setting item is output. · setting Numeric da
  • Page 783B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) NOTE 1 For a setting item that is invalidated in combination with another setting, only a setting number and setting item name are output, with a blank output in the setting column and the setting character string column. (However,
  • Page 7847.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 NOTE 1 Data is not output beyond set sampling addresses. This means that no blank is output in the item of 'Address'. 2 For an address for which no symbol or no comment is set, no data is output, but a blank is output in the column.
  • Page 785B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) (4) Example of trace result output (For view comfort, tab settings are made in several places. In actual data output, however, no tab settings are made.) ‘PMC TRACE DATA’ ‘Edition’, 1 ‘Setting’, , , 1,‘Sampling mode’, 2, ‘SIGNAL TRA
  • Page 7867.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 7.7 I/O DIAGNOSIS SCREEN The I/O diagnosis screen shows the status of I/O variables, which are extracted from symbol data, and configuration of network and the status of communication of I/O modules. The following items are listed i
  • Page 787B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) 7.7.1 MONITORING I/O DIAGNOSIS ([I/O DGN] SCREEN) In I/O Diagnosis screen, you can check the status of each I/O variable. You can also check the configuration of I/O devices and the communication status with them. Listing order Addi
  • Page 7887.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 If you set “SHOW PROGRAM” to “NONE” in the setting screen, each symbol is displayed alone. NOTE For details of the display form of the symbol, see to the description of “SHOW PROGRAM” in Section 4.2 ADDRESS The actual locations of I
  • Page 789B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) NOTE This screen shows the I/O information according to the network setting that became effective at the time of the last power-on. The notes for each network device are as follows: PROFIBUS 1. If you have changed some of the profib
  • Page 7907.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 Additional information window In this window, symbol and comment of the I/O variable under the cursor are displayed. When language dependent comment attributes are specified, corresponding comment is displayed according to the curre
  • Page 791B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) Screen operations Softkeys on the I/O Diagnosis screen Search for data Switch to the address order display Switch to the specified group display Switch to the address order display Switch PMC path Screen settings Switch to the addre
  • Page 7927.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 NOTE 1 When arrived back to the starting position where the first search operation hit by repeated search of the same entry, the message “REACHED TO THE END OF SYMBOL DATA.” appears. 2 If the setting “SHOW PROGRAM” is set to “SYMBOL
  • Page 793B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) (4) [NETWRK ORDER] Sort by network address order Displays I/O variables in order of network address. Only the I/O variables that is actually effective are displayed. In this mode, the mark “(NETWORK)” is appended in the title of thi
  • Page 7947.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 (7) [SWITCH PMC] Switches PMC path. Change the PMC path of which the I/O variables are to be shown. In “Network order” mode, this soft key is not displayed because the network addresses do not depend on PMC path. Unless the system h
  • Page 795B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) WARNING 1 You have to pay special attention to use Forced I/O function to change status of signals. Inappropriate use of Forced I/O function may cause unexpected reaction of machine. You have to make it sure that nobody is near the
  • Page 7967.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 7.7.2 SETTING SCREEN OF I/O DIAGNOSIS In “I/O DIAGNOSIS (SETTING)” screen, you can change the setting to configure the I/O diagnosis screen Fig. 7.7.2(a) Setting screen of the I/O diagnosis (for extended symbol and comment) Fig.7.7.
  • Page 797B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) GROUP FORMAT The group names shown in I/O Diagnosis screen are strings extracted from their symbol names according to this parameter. • DELIMITER Sets the character of delimiter for extraction. Every appearance of this character in
  • Page 7987.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/02 NOTE If the Forced I/O function is protected by the programmer protection function, this setting is not effective. The Forced I/O function will be protected in the condition as follows. In case of Programmer Protection Function · PR
  • Page 799B-63983EN/02 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) Screen operations Softkeys on the I/O Diagnosis screen Copy each itmes to all PMC path Goes to I/O Diagnosis screen Initializes each items Operations using the soft keys (1) [EXIT] Goes to the I/O Diagnosis screen. (2) [SET ALLPMC]
  • Page 8008.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/02 8 LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) The PMC LADDER menu contains the screens related to PMC Ladder diagrams, such as the program list screen and the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR/EDITOR screens. You can switch to
  • Page 801B-63983EN/02 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) (6) PROGRAM LIST EDITOR screen Allows you to edit a ladder program in units of subprograms. Also allows you to select the subprogram to be edited on the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen. The following screens can be called from the
  • Page 8028.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/02 8.1 DISPLAYING A PROGRAM LIST ([LIST] SCREEN) The PROGRAM LIST VIEWER screen shows program information such as the program size. SP area Size area Ladder preview display area Program number area Key input line Message display li
  • Page 803B-63983EN/02 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) (2) Area of program list (a) In the "SP area", the protect information for subprograms is displayed, so are their program types. (Lock): Unable to browse and edit (Global program) (Magnifying glass): Ladder program which is able
  • Page 8048.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/02 (3) Operation with Soft keys Soft key of PROGRAM LIST VIEWER screen Switch PMC paths Search for program Display the contents of program (a) [ZOOM] Display the contents of program Goes to LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen. If you pre
  • Page 805B-63983EN/02 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) (5) Note of searching and zooming operations (a) When you specify a subprogram to search for, or to zoom into, you can use following notation for each program part: GLOBAL: “0”(Zero) or “G” LEVEL1, 2, 3: “L” + Number Ex.) “L1”,
  • Page 8068.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/02 8.1.1 Setting the Program List Screen (1) Program list screen setting To make settings on the program list screen, use the [SCREEN SETING] soft key on the ladder screen. Page 2 of the ladder setting screen contains the settings
  • Page 807B-63983EN/02 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) SHOW (default) The frame net is displayed in the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR/EDITOR screen. HIDE The frame net is not displayed in the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR/EDITOR screen. - 787 -
  • Page 8088.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/02 8.2 MONITORING LADDER DIAGRAMS ([LADDER] SCREEN) LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen shows the on/off status of contacts and coils, and the contents of address specified for parameter of functional instructions. From the PMC LADDER me
  • Page 809B-63983EN/02 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) (b) In the additional information line near the bottom of the screen, the following information of the address under the cursor when the cursor is shown. · Net number of the net with the cursor · Address and its symbol and comme
  • Page 8108.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/02 (4) Displaying Symbols and Comments (a) Usually, addresses are displayed above contacts and coils. For an address with a symbol assigned, you can change the setting so that the symbol is displayed instead of the address. You can
  • Page 811B-63983EN/02 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) 8.2.1 Operating on the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR Screen Main soft keys of LADDER Diagram Monitor screen Switch PMC paths LADDER Diagram Editor Switch to COLLECTIVE Screen Settings Program List MONITOR screen Display Data Table Exit
  • Page 8128.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/02 · [SEARCH] Search Address/Net Searches the PMC address or the net according to the preceding string. You can specify both of bit address and byte address. When digits are entered, the digits are supposed to be a net number and t
  • Page 813B-63983EN/02 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) (c) [DATA TABLE] Go to FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE VIEWER screen Goes to FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE VIEWER screen to examine contents of Data Table of functional instructions such as COD (SUB 7) and CODB (SUB 27), w
  • Page 8148.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/02 (2) Other operations (a) Cursor move keys, Page change keys With cursor hidden, you can move diagram in the screen by up/down Cursor move keys and Page change keys. Function of Cursor keys when cursor is hidden ­ PAGE Move scree
  • Page 815B-63983EN/02 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) WARNING 1 You have to pay special attention to use Forced I/O function to change status of signals. Inappropriate use of Forced I/O function may cause unexpected reaction of machine. You have to make it sure that nobody is near
  • Page 8168.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/02 (4) Shortcuts (a) When cursor is hidden, left/right cursor move keys without string act just like [PREV]/[NEXT] soft keys. (b) String followed by [SEARCH MENU] soft key in “Main soft keys” starts searching directly. (c) [SEARCH]
  • Page 817B-63983EN/02 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) 8.2.2 Setting the Display Format of the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR Screen (1) Display screen The LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen is partially displayed on the screen. The relays displayed here will change real-time by changing the set
  • Page 8188.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/02 · FUNCTION STYLE Change the shape of functional instructions. There are three options as below. You have to choose other than “COMPACT” to show the current values of address parameters of functional instructions. COMPACT (defaul
  • Page 819B-63983EN/02 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) · SHOW COMMENT OF CONTACT Set the style of relay comment. These are three options as below. When you display relay comment, less ladder diagram nets are shown. NONE (default) Relay comments are not displayed. 1 LINE Relay commen
  • Page 8208.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/02 · SHOW CURSOR Determines whether to show cursor. YES Cursor is displayed. Cursor move keys will move the cursor. When the cursor is placed on bit or byte addresses, the information of the address is displayed at "Additional Info
  • Page 821B-63983EN/02 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) · WRAP SEARCH ENABLED Allows search process to wrap from top/bottom to bottom/top to continue to search. YES (default) Downward search will continue to search from top of LADDER when reaches to bottom. Upward search will also co
  • Page 8228.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/02 · DIAGRAM APPEARANCE SETTING Changes the appearance of LADDER diagram. Lines, relays, and functional instructions that constitute LADDER diagram can be changed in the colors and the shapes. BOLD DIAGRAM Sets thickness of diagram
  • Page 823B-63983EN/02 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) effective only when the setting "BOLD DIAGRAM" is set to "YES". YES Shapes of relays change according to their on/off status. This option is effective only when the setting "BOLD DIAGRAM" is set to "YES". If it is set to "NO", s
  • Page 8248.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/02 cursor. 16 colors (from No. 0 to No. 15) are available. Foreground color should be different from background one. (3) Soft keys LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR (SETTING) screen has the soft keys of options and following: · [INIT] Initial
  • Page 825B-63983EN/02 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) 8.2.3 Display Format for Parameters The following table shows all monitor formats for each parameter of each functional instruction. NOTE 1 "Variable" in "Monitor format" field means that this parameter changes its size accordin
  • Page 8268.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/02 No. Name Parameter Monitor format No. Name Parameter Monitor format 27 CODB 1 constant 39 DIVB 1 constant 2 constant 2 variable binary 3 1-byte binary 3 constant or 4 variable binary variable binary 28 MOVOR 1 2-digits HEX 4 var
  • Page 827B-63983EN/02 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) No. Name Parameter Monitor format No. Name Parameter Monitor format 61 OR 1 constant 69 LBL 1 no monitor 2 variable HEX 70 NOP 1 constant 3 constant or 71 SP 1 no monitor variable HEX 4 variable HEX 72 SPE - - 62 NOT 1 constant
  • Page 8288.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/02 · Functional instructions of special monitor format Displays instructions in the following format: Functional instructions Functional instruction Vertical display horizontal display Timer number = Current value Timer number Pres
  • Page 829B-63983EN/02 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) 8.2.4 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE VIEWER Screen FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE VIEWER screen shows the contents of following data table that belongs to some functional instructions. · Functional Instruction COD (SUB7) ·
  • Page 8308.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/02 (c) In case of functional instruction COD, the data of 6 lines and 14 columns can be displayed in the area for Data table. In case of functional instruction CODB, the data of 4 lines and 14 columns can be displayed in the area f
  • Page 831B-63983EN/02 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) (g) Operation of the return key On the FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE VIEWER screen, the return key has no effect. After you have finished editing data, and want to return to the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen, use the [EXIT]
  • Page 8328.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/02 8.3 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS At LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen you can edit LADDER program to change its behavior. To switch LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen, press [EDIT] soft key at LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen. Following operations
  • Page 833B-63983EN/02 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) CAUTION 1 You can edit ladder programs regardless of whether they are active or not. To execute a ladder program with the results of editing being reflected, you must update the ladder program. To do this, click the [UPDATE] sof
  • Page 8348.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/02 8.3.1 Operating on the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR Screen Soft keys of LADDER Diagram Editor screen Program List Select net Copy net Change to Search soft keys Edit new net Delete net Cut net Paste net Automatic input Add net Make cha
  • Page 835B-63983EN/02 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) (f) [SELECT] Select multiple nets Used to specify multiple nets before performing an editing operation such as [DELETE], [CUT], and [COPY]. Click the [SELECT] soft key to select the start point of the range to be selected, then
  • Page 8368.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/02 WARNING You have to pay special attention to modify running LADDER program. If you modify LADDER program in wrong way, or update LADDER program with the machine in improper status, it may cause unexpected reaction of the machine
  • Page 837B-63983EN/02 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) (r) [EXIT EIDT] Exit Editor Updates running LADDER program to edited LADDER program, so that the all modifications will take effects, and exits the editor screen. Pressing function keys such as the SYSTEM key while editing a lad
  • Page 8388.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/02 8.3.2 Setting the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR Screen Fig. 8.3.2 LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR (SETTING) screen (1) Display screen The LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen is partially displayed on the screen. The relays displayed here will change rea
  • Page 839B-63983EN/02 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) · SHOW COMMENT OF CONTACT Set the style of relay comment. These are three options as below. When you display relay comment, less ladder diagram nets are shown. NONE (default) Relay comments are not displayed. 1 LINE Relay commen
  • Page 8408.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/02 · SUBPROGRAM NET NUMBER Determines whether a net number is counted as "LOCAL" starting from the top of current subprogram, or is counted as "GLOBAL" starting from the top of whole program. This setting also affects the expressio
  • Page 841B-63983EN/02 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) · WRAP SEARCH ENABLED Allows search process to wrap from top/bottom to bottom/top to continue to search. YES (default) Downward search will continue to search from top of LADDER when reaches to bottom. Upward search will also co
  • Page 8428.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/02 Page 3 of the setting screen · DIAGRAM APPEARANCE SETTING Changes the appearance of LADDER diagram. Lines, relays, and functional instructions that constitute LADDER diagram can be changed in the colors and the shapes. You can s
  • Page 843B-63983EN/02 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) ADDRESS COLOR Colors for the relay address are set. You can specify these colors by entering color number. 16 colors (from No. 0 to No. 15) are available. Foreground color should be different from background one. DIAGRAM COLOR G
  • Page 8448.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/02 8.3.3 NET EDITOR Screen At NET EDITOR screen, you can create new net, and modify existing net. · Changing existing nets If you move a net with the [ZOOM] soft key, you will enter a mode (Modify mode) in which you can add changes
  • Page 845B-63983EN/02 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) Fig. 8.3.3 (a) Structure of the NET EDITOR screen (1) Screen structures (a) It is basically same with LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen, except that only one net is in this screen, and that position bar at right edge of screen does n
  • Page 8468.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/02 (2) Operation with Soft keys Soft keys of Net Editor screen Horizontal Automatic A contact Normal coil connection Delete input B contact Inverted coil Functional Left vertical Right vertical instructions connection connection Se
  • Page 847B-63983EN/02 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) (b) [FUNC] Enter and change functional instruction Places functional instruction, or changes type of existing functional instruction. When [FUNC] soft key is pressed at cursor on blank place, new functional instruction will be p
  • Page 8488.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/02 (f) [AUTO] Automatic input of unused address/parameter number Executes the function for automatically inputting an unused address or parameter number. For details of these functions, see Sections 8.7 and 8.8. (g) [DATA TABLE] Ed
  • Page 849B-63983EN/02 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) (i) [NEXT NET] Go to next net Finishes editing current net, and goes to next net. If [ZOOM] soft key at LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen is used to reach NET EDITOR screen, [NEXT NET] will finish modifying current net, and the next
  • Page 8508.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/02 (j) [INSERT LINE] Insert line Inserts one blank line at cursor position. Diagram elements at or below vertical cursor position will be shifted downward by one line. Inserting line at middle of functional instruction box will exp
  • Page 851B-63983EN/02 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) (l) [APPEND COLUMN] Insert column after cursor Inserts one blank column at right of cursor position. Diagram elements on right of horizontal cursor position will be shifted to right by one column. And if necessary, net will be e
  • Page 8528.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/02 (3) Other operations (a) Cursor move keys, Page change keys Cursor move keys and Page change keys move cursor on screen. NET EDITOR screen expands image of net horizontally for a wider net according to its width, while LADDER DI
  • Page 853B-63983EN/02 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) 8.3.4 Structure of Valid Net Valid net must have following structure: Convergence point Output Input section section Structure of valid net "Input section" consists of contacts and functional instruction, and the result of opera
  • Page 8548.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/02 8.3.5 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION LIST Screen Pressing [FUNC] soft key at NET EDITOR screen reaches FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION LIST screen at which you choose a functional instruction to be entered from list of all available functional i
  • Page 855B-63983EN/02 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) (2) Other operations (a) Cursor move keys Cursor move keys move cursor on screen. According to the cursor position, the functional instruction to be selected changes. (b) INPUT key Act just like [SELECT] soft key. (3) Shortcuts
  • Page 8568.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/02 8.3.6 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE EDITOR Screen At FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE EDITOR screen, you can edit the contents of data table that belongs to some functional instructions. To reach this screen, at NET EDITOR
  • Page 857B-63983EN/02 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) 8.3.7 Operating on the FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE EDITOR Screen Soft keys of FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE EDITOR screen of functional instruction COD Soft keys of FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE EDITOR screen of fu
  • Page 8588.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/02 (5) [BYTE] Change to the BYTE length Changes data length to 1 byte. If overflowed data is found, the cursor points it, and this operation aborts. Then, correct it and press [BYTE] soft key again. (6) [WORD] Change to the 2 BYTE
  • Page 859B-63983EN/02 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) (13) "number" + INPUT key Changes the data that is pointed by the cursor. The input range of the data obeys the data length and the display data type. Ex.) The case of functional instruction COD and displaying BCD2 digits The av
  • Page 8608.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/02 8.3.8 PROGRAM LIST EDITOR Screen At PROGRAM LIST EDITOR screen you can create new program and delete a program in addition to the function of PROGRAM LIST VIEWER screen. To reach this screen, press [LIST] soft key at LADDER DIAG
  • Page 861B-63983EN/02 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) (b) [SEARCH] Search for program Searches for a program. Pressing [SEARCH] soft key after entering a program name or symbol name searches for program corresponding to the input character string and moves the cursor to the program
  • Page 8628.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/02 8.3.9 Setting the PROGRAM LIST EDITOR Screen Fig. 8.3.9 PROGRAM LIST EDITOR (SETTING) screen (1) Program list screen setting To set the program list screen, use the [SCREEN SETING] soft key on the Ladder screen. Page 2 of the la
  • Page 863B-63983EN/02 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) SHOW (default) Displays frame nets on the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR/EDITOR screens. HIDE Hides frame nets from the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR/EDITOR screens. - 843 -
  • Page 8648.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/02 8.4 SELECTING AND DISPLAYING THE NECESSARY LADDER NET ([SWITCH] SCREEN]) 8.4.1 Collective Monitor Function The COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen allows you to specify the ladder net containing the coils to be monitored, so that you can
  • Page 865B-63983EN/02 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) (2) Calling from the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen On the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen, click the [SWITCH] soft key. Fig. 8.4.1 (b) LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen - 845 -
  • Page 8668.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/02 8.4.2 COLLECTIVE MONITOR Function The COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen is such as that shown below. At first, it does not display any ladder diagram. Ladder nets will be added to this screen as they are selected with coil search and pi
  • Page 867B-63983EN/02 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) (b) [PICKUP] Picking up ladder nets. Picks up ladder nets with coil which you want to monitor, on COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen. (c) [JUMP] Jump to a ladder net. On LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen, search the ladder net at a cursor po
  • Page 8688.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/02 (3) Picking up a ladder net on the COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen You can pick up a ladder net from the COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen. The procedure for picking up a ladder net is as described below. (a) Address specification (i) Enter t
  • Page 869B-63983EN/02 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) (4) Picking up a ladder net from the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen You can pick up a ladder net from the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen. The procedure for picking up a ladder net is as described below. (a) From the LADDER DIAGRAM
  • Page 8708.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/02 8.5 ADDRESS ALTERATION FUNCTION You can alter the address used in a ladder program with another address. To perform address change, click the [CHANGE ADRS] soft key to switch to address change mode. - 850 -
  • Page 871B-63983EN/02 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) 8.5.1 Screen Structures LADDER diagram display area Address input line Message display line Key input line (1) Key input line Area in which data is displayed as it is keyed in. (2) Message display line Area in which confirmation
  • Page 8728.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/02 8.5.2 Operating on the Screen (1) Entering an address You can enter an address by entering a "character string" and pressing the [INPUT] key. · Address specification using a wildcard You can use a wildcard (*) in the bit portion
  • Page 873B-63983EN/02 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) (b) [ALTER ALL] Alter to the address specified in the NEW ADDRESS field at once Alters all instances of the address specified in the "OLD ADDRESS" field to the address specified in the "NEW ADDRESS" field at once. If a whole pro
  • Page 8748.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/02 (h) [GLOBAL/LOCAL] Specify the area subject to search and alteration Used to specify either the entire program (global) or the subprogram (local) as the area subject to search and alteration in the ladder diagram. This soft key
  • Page 875B-63983EN/02 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) 8.6 FUNCTION TO REFERENCE ADDRESSES IN USE You can switch the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen to the address map display screen where you can view a list of addresses in use. The address map display screen displays 24-byte bit map
  • Page 8768.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/02 8.6.1 Address Map Display Screen Clicking the [ADDRESS MAP] soft key on the ladder editor screen causes that screen to switch to the address map display screen. (1) Address representation By representing each bit as described be
  • Page 877B-63983EN/02 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) 8.6.2 Operating on the Screen (1) Operation with soft keys (a) [SEARCH] Search for an address Searches for the specified address and displays it as the start address of the address map display. (b) [SEARCH UNUSED] Search for unu
  • Page 8788.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/02 8.7 FUNCTION TO AUTOMATICALLY INPUT UNSUSED ADDRESSES This function automatically inputs unused R, D, and E addresses during ladder editing. Specifying an unused start address Enter any R, D, or E address and click the [AUTO] so
  • Page 879B-63983EN/02 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) 8.8 AUTOMATICALLY INPUTTING UNUSED PARAMETER NUMBERS This function automatically inputs the unused numbers for the parameters of functional instructions during ladder editing. Operation This function is applicable to the first p
  • Page 8808.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/02 Automatic input of the TMR parameter of a functional instruction When inputting the TMR parameter, you must consider precision. (1) Range of parameter numbers subject to this automatic input Timer numbers with their precision de
  • Page 881B-63983EN/02 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) 8.9 DETECTION OF DOUBLE COILS This function automatically detects double coils when you edit WRT coils with ladder editing operations. Time to check When you edit WRT coils, this function always detects double coils. When the ch
  • Page 8829.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02 9 PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) The PMC configuration menu is used to display screens related to PMC configuration data that change the target PMC, and display and edit PMC data. You can move to the PMC conf
  • Page 883B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) 9.1 DISPLAYING AND EDITING TITLE DATA ([TITLE] SCREENS) 9.1.1 Displaying Title Data On the TITLE DATA screen, you can check the title data items and some ladder information items. To switch to the TITLE DATA screen, press the [TITL
  • Page 8849.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02 In addition, the following data is displayed: · PMC basic software series and edition · Amount of memory occupied by each set of sequence data · PMC basic software type and sequence program PMC type · Current, maximum, and minimum
  • Page 885B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) 9.1.2 Editing Title Data On the TITLE DATA EDITOR screen, you can edit title data items. To switch to the TITLE DATA EDITOR screen, press the [EDIT] soft key on the TITLE DATA screen. On the TITLE DATA EDITOR screen, you can perfor
  • Page 8869.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02 (1) Operations using the soft keys (a) [INPUT MODE] Change the input mode Pressing [INPUT MODE] changes the input mode. The selection cycles in the following order. In the insert mode, "INSERT" appears on the screen; in the replace
  • Page 887B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) 9.1.3 Displaying Title Data (Message) On the TITLE DATA (MESSAGE) screen, message data for multi- language display can be checked. To switch to the TITLE DATA (MESSAGE) screen, press the [MESAGE TITLE] soft key. On the TITLE DATA (
  • Page 8889.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02 9.2 DISPLAYING AND EDITING SYMBOL AND COMMENT DATA ([SYMBOL] SCREENS) The display and operation of symbol and comment screen differs in former type from extended type. For details of former type symbol and comment screen, see Subse
  • Page 889B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) Amount of occupied memory: The amounts of memory occupied by symbol data and of that occupied by comment data, and total amount of memory occupied by symbol and comment data are displayed under the symbol and comment display. Scree
  • Page 8909.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02 9.2.2 Editing Symbol and Comment Data On the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA EDITOR screen, you can define a symbol for a desired address byte or bit and add a comment. You can also change already defined symbol and comment data. Amount of u
  • Page 891B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) Screen operations Soft keys on the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA EDITOR screen Register a new entry Delete all data Terminate editing Delete data Search for data Change data or register changed data as a new entry Fig. 9.2.2 Soft keys on t
  • Page 8929.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02 (2) Editing a set of symbol and comment data at a time An address, symbol, and comment are input at a time. Enter a symbol and comment following an address with delimiting them by non-alphanumeric characters as shown below and pres
  • Page 893B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) 9.2.3 Partially Changing Symbol and Comment Data On the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA EDITOR screen, pressing the [ZOOM] soft key displays the following screen. At the bottom of the screen, the area for editing a symbol and comment data en
  • Page 8949.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02 Screen operations Soft keys on the symbol & comment data entry editor screen Replace an entry Delete characters Change the input mode New entry Cancel edits Fig. 9.2.3 Soft keys on the symbol & comment data entry editor screen (1)
  • Page 895B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) (c) [ADD LINE] New entry Registers input data as a new entry. If the address of the new entry is already registered, a confirmation message appears, which asks you if you are sure to overwrite the old data. (d) [DELETE] Delete char
  • Page 8969.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02 9.2.4 Registering New Symbol and Comment Data On the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA EDITOR screen, pressing the [NEW ENTRY] soft key displays the following screen. At the bottom of the screen, the area for editing a symbol and comment data
  • Page 897B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) Screen operations Symbol & comment data entry editor screen Delete characters Change the input mode New entry Cancel edits Fig. 9.2.4 Soft keys on the symbol & comment data entry editor screen (1) Operations using the soft keys (a)
  • Page 8989.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02 (d) [CANCEL EDIT] Cancel edits Cancels edits and switches to the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA EDITOR screen. The data is not updated. (2) Screen operation using other keys Cursor keys: Move the cursor. (3) RETURN key operation On the symb
  • Page 899B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) Symbol and comment list display area Symbol and Comment detail display area Fig. 9.2.5(b) Extended symbol and comment displaying screen (Details mode, Symbol order) Pressing the softkey “ADRS ORDER” or “SYMBOL ORDER”, you can sort
  • Page 9009.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02 Fig. 9.2.5(d) Extended symbol and comment displaying screen (Details mode, Address order) PROG.SYMBOL: Symbol is displayed. When a symbol is local symbol, this symbol is displayed as the form “[PROGRAM NAME].[SYMBOL]” ADDRESS: Addr
  • Page 901B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) Operation Soft keys on the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA VIEWER screen Switch the program name to symbol notation Search for data Switch to the address order display Change the display mode Change the displayed Switch to the editor screen
  • Page 9029.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02 9.2.6 Editing extended symbol and comment In symbol and comment editing screen, you can change, add or delete symbol and comment. To change screen to the symbol and comment editing screen, press the soft key “EDIT” in the symbol an
  • Page 903B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) Fig. 9.2.6 (b) Extended symbol and comment editing screen (All comment display) FREE: Free memory size to store symbol and comment is shown. Editing various data such as sequence program and message will change this free size. - 88
  • Page 9049.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02 Operation Soft keys on the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA EDITOR screen Change to the all comment Switch the program name to displayed screen Switch to the address order display symbol notation Display the previous entry Delete entry End of
  • Page 905B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) (1) Operation by soft key (a) [ALL COMMENT] / [ONE COMMENT] Changing the comment display mode This soft key allows you to change the comment display mode. One mode is “All comment display”. Another is “One comment display”. In the
  • Page 9069.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02 (k) [INPUT MODE] Changing an input mode Pressing the soft key “INPUT MODE”, input mode is changed as following. Current input mode is displayed on right top of the screen. WHOLE INSERT ALTER · WHOLE This mode is whole editing mode.
  • Page 907B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) (r) [PASTE] Pasting characters To press the soft key “PASTE” pastes the contents of pasting buffer. In the “WHOLE” mode, pasted characters overwrite whole characters on the cursor. In the “INSERT” mode, pasted characters are insert
  • Page 9089.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02 Fig. 9.2.7 (b) Adding new entry of symbol and comment screen (All comment display) - 888 -
  • Page 909B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) Operation Soft keys on the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA EDITOR screen (New entry mode) Change to the all comment displayed screen Registering the current entry and create a new entry Registering the entry Cancel edits Switch displaying co
  • Page 9109.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02 9.3 DISPLAYING AND EDITING MESSAGE DATA ([MESAGE] SCREENS) 9.3.1 Displaying Message Data On the MESSAGE DATA VIEWER screen, you can check each external message data item output to the NC screen by functional instruction DISPB. To d
  • Page 911B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) Screen configuration (1) On the screen, message addresses, message requesting monitors, message numbers, and message data are displayed from left to right. A message requesting monitor indicates the status of the signal (A addresse
  • Page 9129.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02 (c) [DOUBLE CHAR] Display double-byte characters Displays a character code enclosed by at signs (@) with the corresponding character actually displayed. Example) To terminate double-character display, press the [EXIT] soft key. (2)
  • Page 913B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) 9.3.2 Editing Message Data On the MESSAGE DATA EDITOR screen, you can edit message data items. To move to the MESSAGE DATA EDITOR screen, press the [EDIT] soft key on the MESSAGE DATA VIEWER screen. On the MESSAGE DATA EDITOR scree
  • Page 9149.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02 Screen operations Soft keys on the PMC Message Data Editor screen Delete an entry Search for message data Switch to the display screen Cut an entry Display Copy an entry Display the entry editor screen double-byte Paste an entry Se
  • Page 915B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) (e) [SELECT] Select multiple entries Use this key to specify multiple entries to be edited with a soft key such as [DELETE]. Pressing this soft key puts the screen into the mode for selecting multiple entries starting from the entr
  • Page 9169.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02 (2) Editing message data for an entry at a time Message data for an entry is input at a time. (a) Standard specification Enter a message string following a message number with delimiting them by a semicolon (;) as shown below and p
  • Page 917B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) 9.3.3 Editing Desired Message Data On the message data entry editor screen, you can edit desired message data. To move to the message data entry editor screen, press the [ZOOM] soft key on the MESSAGE DATA EDITOR screen. On the mes
  • Page 9189.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02 Screen operations Soft keys on the message data entry editor screen Display double-byte characters Copy characters Change the input mode Select characters Paste characters Change data to be edited Switch to the editor screen Cut ch
  • Page 919B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) (c) [@] Input an at sign (@) To display a kana, kanji, or special character, the character code of the character is enclosed by at signs (@). To simplify the input of an at sign (@), this soft key adds an at sign (@) to the string
  • Page 9209.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02 (j) [PASTE] Paste characters Inserts the characters transferred to the pasting buffer by the [CUT] or [COPY] soft key at the cursor in the insert input mode or replaces the data at the cursor with the characters in other input mode
  • Page 921B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) 9.4 DISPLAYING AND EDITING I/O MODULE ALLOCATION DATA ([MODULE] SCREENS) 9.4.1 Displaying I/O Module Allocation Data The I/O MODULE VIEWER screen displays data of allocation of I/O modules to X and Y addresses. Check that I/O modul
  • Page 9229.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02 9.4.2 Editing I/O Module Allocation Data On the I/O MODULE EDITOR screen, you can edit data of allocation of I/O modules to X and Y addresses. To switch to the I/O MODULE EDITOR screen, press the [EDIT] soft key on the I/O MODULE V
  • Page 923B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) (b) [DELETE ALL] Delete all allocation data When this soft key is pressed, the following confirmation message appears: "DO YOU DELETE ALL ALLOCATION DATA?" The [YES] and [NO] soft keys appear. Press [NO] to cancel deletion or [YES]
  • Page 9249.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02 (c) The I/O Unit is allocated to address of the cursor position for the I/O Unit size. In case of above example (b), I/O Unit is allocated at X08 and X09 like as follows. (c) I/O Unit is allocated at X08 and X09 NOTE 1 To make the
  • Page 925B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) 9.5 DISPLAYING AND EDITING PMC SETTINGS ([SETING] SCREENS) There are following setting parameter screens. · PMC SETTING (GENERAL) screen · PMC SETTING (MESSGE SHIFT) screen · PMC SETTING (SELECTABLE I/O) screen · PMC SETTING (OVERR
  • Page 9269.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02 (1) PMC SETTING GENERAL screen On the PMC SETTING (GENERAL) screen, set parameters that specify the use condition of each PMC function. Use the [­] and [¯] keys to move the item cursor. Use the [¬] and [®] keys to move the setting
  • Page 927B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) (d) RAM WRITE ENABLE (K900.4) NO: Prevents forcing function. YES: Allows forcing function. NOTE This setting effects some PMC functions. For details, see Section 6.2. (e) DATA TBL CNTL SCREEN (K900.7) YES: Displays PMC parameter da
  • Page 9289.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02 (k) LADDER START (K900.2) AUTO: Executes the sequence program automatically after the power turns on. MANUAL: Executes the sequence program by [RUN] soft- key. (l) ALLOW PMC STOP (K902.2) NO: Prevents run/stop operation of the sequ
  • Page 929B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) (a) MESSAGE SHIFT VALUE (K918, K919) Enter the amount by which the message display request bit is to be shifted. The valid data range is between 0 and 1999. The initial value is 0. After entering a value, press the INPUT key to set
  • Page 9309.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02 (3) Setting screens for the selectable I/O link assignment function (a) PMC SETTING (WARN SELECTABLE I/O) screen This caution screen is displayed for the operator's attention when the operator is switching to the PMC SETTING (SELEC
  • Page 931B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) (b) PMC SETTING (SELECTABLE I/O) screen You can set the group of optional I/O device that is connected with each machines. The maximum number of I/O Link channels per PMC is 4. You can set as many sets of these parameters as the nu
  • Page 9329.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02 (4) PMC SETTING (OVERRIDE) screen On this screen, specify whether to enable the override function. NOTE For details of the display condition for this screen, see Section 6.2. OVERRIDE ENABLE (K906.0) YES: Enables the override funct
  • Page 933B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) Soft keys on the PMC SETTING (WARN SELECTABLE I/O) screen Move to the PMC SETTING (SELECTABLE I/O) (a) [PREV] Switch to the previous page (b) [NEXT] Switch to the next page (c) [YES] Switch to the PMC SETTING (SELECTABLE I/O) scree
  • Page 9349.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02 9.6 DISPLAYING THE STATUS OF PMCS AND CHANGING THE TARGET PMC ([PMC STATUS] SCREENS) On the PMC STATUS screen, you can display the status of each existing PMC and change the target PMC for display and operation on each screen. To s
  • Page 935B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) Soft keys on the PMC STATUS screen Change the PMC Start and stop a ladder program Fig. 9.6 Soft keys on the PMC STATUS screen Operation using the soft key (1) [SWITCH PMC] Change the PMC Changes the target PMC for display and opera
  • Page 9369.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02 9.6.1 Starting and Stopping Sequence Programs On the title display screen, you can start or stop a sequence program. (1) Starting a sequence program ([RUN]) When a program is stopped, pressing the [RUN] soft key causes the system t
  • Page 937B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) 9.7 DISPLAYING AND SETTING PARAMETERS FOR THE ONLINE FUNCTION ([ONLINE] SCREEN) The online function allows PMC data to be displayed and edited on a personal computer when the PMC is connected to FANUC LADDER- III or Ladder Editing
  • Page 9389.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02 9.7.1 Setting Parameters for the Online Function The online function can be connected using one of the following three methods. Connection method Applicable software Ethernet FANUC LADDER-III and Ladder Editing Package RS-232C FANU
  • Page 939B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) Fig. 9.7.1 PARAMETERS FOR ONLINE MONITOR screen EMG STOP: Terminates communication forcibly. Use this key if communication becomes abnormal and the connection cannot be terminated normally. INIT: Initializes the parameters to their
  • Page 9409.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02 (c) Case of connection by HSSB (Ladder Editing Package) (i) Move the cursor to the "HIGH SPEED" item with Up or Down Cursor key. (ii) Select "USE" with Left or Right Cursor key. NOTE 1 When both "RS-232C = USE" and "HIGH SPEED = US
  • Page 941B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) 9.7.2 Communication Status The communication status of RS-232C and HIGH SPEED are displayed at the online monitor screen during the online communication. Fig. 9.7.2 Communication status of online setting screen RS-232C : The commun
  • Page 9429.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02 The display messages and the meanings are shown in the table of below. Displayed messages Meanings INACTIVE The communication is inactive. STOPPING The communication is being stopped.(Wait for the termination of communication) STAR
  • Page 943B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) 9.7.3 About Ethernet Communication Parameters (1) Setting of ethernet parameters When you try to connect FANUC LADDER-III or Ladder Editing Package with CNC by Ethernet, it is necessary to set some Ethernet parameters. The setting
  • Page 9449.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02 (a) Start up FANUC LADDER-III, and click the [Communication] on [Tool] menu. (b) Select the [Network Address] tab and push the button. Input the "IP Address" and "Port No." inputted in (1) of this subsection. - 924 -
  • Page 945B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) (c) Select the [Setting] tab, and add the IP Address to "Use device". (d) Push the button for start of the communication. - 925 -
  • Page 9469.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02 9.7.4 About connection log of Ethernet If any errors have occurred during Ethernet connection, the contents of the errors are displayed at "EMBEDDED LOG" screen of CNC. Refer to this screen when the communication does not start. Fi
  • Page 947B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) Connection log Meanings and countermeasures SnpErr: PDU = m, n, [x] date time An error has occurred during the online communication. SnpErr: PDU = n, [x] date time m, n: Online communication information that is internal SnpErr: Tas
  • Page 9489.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02 9.8 DISPLAYING AND SETTING SYSTEM PARAMETERS ([SYSTEM PARAM] SCREENS) On the SYSTEM PARAMETER screen, you can display and set the following data items: · Counter data type · Parameters for an FS0 operator's panel · Parameters for t
  • Page 949B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) 9.8.1 Displaying and Setting the Counter Data Type Display and set the type of counter data used by the functional instruction counter. Set BINARY or BCD. Display screen Screen operation Switch to the edit screen (1) Operation usin
  • Page 9509.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02 Setting screen Screen operation Terminate setting Initialize settings (1) Operation using the soft key (a) [EXIT EDIT] Terminate setting Switches to the system parameter display screen. CAUTION After changing the data type, set the
  • Page 951B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) 9.8.2 Displaying and Setting Parameters for an FS0 Operator's Panel Display and set parameters for using an FS0 operator's panel. Display screen · FS0 OPERATOR PANEL Whether to use an FS0 operator's panel · KEY DI ADDRESS Start add
  • Page 9529.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02 CAUTION When the programmer protection function is enabled, the [EDIT] soft key appears and is available. When the online monitor function is enabled, you cannot move to the system parameter edit screen. For details, see Section 6.
  • Page 953B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) Screen operation Terminate setting Initialize settings (1) Operation using the soft key (a) [EXIT EDIT] Terminate setting Switches to the system parameter display screen. (b) [INIT] Initialize settings Initializes all system parame
  • Page 9549.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02 9.8.3 Displaying and Setting Parameters for the Selectable I/O Link Assignment Function Display and set parameters for using the selectable I/O Link assignment function. Display screen · ENABLE SELECTION Whether to enable or disabl
  • Page 955B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) Setting screen · ENABLE SELECTION Specify whether to enable or disable the selectable I/O Link assignment function with YES or NO. The initial setting is NO (disabled). · BASIC GROUP COUNT Set the number of groups always enabled fo
  • Page 9569.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02 Screen operation Terminate setting Initialize settings (1) Operation using the soft key (a) [EXIT EDIT] Terminate setting Switches to the system parameter display screen. (b) [INIT] Initialize settings Initializes all system parame
  • Page 957B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) 9.9 DISPLAYING AND SETTING CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS ([CONFIG PARAM] SCREENS) Configuration parameter setting screens display the following NC parameters related to PMCs in an easy-to-understand manner and facilitate setting. No. Se
  • Page 9589.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02 9.9.1 Menu for Setting Configuration Parameters There are the following PMC configuration parameter setting screens: · MENU screen · CNC-PMC INTERFACE screen · MACHINE SIGNAL INTERFACE screen · LADDER EXECUTION screen Move to each
  • Page 959B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) 9.9.2 Setting the CNC-PMC Interface On the PMC CONFIGRATION PARAMETER (CNC-PMC INTERFACE) screen, set a correspondence between the G/F addresses of each PMC and CNC-PMC interface. NOTE For details of the CNC-PMC interface, see the
  • Page 9609.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02 PMC Assign a PMC to each CNC-PMC interface block. PMC1: First PMC PMC2: Second PMC PMC3: Third PMC G/F ADDRESS Set the start G/F addresses. NOTE If an invalid value is set for an NC parameter, "ILLEGAL" is displayed as shown below:
  • Page 961B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) NOTE This screen can be protected from editing using the programmer protection function. Screen operation Soft keys on the CNC I/F screen Initialize settings Previous choice Delete the setting Next choice Move to the PMC CONFIGRATI
  • Page 9629.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02 (b) [DELETE] Delete the setting Deletes the setting of the item at the cursor. After data is deleted, "*****" is displayed as shown below: This soft key is displayed and can be operated only when editing is allowed. CAUTION When th
  • Page 963B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) (2) Screen operations using other keys Cursor keys Use them to change the CNC-PMC interface block to be set. INPUT key You can also set an item by entering a numeric value or string and pressing the INPUT key. To set a PMC · Enter
  • Page 9649.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02 9.9.3 Setting the Machine Signal Interface On the PMC CONFIGRATION PARAMETER (MACHINE INTERFACE) screen, set the input/output addresses of the I/O Link. CAUTION 1 For details of input/output addresses of the I/O Link, see the descr
  • Page 965B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) X/Y ADDRESS Set the start X/Y addresses. NOTE If an invalid value is set for an NC parameter, "ILLEGAL" is displayed as shown below: Help message A help message for operation is displayed. CAUTION This screen can be protected from
  • Page 9669.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02 Screen operation Soft keys on the MACHINE SIGNAL INTERFACE screen Previous choice Delete the setting Initialize settings Next choice Move to the PMC CONFIGRATION PARAMETER (MENU) screen Fig. 9.9.3 Soft keys on the MACHINE SIGNAL IN
  • Page 967B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) CAUTION When the NC parameters are all set to 0, the initial status (for the initial status, see (e)) is set. Deleting all items with this operation is equivalent to setting the initial status. For this reason, if an attempt is mad
  • Page 9689.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02 9.9.4 Setting the Parameters Related to Ladder Execution On the PMC CONFIGRATION PARAMETER (LADDER EXEC) screen, set the execution priorities of multiple PMCs, execution ratios of multiple PMCs, level-1 execution cycle, and start/s
  • Page 969B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) EXEC CYCLE Set the PMC execution cycle (4 or 8 msec). NOTE If an invalid value is set for an NC parameter, the cursor is not displayed. Press the [INIT] soft key to release the invalid state. LADDER RUN/STOP Specify whether to star
  • Page 9709.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/02 (b) [MOVE DOWN] Move the execution priority down Moves a PMC set under EXEC PRIORITY and changes its execution priority. The execution time ratio is not changed with this operation because it is determined by the execution sequence
  • Page 971B-63983EN/02 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) When the first, second, and third PMCs are used EXEC PRIORITY PMC EXEC RATIOS 1 PMC1 75% 2 PMC2 15% 3 PMC3 10% · EXEC CYCLE : 8MS · LADDER RUN/STOP : INDEPENDENT NOTE If an invalid value is set for an NC parameter, press the [INIT]
  • Page 97210.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B-63983EN/02 10 STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION - 952 -
  • Page 973B-63983EN/02 10.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 10.1 OVERVIEW 10.1.1 Step Sequence Method The ladder method is most often used for programming the sequence control governed by a programmable controller. This method, shown in Fig.10.1.1(a), was derived from relay-panel control circuits. Since it has been in u
  • Page 97410.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B-63983EN/02 CALL CALL Subprogram Subprogram Fig. 10.1.1(b) Module method Given these conditions, a step sequence method has been created to describe programs structurally. It is well-suited to the control of entire processes and provides an easy-to-understand visualized fl
  • Page 975B-63983EN/02 10.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION (2) Easy debugging and maintenance · Graphical display enables the operator to easily understand the execution state of a program visually. · Erroneous steps in a program can be found easily. · A part of a program can be easily modified. (3) High-speed program
  • Page 97610.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B-63983EN/02 ATC, and other peripheral units, are best suited to step sequence programming. For programs which control units with no particular sequence, such as that of the operator’s panel which is always monitoring the emergency stop signal or mode signals, however, are
  • Page 977B-63983EN/02 10.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION Display of Display Contents programming Personal Computer manual CNC Device FANUC LADDER-III Initial Block [ ] Sn [ ] Sn [ ] Sn Step End of Block Step 10.1.3 Editing and Debugging Step Sequence Programs The personal computer programmer "FANUC LADDER-III" is use
  • Page 97810.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B-63983EN/02 10.2 STEP SEQUENCE BASICS 10.2.1 Terminology A step sequence program is created using a variety of graphical symbols, as shown in Fig. 10.2.1(a). The main terms used in the step sequence are described below. (Block) [ ] S1 (Initial Step) P100 (Transition) S2 (S
  • Page 979B-63983EN/02 10.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION (1) Step Sn (Pm) A step indicates a process, which is the basic processing unit in a step sequence program. In a step, specify the S address (Sn), which is a step number, and P address (Pm), which indicates a subprogram (action program) specifying the details o
  • Page 98010.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B-63983EN/02 (3) Transition Pn A transition denotes the transition conditions. When these evaluate true, the step of the corresponding state changes from the inactive to active state or vice the reverse. Specify the P address (Pn), which indicates a subprogram describing th
  • Page 981B-63983EN/02 10.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION Executing step1 Executing step1 S1 (step1) S1 (step 1) S1 (step1) P10 P10 S2 (step2) S2 (step2) P20 (Condition is true) P20 S3 (step2) S3 (step2) Fig. 10.2.1(d) Transition of step state by transition (4) Initial Step [ ] Sn (Pm) While a normal step can be activ
  • Page 98210.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B-63983EN/02 (5) Divergence and Convergence of Selective Sequence To describe a complicated sequence, selective sequences can be used. A selective sequence offers multiple choices, from among which the condition becomes true first activates the corresponding step, as shown
  • Page 983B-63983EN/02 10.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION (6) Divergence and Convergence of Simultaneous Sequence A Simultaneous sequence can be used to execute multiple processes simultaneously. In a Simultaneous sequence, as shown in Fig. 10.2.1(g), one transition activates multiple steps. The activated multiple ste
  • Page 98410.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B-63983EN/02 (7) Jump and Label The jump function is used to describe a non–serial sequence, such as a repeated loop. As shown in Fig. 10.2.1(h), when a jump designation is activated, the sequence jumps to the step having the corresponding jump destination label, after whic
  • Page 985B-63983EN/02 10.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION (8) Block A block refers to a group of consecutive steps and transitions. A block can be a step sequence program. The more complicated the sequence becomes, the larger and more complex the block is. A program can be divided into multiple blocks in the same way
  • Page 98610.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B-63983EN/02 (9) Calling block To execute a block as the main program in a step sequence, call the block with the CALLU (SUB 66) or CALL (SUB65) instruction in the same way as for ladder subprogram calling from the second level ladder program. Ladder (Second level) Block2 (
  • Page 987B-63983EN/02 10.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION Block (P1) [ ] S1 S21 S22 S231 S232 S233 S3 Fig. 10.2.1(l) Program without block step (11) End of block step Use an end block step to terminate nested–block–step calling and to return to the calling sequence. - 967 -
  • Page 98810.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B-63983EN/02 10.2.2 Execution of Step Sequence Editing Compile Executing (source program) (Object format program) First level (Ladder diagram) END1 (SUB 1) function Second level CALL (Ladder diagram) CALL END2 (SUB 2) function Third level (Ladder diagram) END3 (SUB 48) func
  • Page 989B-63983EN/02 10.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION In the step sequence method, a program is created (edited) in units of subprograms. The edited source program is compiled and converted to an executable ROM–format program, then linked, as shown in Fig. 10.2.2(a). A ROM–format program is a kind of a modular pro
  • Page 99010.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B-63983EN/02 LEVEL1 (Ladder diagram) LEVEL2 (Ladder diagram) CALLU P2 R0. 0 CALL P1 P1 (Ladder diagram) P2 (Step sequence) L1 [ ] S1 (P3) P4 S2 (P5) P6 L1 P4 (Ladder diagram) P3 (Ladder diagram) Fig. 10.2.2(b) Execution of step sequence - 970 -
  • Page 991B-63983EN/02 10.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION In the step sequence program shown in Fig. 10.2.2(b), when step S1 is activated, subprograms are executed according to the timing illustrated in Fig. 10.2.2(c). 8 msec or 4 msec 1st PMC execution time LEVEL1 First level LEVEL2 Second level Subprogram P2 P1 Step
  • Page 99210.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B-63983EN/02 10.3 CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION OF STEP– SEQUENCE PROGRAMS 10.3.1 Step A step is a unit of processing in a program. [Display] Sn (Pm) [Contents] · Define a step number (Sn), necessary for controlling execution, and subprogram number (Pm) specifying actual proc
  • Page 993B-63983EN/02 10.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION Example) State transition of Step B Transition A Inactivate (halt state) Step B Transition A Activate (execution state) Transition C Transition C Inactivate (transition to halt) (Execute one time) [Example] After the M7 code is decoded, control is transferred t
  • Page 99410.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B-63983EN/02 10.3.2 Initial Step An initial step is automatically activated when execution of the program starts. Once it has been activated, it operates in the same way as a normal step. The program can be returned to this step through other steps. [Display] [ ] Sn (Pm) [C
  • Page 995B-63983EN/02 10.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION [Example 2] L1 When a program is executed, steps S3 and S4, S1 specified by an initial step, are activated first. P101 Once steps S3 and S4 have been executed, initial steps S3 and S4 are executed in the same way as normal step when the program starts from step
  • Page 99610.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B-63983EN/02 10.3.3 Transition A transition specifies the conditions governing the transition from the step to the next step. [Display] Pn [Contents] · Only one transition is required between steps. · Transition between steps is performed as described below. While S1 is act
  • Page 997B-63983EN/02 10.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 10.3.4 Divergence of Selective Sequence A selective sequence branches to two or more sequences. When the transition evaluates true, the corresponding step is activated. [Display] [Contents] · Transitions are placed after a divergence of selective sequence. · Th
  • Page 99810.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B-63983EN/02 10.3.5 Convergence of Selective Sequence It combines two or more divergent paths to the main sequence. [Display] [Contents] The number of divergent paths must match that of the convergent paths. [Example] S2 S3 S3 While step S3 is executed, the transition P103
  • Page 999B-63983EN/02 10.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 10.3.6 Divergence of Simultaneous Sequence A simultaneous sequence branches to two or more sequences, and all steps are activated simultaneously. [Display] [Contents] · A transition must be placed before a divergence of simultaneous sequence. · All branched ste
  • Page 100010.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B-63983EN/02 10.3.7 Convergence of Simultaneous Sequence It combines two or more divergent paths to the main sequence. [Display] [Contents] · A convergence of simultaneous sequence is processed as follows. S10 S20 When the transition P120 evaluates true, step S10 and S20 ar
  • Page 1001B-63983EN/02 10.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION Case 2) S11 S16 To specify the termination conditions for S11 and S16 separately, place the conditions in P111 and P116 and specify P111 P116 two dummy steps, S12 and S17, as shown S12 S17 (dummy) (dummy) A dummy step also requires a step number and subprogram
  • Page 100210.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B-63983EN/02 10.3.9 Label A label specifies the jump destination. [Display] Ln [Contents] Specify the jump destination label (Ln). [Example] Refer to an example described on the jump function (Subsec. 10.3.8). - 982 -
  • Page 1003B-63983EN/02 10.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 10.3.10 Block Step A block step specifies the step sequence subprogram to be executed. [Display] ] Sn (Pm) [Contents] Define a step number (Sn), which controls the execution of a block step, and a subprogram (Pm) specifying the actual process, for a block step.
  • Page 100410.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B-63983EN/02 10.3.11 Initial Block Step This is an initial step on the block step. [Display] [ ] Sn (Pm) [Contents] · Define a step number (Sn), necessary for controlling execution, and subprogram number (Pm)specifying the actual processing, for an initial step. · This step
  • Page 1005B-63983EN/02 10.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 10.4 EXTENDED LADDER INSTRUCTIONS To enable the specification of steps and transitions, the components of a step sequence program, by means of the ladder method, the following signals and functional instructions are provided. These signals and instructions can
  • Page 100610.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B-63983EN/02 10.4.2 PMC ADDRESS (S ADDRESS) [Contents] · An S address is created to end block step processing. · The meaning of each bit of the step number (S address) is shown in the following. Sn.0 0 : Transition to halt state, or halt state 1 : Execution state Sn.4 0 : T
  • Page 1007B-63983EN/02 10.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION [Example 2] The section between JMP and JMPE in the following example is execute only once after the specific step (The following example is in the case of S100.) transits in the activated state from the inactivated state. [Processing to execute only once after
  • Page 100810.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B-63983EN/02 10.5 SPECIFICATION OF STEP SEQUENCE 10.5.1 Specification Item Description Number of subprogram Up to 5000 (P1 to P5000) Number of step Up to 1000 Up to 2000 (S1 to S2000) Number of label Up to 9999 (L1 to L9999) Maximum number of jumps per block Up to 256 Nesti
  • Page 1009B-63983EN/02 10.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 10.5.2 General Rules · One transition must exist between step and step. S1 S1 Subprogram (P10) (P10) Correct CALL P10 P1 or S1 CALL P11 S2 S2 (P11) (P11) The step S1 calls subprogram P10, P11. · The transition shall never be repeated even at the point of the di
  • Page 101010.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B-63983EN/02 · When a simultaneous sequence is specified in another simultaneous sequence, one convergence must not be used for each sequence. S1 S2 S1 S2 P2 P2 S3 S4 S3 S4 Correct P3 P1 S5 S5 (dummy) Correct P1 S6 · When a selective sequence is specified in a simultaneous
  • Page 1011B-63983EN/02 10.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION · In case of branching again immediately after the convergence, a step/transition is required between the divergence and convergence. S1 S2 S1 S2 Correct P2 P10 P100 (dummy) S100 (dummy) S3 S10 P1 P10 S3 S10 S2 S10 S2 S10 P2 P11 Correct P2 P11 S12 S13 S100 (dum
  • Page 101210.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B-63983EN/02 · The divergence must be terminated with the same type of convergence. P2 P4 P2 P4 Correct S2 S3 S2 S3 P3 P5 P3 P5 P2 P2 Correct S2 S3 S2 S3 P3 P3 · The number of convergences must match that of divergences. P1 P2 P1 P2 S2 S3 L1 Correct S2 S3 L1 P3 P3 S4 S4 · T
  • Page 1013B-63983EN/02 10.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION · It is not possible to jump to the other subprogram. Subprogram P1 Subprogram P2 S10 S100 P10 P100 ¬ L1 S101 S11 S20 P101 P11 P20 S102 S12 L1 · It is not possible to jump from a simultaneous sequence to another simultaneous sequence. S1 P1 S2 S10 P2 P10 S3 L1
  • Page 101410.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B-63983EN/02 · It is not allowed to jump from inside of the simultaneous sequence to outside. ¬ L1 S1 P1 S2 S10 S20 P2 P10 P20 S3 S11 L1 - 994 -
  • Page 1015B-63983EN/02 10.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 10.5.3 Exclusive Control for Functional Instructions The use of the following functional instructions is restricted in steps and transitions. Group Description Functional instructions A The instructions operate when a signal CTR (SUB5) changes. CTRC (SUB60) Con
  • Page 101610.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B-63983EN/02 Correct program Divide the subprogram so that ACT of CTR is called after it is set to off. S1 Subprogram P100 (P100) R0.0 CTR 1 ( ) P101 S2 (P102) X1.0 P103 S3 (P100) Subprogram P101 X1.0 P101 TRSET S4 (P102) Subprogram P102 R0.0 P103 CTR 1 ( ) R9091.0 Subprogr
  • Page 1017B-63983EN/02 10.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION Example) S1 Subprogram P100 (P100) R9091.1 WINDR R10 R0.0 P1 ( ) S2 (P101) Subprogram P1 R0.0 TRSET Subprogram P101 R9091.0 WINDR R10 R0.0 ( ) Correct program Correct the program so that ACT is set to on and off within one subprogram. S1 Subprogram P100 (P100)
  • Page 101810.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B-63983EN/02 10.6 STEP SEQUENCE SCREEN OPERATION 10.6.1 Displaying a Step Sequence Diagram The following operations are supported to enable the diagnosis and debugging of a step sequence program. · Displaying a step sequence and editing a ladder · Displaying the execution s
  • Page 1019B-63983EN/02 10.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION (6) Program list editor screen Used to edit a ladder program on a subprogram-by-subprogram basis and select a subprogram to be edited on the ladder diagram editor screen. The following screens can be called from the ladder diagram editor screen: (7) Function in
  • Page 102010.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B-63983EN/02 The screens make transactions as shown below. Display function (monitor) PMC main menu [<] [PMC LADDER] PMC ladder menu [<] [<] [LIST] (Note2) [LADDER] (Note 1) [LADDER] (Note 1) [LIST] (Note2) [LIST] [STEP] Step sequence Step sequence state display screen (Sub
  • Page 1021B-63983EN/02 10.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 10.6.2 Hierarchy of Display A subprogram of a step sequence can call another subprogram of step sequence (block nesting). When you make a transition through the step sequence programs, the hierarchical nesting level of the subprogram currently displayed needs t
  • Page 102210.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B-63983EN/02 10.6.3 Program List Display Screen To display the step sequence diagram display screen first after the power is turned on, select a subprogram of the step sequence on the program list display screen. Program list display screen (step sequence) On the program li
  • Page 1023B-63983EN/02 10.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 10.6.4 Step Sequence Display Screen Pressing the [ZOOM] soft key when the cursor is placed on a step sequence on the program list display screen, subprogram list display screen, or step sequence screen displays the step sequence display screen. Subprogram displ
  • Page 102410.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B-63983EN/02 Address : Symbol information (Comment information) When a step sequence diagram is displayed, the screen can display 16 elements vertically and 8 elements horizontally. (2) Operations using soft keys Soft keys for step sequence display screen For 1st level Subp
  • Page 1025B-63983EN/02 10.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION (c) [SPLIST] Switch to the subprogram list screen Switches the screen display to the subprogram list display screen that displays a list of the subprograms referenced by the step sequence currently displayed. (d) [STATE] Switch to the state display screen Switc
  • Page 102610.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B-63983EN/02 10.6.5 Setting the Step Sequence Diagram Screen Set the display format for the step sequence display screen. To set each item, use the left/right cursor keys or soft keys. Fig. 10.6.5 Step sequence display screen (1) Setting items · ADDRESS NOTATION Set whether
  • Page 1027B-63983EN/02 10.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION number). When “ADDRESS NOTATION” is “SYMBOL”, the symbol set for the P-address is displayed. · DIAGRAM COLOR Set the display color of an entire sequence diagram except the activation state mark of each step on the step sequence display screen. The display color
  • Page 102810.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B-63983EN/02 10.6.6 Subprogram List Display Screen When you press the [SPLIST] soft key on the step sequence display screen, a list of the subprograms that are being used with the step sequence currently displayed is displayed. The subprogram list display screen displays in
  • Page 1029B-63983EN/02 10.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION (Lock) : Unable to browse and edit (Global program) (Loupe) : Ladder program which is able to browse but unable to edit (Pencil) : Ladder program which is able to browse and edit (Loupe) : Step sequence program which is able to browse but unable to edit (Pencil
  • Page 103010.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B-63983EN/02 (3) Operations using soft keys Soft keys for subprogram list display screen For 1st level Subprogram data display Switch to state display screen Program search Switch to program list screen Switch to step sequence display screen For 2nd level and after To previ
  • Page 1031B-63983EN/02 10.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION (e) [SEARCH] Program search Searches for a program. When you press the [SEARCH] soft key after entering a program name or symbol name, the program corresponding to the entered character string is searched for. If you press the [SEARCH] soft key without entering
  • Page 103210.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B-63983EN/02 10.7 EXECUTION STATE DISPLAY The execution state of each step of a step sequence is displayed. · Step sequence state display screen (global) · Step sequence state display screen (subprogram) · Time monitor setting screen The screen configuration is shown below.
  • Page 1033B-63983EN/02 10.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 10.7.1 Step Sequence State Display Screen (Global) Pressing the [STATE] soft key on the program list screen displays the step sequence state display screen (global). This screen displays the execution state and the elapsed time of operation of an entire step se
  • Page 103410.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B-63983EN/02 (2) Operations using soft keys Soft keys for step sequence state display screen (global) Switch to program list screen Switch to time monitor setting screen Step search Abnormal state reset (a) [LIST] Switch to the program list display screen Switches the scree
  • Page 1035B-63983EN/02 10.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 10.7.2 Step Sequence State Display Screen (Subprogram) Pressing the [STATE] soft key on the subprogram list screen or the step sequence display screen displays the step sequence state display screen (subprogram). This screen displays the execution state and the
  • Page 103610.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B-63983EN/02 (2) Operations using soft keys Soft keys for subprogram list display screen For 1st level Switch to subprogram list screen Program search Abnormal state reset Switch to program list screen Switch to step sequence display screen Switch to time monitor setting Fo
  • Page 1037B-63983EN/02 10.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION 10.8 TIME MONITOR FUNCTION The time monitor function reports an error if a step sequence continues to be active for more than a specified monitor time. For each of up to eight steps, a monitor time can be set. If the active state of a step lasts for more than a
  • Page 103810.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B-63983EN/02 10.8.1 Time Monitor Setting Screen Pressing the [MONIT] soft key on the step sequence state display screen displays the time monitor setting screen. The time monitor setting screen is used to set the time monitor function. Enter a step number or monitor time af
  • Page 1039B-63983EN/02 10.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION (2) Operations using soft keys Soft keys on time monitor setting screen Deletion of setting Switch to step sequence state display screen Step sarch (a) [DELETE] Deletion of setting Deletes the setting of a specified monitor number. Move the cursor to a number w
  • Page 104010.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION B-63983EN/02 (3) Setting of monitoring Fig. 10.8.1(b) Entering a step number (a) Move the cursor to a input field then enter a step number (or symbol) to set. Type "S12" then press the INPUT key. - 1020 -
  • Page 1041B-63983EN/02 10.STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION (b) Move the cursor to the corresponding input field then set the monitor time. Fig. 10.8.1(c) Entering a monitor time Type "100" then press the INPUT key. · Up to eight monitor time values can be set. · The cursor can be moved to a step number field and monito
  • Page 104211.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE B-63983EN/02 11 PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE - 1022 -
  • Page 1043B-63983EN/02 11.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE 11.1 ALARM MESSAGE LIST 11.1.1 Messages That May Be Displayed on the PMC Alarm Screen The following table lists the PMC alarm messages that may be displayed on the PMC alarm screen. Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents ER01 PR
  • Page 104411.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE B-63983EN/02 Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents ER22 NO PROGRAM Enter the sequence program again. The sequence program is empty. ER27 LADDER FUNC. PRM IS Correct the sequence program; change the An out-of-range parameter number is OUT OF
  • Page 1045B-63983EN/02 11.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents ER50 PMC EXECUTION ORDER Check CNC parameter Nos. 11900 to The set execution order of the multi- ERROR 11902. PMC function is invalid. ER51 PMC EXECUTION Check CNC parameter Nos. 11905 to T
  • Page 104611.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE B-63983EN/02 Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents WN07 LADDER SP Correct the sequence program so that the There are too many levels of nesting ERROR(STACK) subprogram has eight or fewer levels of (levels more than 8) for the CALL or nestin
  • Page 1047B-63983EN/02 11.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents WN64 MESSAGE FILE SIZE <1> Reduce the size of the message file for The message file for multi-language OVER multi-language display. display is too large to load into the <2> Contact us and
  • Page 104811.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE B-63983EN/02 11.1.2 PMC System Alarm Messages Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents PC004 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy This alarm may be due to a A CPU error occurred in the PMC PC006 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy software/hardware fault; contact
  • Page 1049B-63983EN/02 11.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents PC051 IOLINK ER2 CHz:yy:xx:ww:vv <1> When you use a I/O Unit-Model A, An I/O Link communication error no base extension unit is occurred. connected corresponding to a I/O z is a channel num
  • Page 105011.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE B-63983EN/02 Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents PC501 NC/PMC INTERFACE ERR Contact us with information on the The read or write operation between PATHn circumstances under which the alarm CNC and PMC failed. occurred (displayed message,
  • Page 1051B-63983EN/02 11.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE 11.1.3 Operation Errors Error messages that may be displayed on the PMC LADDER DIAGRAM VIEWER screen Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents INPUT INVALID Input a valid address or numeric value. The input address or numeric value
  • Page 105211.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE B-63983EN/02 Error messages that may be displayed on the PMC LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents THIS NET IS PROTECTED When you are editing data on a per- subprogram basis, you cannot edit the subprogram frame
  • Page 1053B-63983EN/02 11.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE Error messages that may be displayed on the PMC LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen (when updating) Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents OVERLAPPED COM If COME is missing, add it in proper There is no COME that corresponds to positio
  • Page 105411.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE B-63983EN/02 Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents NO END Add END, END1, END2 or END3 in END, END1, END2 or END3 is not found. NO END1 proper position. NO END2 NO END3 DUPLICATE END1 Remove extra END1, END2 or END3. Multiple END1, END2 or E
  • Page 1055B-63983EN/02 11.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents LBL FOR JMPC IN BAD LEVEL JMPC is used to jump from a Destination of JMPC is not level 2. subprogram to level 2. If the JMPC is unnecessary, remove it. If another LBL of same L-address that
  • Page 105611.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE B-63983EN/02 Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents DUPLICATE TMR NUMBER If some of them are unnecessary, Plural TMRs have the same number as (WARNI) remove them. If all of them are their parameter. (This is warning.) necessary, assign other
  • Page 1057B-63983EN/02 11.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE Error messages that may be displayed on the PMC NET EDITOR screen Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents ILLEGAL FUNCTIONAL Specify the name of an available The entered name of functional instruction INSTRUCTION NAME functional
  • Page 105811.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE B-63983EN/02 Error messages that may be displayed on the TITLE DATA EDITOR screen Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents TOO MANY Make sure that the entered character string The number of characters in the entered CHARACTERS is within the al
  • Page 1059B-63983EN/02 11.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents THIS FUNCTION IS Cancel the protection by the programmer This function is protected by the programmer PROTECTED protection function or 8-level protection protection function or 8-level prot
  • Page 106011.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE B-63983EN/02 Error messages that may be displayed on the I/O MODULE EDITOR screen Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents GROUP NUMBER IS TOO Specify 15 or a smaller value as the The entered group number is too large. LARGE group number. BASE
  • Page 1061B-63983EN/02 11.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE Error messages that may be displayed on the SIGNAL STATUS screen Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents INPUT INVALID Enter a numerical value correctly, as The entered numerical value or its input instructed in "Screen operation
  • Page 106211.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE B-63983EN/02 11.1.4 I/O Communication Error Messages The error messages that may appear on the I/O screen and their meanings and actions are listed below. Error messages displayed during memory card I/O operation Alarm number Faulty location/corrective actio
  • Page 1063B-63983EN/02 11.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents MEMORY CARD IS USED BY Retry after terminating the other Some other function is currently using the OTHER FUNCTION function that is currently using the memory card. memory card. MEMORY CARD
  • Page 106411.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE B-63983EN/02 Error messages displayed during FLOPPY or other input/output device I/O operation. Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents ILLEGAL PMC PARAMETER Specify a file of the PMC parameter The specified file is not of the PMC FORMAT form
  • Page 1065B-63983EN/02 11.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE Common error messages that may be displayed on individual devices during the I/O operations Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents ERROR OCCURS IN Check the PMC alarm screen and Data cannot be output because there is an SEQUENCE
  • Page 106611.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE B-63983EN/02 11.2 I/O LINK COMMUNICATION ERRORS AND ACTIONS TO TAKE If an I/O Link communication error occurs, the system generates a system alarm, displaying an error message of the following format. PC050 IOLINK CHn GRa:bb In this message format, CHn (wher
  • Page 1067B-63983EN/02 11.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE 11.2.1 Causes of Communication Errors An I/O Link communication error can stem from various types of causes such as those described below. (1) Improper cable type, cable cut, or inadequate connection Several different types of I/O Link electrica
  • Page 106811.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE B-63983EN/02 (6) DO connection to ground With some types of operator's panel, a communication alarm occurs if the DO terminal is connected to ground or to another DO terminal due to inadequate cable connection, module malfunction or failure, or other cause.
  • Page 1069B-63983EN/02 11.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE (12) Failure to connect the optical I/O Link adapter to ground The optical I/O Link adapter, which accomplishes conversion between electrical cable and optical cable, uses its own case as a grounding body. Therefore, the case of the adapter must
  • Page 107011.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE B-63983EN/02 11.2.2 Check Items Check the following items individually to make a judgment as to whether any of the causes described in the preceding subsection is present. (1) Operation records "Had the machine been operating normally before the error occurr
  • Page 1071B-63983EN/02 11.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE (3) Timing "What did you do when the error occurred?" If the error occurs when you turn on the power, first check whether each cable connector is connected to the appropriate device, as well as the assignment data. A system alarm occurs when the
  • Page 107211.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE B-63983EN/02 (5) Phenomenon "Does the error cause the same phenomenon every time?" Each time the same error occurs, check the system alarm message (register values), the LEDs on the slave, and the system alarm message displayed by the slave. As described ear
  • Page 1073B-63983EN/02 11.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE (8) Retry counters "Isn't the communication unstable?" In response to an error that has occurred singly, the I/O Link attempts to retransmit data. If the error cannot be avoided by this retransmission attempt, then a system alarm is generated. E
  • Page 107411.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE B-63983EN/02 11.2.3 Sample Cases A system alarm occurs once a day. Improper cable type, cable cut, or inadequate connection NC Optical I/O link Optical I/O link adapter adapter Optical cable Operator's Connector I/O Unit-A panel I/
  • Page 1075B-63983EN/02 11.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE A system alarm occurs two or three times a day. Improper cable type, cable cut, or inadequate connection NC Operator's b amplifier b amplifier Connector panel I/O panel I/O Group 0 Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 The c
  • Page 107611.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE B-63983EN/02 A system alarm occurs if you execute "I/O Link startup" after storing the ladder program using the online monitor. Assignment data mismatch 83:41 NC I/O Unit-A I/O Unit-A I/O Unit-A Group 0 Group 1 Group 2 <
  • Page 1077B-63983EN/02 11.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE A system alarm is prone to occur when the feeder starts to operate after the machining process. Noise NC I/O Unit-A Operator's Power panel Mate-D Group 0 Group 1 Group 2 None of the masters, slaves, or communic
  • Page 107811.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE B-63983EN/02 A system alarm occurs almost every time the automatic operation begins. Noise NC I/O Unit-A Operator's panel Group 0 Group 1 The communication cables and power cables were installed in the same bundle.
  • Page 1079B-63983EN/02 11.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE A system alarm occurs at a cycle start. DO connection to ground NC I/O Unit-A I/O Unit-A I/O Unit-A Operator's Connection panel I/O unit Group 0 Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 DO was short-circuited due to a w
  • Page 108011.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE B-63983EN/02 A system alarm occurs every time an external alarm is displayed. Insufficient power capacity or drop in voltage NC b amplifier I/O Unit-A Group 0 Group 1 A flashing lamp was lit when an alarm occurred, which ca
  • Page 1081B-63983EN/02 11.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE A system alarm occurs intermittently (A). Loose power connection NC I/O Unit-A Spindle I/O Unit-A I/O Unit-A monitor unit Group 0 Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 The cable was loosely connected to the terminal block of
  • Page 108211.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE B-63983EN/02 A system alarm occurs when data is written using the BOOT screen. Restart of the slave at the time of the CNC restart (Unknown) When a macro was to be written using the BOOT screen, only the power of the CNC wa
  • Page 1083B-63983EN/02 11.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE System alarms began to occur after the machine had been in operation for about one year. Failure to connect the optical I/O Link adapter to ground (Unknown) The connection between the optical I/O Link adapter c
  • Page 1084
  • Page 1085B-63983EN/02 INDEX NOTE Volume 1 : Page 1 to 658 / Volume 2 : P. 659 to 1063 INDEX BASIC INSTRUCTIONS..............................................186 Basic Screen Operations................................................633 About connection log of Ethernet .................................926
  • Page 1086INDEX B-63983EN/02 NOTE Volume 1 : Page 1 to 658 / Volume 2 : P. 659 to 1063 Comparing PMC Parameters with Files of Other Deleting Memory Card Files or Formatting a Memory Devices (via the RS-232C Port) ...................................731 Card......................................................
  • Page 1087B-63983EN/02 INDEX NOTE Volume 1 : Page 1 to 658 / Volume 2 : P. 659 to 1063 Displaying and Setting Parameters for the Selectable Entering Data on the Program Check Screen I/O Link Assignment Function......................................934 (Low-speed Response) .....................................
  • Page 1088INDEX B-63983EN/02 NOTE Volume 1 : Page 1 to 658 / Volume 2 : P. 659 to 1063 Graphical Symbols ........................................................956 Keep Relay Addresses (K) ..............................................83 Hierarchy of Display ..........................................
  • Page 1089B-63983EN/02 INDEX NOTE Volume 1 : Page 1 to 658 / Volume 2 : P. 659 to 1063 Multi-Path PMC Interface...............................................48 Outputting a Sequence Program to the FLOPPY ..........709 MULTI-PMC DISPLAY...............................................655 Outputting a Sequence P
  • Page 1090INDEX B-63983EN/02 NOTE Volume 1 : Page 1 to 658 / Volume 2 : P. 659 to 1063 PROGRAM LIST EDITOR Screen...............................840 Reading the Actual Velocity of each Controlled Axis Programmer Protection Function ..................................635 (High-speed Response)....................
  • Page 1091B-63983EN/02 INDEX NOTE Volume 1 : Page 1 to 658 / Volume 2 : P. 659 to 1063 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Number of Tools) (High-speed Response) ......................................527 Sample Cases...............................................................1054 Reading Tool Life Manag
  • Page 1092INDEX B-63983EN/02 NOTE Volume 1 : Page 1 to 658 / Volume 2 : P. 659 to 1063 Setting the Machine Signal Interface ............................944 TIME MONITOR FUNCTION...................................1017 Setting the Parameters Related to Ladder Execution.....948 Time Monitor Setting Screen ......
  • Page 1093B-63983EN/02 INDEX NOTE Volume 1 : Page 1 to 658 / Volume 2 : P. 659 to 1063 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool WRT.NOT Instruction...................................................192 Information (1): Tool Number) (Low-speed Response) (8- digit tool number)............................
  • Page 1094
  • Page 1095Revision Record FANUC Sries 30i/300i/300is-MODEL A, Series 31i/310i/310is-MODEL A5, Series 31i/310i/310is-MODEL A, Series 32i/320i/320is-MODEL A PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL (B-63983EN) Addition of functions Addition of following models : 02 May, 2004 • Series 31i /310i /310is-MODEL A5 • Series 31i /310i
  • Page 1096
  • Page 1097Series 30i/ 31i/ 32i-MODEL A Supplemental PMC Programming Manual Type of applied technical documents Series 30i/ 31i/ 32i-MODEL A Name PMC Programming Manual Spec. No. /Ed. B-63983EN/02 Summary of Change New, Add, Group Name/Outline Applied Date Correct, Delete - Display of simplified Chinese and Ko
  • Page 1098Series 30i/ 31i/ 32i-MODEL A Supplemental PMC Programming Manual Contents 1 SUMMARY .................................................................................................................................... 3 2 APPLIED SOFTWARE ..............................................................
  • Page 10991 SUMMARY The following functions have been added to PMC for Series 30i/ 31i/ 32i-MODEL A. • Display of simplified Chinese and Korean (Hangul characters) of the PMC message multi-language display function • The I/O Link module names /12, /16, /20, /24, /28, /32 • The off delay timer TMRBF • Window f
  • Page 11002 APPLIED SOFTWARE The new features will be applied to the following software. - FANUC LADDER-III Name Specification Version FANUC LADDER-III A08B-9210-J505 4.6 or later. FANUC LADDER-III Upgrade A08B-9210-J506 4.6 or later. - Ladder Editing Package Name Specification Version FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER E
  • Page 1101Only the following feature will be applied to the following software. Applied functions Reading the actual speed of servo motor - CNC System software Software Drawing number Series Edition Series 30i/ 300i/ 300is-MODEL A A02B-0303-H501#G00A G00A 1 or later. CNC System Software A02B-0303-H501#G01A G0
  • Page 11023 PMC DISPLAY FUNCTION MESSAGE MULTI-LANGUAGE In this section, display of Simplified Chinese and Korean (Hangul characters) which is added in the PMC message multi-language display function is described. The description of other features of PMC message multi-language display function has been publis
  • Page 1103Hangul characters that can be displayed on CNC screen Series 30i/ 31i/ 32i-MODEL A Supplemental PMC Programming Manual 01 04.06.30 T. Matsukawa New registration DRAW.NO. B-63983EN/02-1 EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 7/56
  • Page 11044 I/O LINK In this section, the I/O LINK module names (/12, /16, /20, /24, /28, /32) are described. The description of the other I/O LINK module name has been published in a manual "Series 30i/31i/32i MODEL-A PMC programming manual (B-63983EN/02)". 4.1 ASSIGNMENT METHOD 4.1.1 Setting the module name
  • Page 1105input address (X ) or write a digital value to be converted to an analog value to an output address (Y ) in word (16-bit) units. For details of the assignment method, see the assignment method for each I/O device described later. Modify the following after “Table 3.2(b) Module names (2)” on ”3.2 Ass
  • Page 11064.1.2 Assignment Method for the Power Mate Replace the following after”3.2.4 Assignment method for the Power Mate” To use Power Mate-MODEL D/H, Power Mate i MODEL-D/H, or I/O Link β amplifier as an I/O Link slave, assign its connection information on the I/O Link master. On the I/O Link slave, assig
  • Page 1107Examples of settings To connect Power Mate- i D with 256/256 points in group 1: Enter 1.0.1.OC03I for input and 1.0.1.OC03O for output. To connect Power Mate- i D with 224/2224 points in group 2: Enter 2.0.1. /28 for input and 2.0.1. /28 for output. To connect an I/O Link β amplifier in group 1: Ent
  • Page 11084.1.3 Assignment Method for I/O Link Connection Units Replace the following after”3.2.5 Assignment method for I/O Link Connection Units” Conventionally, to exchange data between CNCs A and B, the devices indicated by (a) in the figure below must be connected. (Any I/O units can be used to exchange d
  • Page 1109Therefore, when an I/O Link connection unit is used, the connection is as follows. CNC A I/O Unit I/O Unit CNC B Model A Model A I/O Link connection unit I/O Unit I/O Unit Model A Model A Assignment method Assignment data is determined according to the types of I/O devices replaced with an I/O Link
  • Page 11105 LADDER LANGUAGE 5.1 TIMER The following types of timer instruction are available. Use any of these instructions as appropriate for your purpose. Instruction SUB Processing name Number 1 TMR 3 Timer processing 2 TMRB 24 Fixed on-delay timer processing 3 TMRBF 77 Fixed off-delay timer processing 4 T
  • Page 11115.1.1 TMRBF (Fixed Off-delay Timer: SUB 77) This is the off-delay timer function whose timer preset value is fixed. The timer preset value is written into the sequence program memory. Therefore, you have to modify sequence program if you want to change the timer value. Format Fig 5.1.1(a) shows the
  • Page 1112Parameters Specify the timer number of the fixed timer to the 1st parameter. You have to specify the unique timer number for all the TMRB (SUB 24) and TMRBF (SUB 77) instructions. Specify the timer value of the fixed timer to the 2nd parameter. The unit is millisecond. The available timer number and
  • Page 11136 ADDITION OF WINDOW FUNCTION Additions of CNC WINDOW function and additional example are described in this document. The description of formerly supported function has been published in a manual "Series 30i/31i/32i MODEL-A PMC programming manual (B-63983EN/02)". Additional function - Reading the ac
  • Page 11146.1 LIST OF WINDOW FUNCTIONS Function group order Function Group Description Response R/W code CNC Information 1 Reading CNC system information 0 High-speed R 2 Reading a tool offset 13 High-speed R 3 Write a tool offset 14 Low-speed W 4 Reading a work piece origin offset value 15 High-speed R 5 Wri
  • Page 1115Function Group Description Response R/W code 11 Reading the actual velocity of each controlled axes 91 High-speed R 12 Reading actual spindle speeds 138 High-speed R 13 Entering torque limit data for the digital servo motor 152 Low-speed W 14 Reading load information of the spindle motor (serial 153
  • Page 1116Function Group Description Response R/W code 6 Reading tool management data 334 Low-speed R 7 Writing a specified type of tool management data 335 Low-speed W 8 Searching for tool management data 366 Low-speed R 9 Shifting tool management data 367 Low-speed W 10 Searching for a free pot (oversize to
  • Page 1117Function code order Function Description Response R/W code 0 Reading CNC system information High-speed R 13 Reading a tool offset High-speed R 14 Writing a tool offset Low-speed W 15 Reading a work piece origin offset value High-speed R 16 Writing a work piece origin offset value Low-speed W 17 Read
  • Page 1118Function Description Response R/W code 76 Reading CNC status information High-speed R 90 Reading the current program number (8-digit program numbers) High-speed R 91 Reading the actual velocity of each controlled axes High-speed R 138 Reading actual spindle speeds High-speed R 150 Entering data on t
  • Page 1119*2 Functions of "High-speed" in their Response field can read or write data immediately upon request. On the other hand, functions of "Low-speed" in their Response field need to request the CNC to read or write data and receiving response from CNC completes the request. CAUTION To read or write data
  • Page 1120Replace the following after”5.4.8 Reading a Real Type Parameter” (Add example of reading real type parameter for all axes) 6.2 CNC INFORMATION 6.2.1 Reading a Real Type Parameter (High-speed Response) [Description] This function can read a real type CNC parameter. NOTE This function cannot read inte
  • Page 1121[Input data structure] Reading axis type parameters for all axes (M=-1, Example for 3 controlled-axes) Top Address +0 (Function Code) 321 +2 (Completion code) - (Need not to be set) +4 (Data length) - (Need not to be set) +6 (Data number) Set the parameter number with singed binary format in N four
  • Page 1122[Output data structure] Reading the non-axis type parameter or the axis type parameter for one axis (M=n) Top Address +0 (Function Code) 321 +2 (Completion code) ? (See above description) +4 (Data length) The n means the number of parameters to read. L (L=6*n) +6 (Data number) N (Input data) +10 (Da
  • Page 1123[Output data structure] Reading axis type parameters for all axes (M=-1, Example for 3 controlled-axes) Top Address +0 (Function Code) 321 +2 (Completion code) ? (See above description) +4 (Data length) The n means the number of parameters to read. L (L=6*n) +6 (Data number) N (Input data) +10 (Data
  • Page 1124Replace the following after”5.4.9 Writing a Real Type Parameter” (Add example of writing real type parameter for all axes) 6.2.2 Writing a Real Type Parameter (Low-speed Response) [Description] This function can write a real type CNC parameter. NOTE This function cannot write integer type or bit typ
  • Page 1125[Input data structure] Writing axis type parameters for all axes (M=-1, Example for 3 controlled-axes) Top Address +0 (Function Code) 323 +2 (Completion code) - (Need not to be set) +4 (Data length) Set the data length. The n means the number of L parameters to write. (L=6*n) +6 (Data number) Set th
  • Page 1126[Output data structure] Writing the non-axis type parameter or the axis type parameter for one controlled axis (M=n) Top Address +0 (Function Code) 323 +2 (Completion code) ? (See above description) +4 (Data length) L (Input data) +6 (Data number) N (Input data) +10 (Data attribute) M (Input data) +
  • Page 1127[Output data structure] Reading axis type parameters for all axes (M=-1, Example for 3 controlled-axes) Top Address +0 (Function Code) 323 +2 (Completion code) ? (See above description) +4 (Data length) L (Input data) +6 (Data number) N (Input data) +10 (Data attribute) -1 +12 (Decimal point positio
  • Page 1128The parameter value for each specified decimal point position is shown below. (Writing value) = (Parameter value) * 10 (Decimal point position) Writing value Decimal point Parameter value position 1234 0 1234.000 1 123.400 2 12.240 3 1.234 4 0.123 CAUTION Parameters may not become effective immediat
  • Page 11296.3 AXIS INFORMATION 6.3.1 Reading the Actual Speed of Servo Motor (High-speed Response) [Description] This function can read the following information of servo motor. - Actual speed (rev / min) - Thermal simulation data (OVC data) - Torque command The read "Torque command" is normalized from -6554
  • Page 1130[Completion codes] 0: Normal completion 3: The data number is invalid. 4: The data attribute is invalid. [Output data structure] Reading the actual speed for one axis (N=11) Top Address +0 (Function code) 207 +2 (Completion code) - (See above description) +4 (Data length) The n means the number of r
  • Page 1131[Output data structure] Reading the actual speed for all axes (N=11, Example for 3 controlled-axes) Top Address +0 (Function code) 207 +2 (Completion code) - (See above description) +4 (Data length) The n means the number of read parameters. L (L=4*n) +6 (Data number) N=11 (Input data) +8 (Data attr
  • Page 1132[Output data structure] Reading the thermal simulation data for one axis (N=14) Top Address +0 (Function code) 207 +2 (Completion code) - (See above description) +4 (Data length) L (L=2*n) +6 (Data number) N=14 (Input data) +8 (Data attribute) M (Input data) +10 Thermal simulation data Signed binary
  • Page 1133[Output data structure] Reading the thermal simulation data for all axes (N=14, Example for 3 controlled-axes) Top Address +0 (Function code) 207 +2 (Completion code) - (See above description) +4 (Data length) L (L=2*n) +6 (Data number) N=14 (Input data) +8 (Data attribute) -1 +10 Thermal simulation
  • Page 1134[Output data structure] Reading the torque command for one axis (N=15) Top Address +0 (Function code) 207 +2 (Completion code) - (See above description) +4 (Data length) L (L=2*n) +6 (Data number) N=15 (Input data) +8 (Data attribute) M (Input data) +10 Torque command Signed binary format in 2 bytes
  • Page 1135[Output data structure] Reading the torque command for all axes (N=15, Example for 3 controlled-axes) Top Address +0 (Function code) 207 +2 (Completion code) - (See above description) +4 (Data length) L (L=2*n) +6 (Data number) N=15 (Input data) +8 (Data attribute) -1 +10 Torque command for 1st axis
  • Page 11367 LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) In this section, multiple nets edit function that is added in the ladder net editor screen is described. The description of other features of ladder function has been published in a manual "Series 30i/31i/32i MODEL-A PMC programming manual (
  • Page 11377.1.2 Setting the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR Screen Replace the following after ”Fig 8.3.2 LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR (SETTING)screen”. Fig. 7.1.2 LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR (SETTING) screen Series 30i/ 31i/ 32i-MODEL A Supplemental PMC Programming Manual 01 04.06.30 T. Matsukawa New registration DRAW.NO. B-63983E
  • Page 1138(1) Setting items LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR (SETTING) screen contains the setting items below: Insert the following after ” 8.3.2 Setting LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen”. • ZOOM MODE When going to NET EDITOR screen by [ZOOM] soft key on ladder editor screen, you can select the net to be modified, either a
  • Page 1139MULTIPLE NETS You can modify multiple nets near the cursor. Action in modifying an existing net when “ZOOM MODE” is “MULTIPLE NETS”. Net 1 Editing Net 1 Net 2 Net 2a Net 2a Net 3 Net 3a Net 3a Net 4 Net 4a Net 4a Net 5 Net 5a Net 5a Net 6 Net 6a Net 6a Net 7 Net 7a Net 7a a cursor Net 8 Net 8a Net 8
  • Page 11407.1.3 NET EDITOR Screen At NET EDITOR screen, you can create new net, and modify existing net. Replace the following after”8.3.3 NET EDITOR screen Changing existing nets” • Changing existing nets If you move a net with the [ZOOM] soft key, you will enter a mode (Modify mode) in which you can change
  • Page 1141Replace the following after Fig 8.3.3(a) structure of the NET EDITOR screen” Fig. 7.1.3 (a) Structure of the NET EDITOR screen (ONE NET) Fig. 7.1.3 (b) Structure of the NET EDITOR screen (MULTIPLE NETS) Series 30i/ 31i/ 32i-MODEL A Supplemental PMC Programming Manual 01 04.06.30 T. Matsukawa New reg
  • Page 1142Replace the following after “8.3.3(1) Screen structures” (1) Screen structures (a) It is basically the same as LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen. (b) The gage indicating the current display position in relation to the edit area is displayed at the right end of the screen. (c) Current edit mode is indicat
  • Page 1143(2) Operation with Soft keys Soft keys of Net Editor screen Horizontal Automatic A contact Normal coil connection Delete input B contact Inverted coil Functional Left vertical Right vertical instructions connection connection Set coil Data table Edit next net Insert column Cancel edit Reset coil Aba
  • Page 1144In case of "ZOOM MODE" is " MULTIPLE NETS" Finishes editing current net, change multiple nets to be modified by centering the cursor, on the editing area. Action of [NEXT NET] soft key in modifying an existing net when "ZOOM MODE" is "MULTIPLE NETS". Net 1 Editing Net 1 Net 2 Net 2a Net 2a Net 3 Net
  • Page 1145Add the following after”8.3.3 (5)” (3) Displaying extended symbol and comment When using extended symbol and comment, you can define local symbols in each sub-program. On NET EDITOR screen, the priority of displaying symbol and comment by setting of "ZOOM MODE" on ladder diagram editor setting scree
  • Page 11468 PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) In this section, the [PREV ENTRY] soft key and the [NEXT ENTRY] soft key which are added in the symbol & comment editor screen and the message editor screen are described. These keys enable simplification of continuous editing of data. The desc
  • Page 1147Area for editing a symbol and comment data entry Amount of unused memory for symbol and comment data Key input line Message display line Amount of unused memory: The amount of unused memory for editing symbol and comment data is displayed. Area for editing a symbol and comment data entry: Enter an a
  • Page 1148Insert the following after ” 9.2.3(1) Operations using the Soft keys (f),(g).” (1) Operations using the soft keys (a) [PREV ENTRY] Editing previous entry You can edit a symbol and comment on previous entry without leaving from editing mode. (b) [NEXT ENTRY] Editing next entry You can edit a symbol a
  • Page 11498.2 DISPLAYING AND EDITING MESSAGE DATA ([MESAGE] SCREENS) 8.2.1 Editing Desired Message Data On the message data entry editor screen, you can edit desired message data. To move to the message data entry editor screen, press the [ZOOM] soft key on the MESSAGE DATA EDITOR screen. On the message data
  • Page 1150(2) The message number edit area and area for editing a message data string at the bottom of the screen are used to edit the message number and data. (3) On the message display line at the bottom of the screen, an error message appears when issued. Replace the following after ”Fig 9.3.3 Soft keys on
  • Page 11519 CORRECTION MANUAL OF PROGRAMMING Errors of the programming manual are corrected as follows. Change the list of "1.2.7 SPECIFICATION OF EXTENDED SYMBOL AND COMMENT, (6) Available characters" Correct) - Available characters for symbol : Kind Extended type Former The character A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9,
  • Page 1152Change the note-6 of "2.1.3 Sequence Program Memory Capacity" Correct) NOTE 6 8 bytes are taken for a sub-program when local symbols are defined in the pub-program. Wrong) NOTE 6 8 bytes are taken for a sub-program when local symbols are defined. Change the note of " 8 LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDI
  • Page 1153Series 30i / 31i / 32i -MODEL A PMC Supplemental Programming Manual Type of applied technical documents Series 30i/ 31i/ 32is-MODEL A Name PMC Programming Manual Spec. No. /Ed. B-63983EN/02 Summary of Change New, Add, Group Name/Outline Applied Date Correct, Delete - Addition of functional instructi
  • Page 1154Series 30i / 31i / 32i -MODEL A PMC Supplemental Programming Manual Contents 1 SUMMARY ____________________________________________________________________________________ 3 2 APPLIED SOFTWARE __________________________________________________________________________ 4 3 ADDITION OF LADDER FUNCTIONA
  • Page 11551 SUMMARY The following functions have been added to Series 30i / 31i / 32i-MODEL A PMC. • Functional instructions EQB, EQW, EQD, NEB, NEW, NED, GTB, GTW, GTD, LTB, LTW, LTD, GEB, GEW, GED, LEB, LEW, LED, RNGB, RNGW and RNGD • Functional instructions PSGNL and PSGN2 • "No. 409 Reading the total tool
  • Page 11562 APPLIED SOFTWARE The new features will be applied to the following software. - CNC System software Software Drawing number Series Edition Series 30i/ 300i/ 300is-MODEL A A02B-0303-H501#G002 G002 3.G CNC System software A02B-0303-H501#G012 G012 4.0 or later A02B-0303-H501#G022 G022 Series 31i/ 310i
  • Page 11573 ADDITION OF LADDER FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION Additions of LADDER functional instruction are described in this document. The description of formerly supported function has been published in the manual "Series 30i/31i/32i MODEL-A PMC programming manual (B-63983EN/02)". Additions of LADDER functional in
  • Page 11583.1 SPECIFICATIONS 3.1.1 Functional Instructions (Arranged in Sequence of Instruction Group) Table 3.1.1 (a): Functional instructions for PMCs for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A (arranged in sequence of instruction group) 30i/31i/32i-A Instruction Instructio SUB Second Third Processing DCS group n name No
  • Page 1159Table 3.1.1 (a): Functional instructions for PMCs for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A (arranged in sequence of instruction group) 30i/31i/32i-A Instruction Instructio SUB Second Third Processing DCS group n name No. First PMC PMC PMC (Note 4) (Option) (Option) 22 COMPB 32 Binary comparison { { { { 23 COMP
  • Page 1160Table 3.1.1 (a): Functional instructions for PMCs for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A (arranged in sequence of instruction group) 30i/31i/32i-A Instruction Instructio SUB Second Third Processing DCS group n name No. First PMC PMC PMC (Note 4) (Option) (Option) 6 JMPC 73 Label jump 2 { { { { 7 LBL 69 Label
  • Page 1161NOTE 1 These instructions are intended to maintain source-level compatibility with programs for conventional models. They are treated as a NOP instruction (instruction that performs no operation). 2 The 3rd level sequence part is available for the compatibility with programs for conventional models.
  • Page 11623.1.2 Functional Instructions (Arranged in Sequence of SUB No.) Table 3.1.2 (a): Functional instructions for PMCs for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A 30i/31i/32i-A Instruction SUB Processing Second PMC Third PMC DCS name No. First PMC (Option) (Option) (Note 4) END1 1 End of first-level program { { { { END
  • Page 1163Table 3.1.2 (a): Functional instructions for PMCs for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A 30i/31i/32i-A Instruction SUB Processing Second PMC Third PMC DCS name No. First PMC (Option) (Option) (Note 4) MOVW 44 2-byte transfer { { { × MOVN 45 Transfer of arbitrary number of bytes { { { { SPCNT 46 Spindle contro
  • Page 1164Table 3.1.2 (a): Functional instructions for PMCs for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A 30i/31i/32i-A Instruction SUB Processing Second PMC Third PMC DCS name No. First PMC (Option) (Option) (Note 4) EQW 201 2-byte comparison (equal) { { { { EQD 202 4-byte comparison (equal) { { { { NEB 203 1-byte comparison
  • Page 11653.2 COMPARISON The new 21 binary comparison instructions, seven types of comparison, have been added. Compared with the former instruction COMPB, these new instructions have following features. - These instructions are separated by the comparison type. This means that you can read a LADDER program e
  • Page 1166NOTE 1 You can set either constant or address to each parameter for the "(*1)" marked instruction. When you input a number to its parameter on LADDER editing screen, the input is recognized as a constant parameter. When you input a symbol that is composed of digits and that may be considered as a nu
  • Page 11673.2.1 Signed Binary Comparison (=) EQB (1-byte length: SUB 200) EQW (2-bytes length: SUB 201) EQD (4-bytes length: SUB 202) Using this instruction, you can know whether the "Data 1" equals to the "Data 2" or not. The EQB instruction handles 1-byte length signed binary data. The EQW instruction handl
  • Page 1168Control condition (a) Command (ACT) ACT=0: Do not execute the instruction. The W1 becomes 0. ACT=1: Execute the instruction. The result is output to W1. Parameters (a) Data 1 (b) Data 2 You can specify the constant or any address. The valid data range is shown below. EQB: -128 to 127 EQW: -32768 to
  • Page 11693.2.2 Signed Binary Comparison (≠) NEB (1-byte length: SUB 203) NEW (2-bytes length: SUB 204) NED (4-bytes length: SUB 205) Using this instruction, you can know whether the "Data 1" does not equal to the "Data 2" or not. The NEB instruction handles 1-byte length signed binary data. The NEW instructi
  • Page 1170Control condition (a) Command (ACT) ACT=0: Do not execute the instruction. The W1 becomes 0. ACT=1: Execute the instruction. The result is output to W1. Parameters (a) Data 1 (b) Data 2 You can specify the constant or any address. The valid data range is shown below. NEB: -128 to 127 NEW: -32768 to
  • Page 11713.2.3 Signed Binary Comparison (>) GTB (1-byte length: SUB 206) GTW (2-bytes length: SUB 207) GTD (4-bytes length: SUB 208) Using this instruction, you can know whether the "Data 1" is greater than the "Data 2" or not. The GTB instruction handles 1-byte length signed binary data. The GTW instruction
  • Page 1172Control condition (a) Command (ACT) ACT=0: Do not execute the instruction. The W1 becomes 0. ACT=1: Execute the instruction. The result is output to W1. Parameters (a) Data 1 (b) Data 2 You can specify the constant or any address. The valid data range is shown below. NEB: -128 to 127 NEW: -32768 to
  • Page 11733.2.4 Signed Binary Comparison (<) LTB (1-byte length: SUB 209) LTW (2-bytes length: SUB 210) LTD (4-bytes length: SUB 211) Using this instruction, you can know whether the "Data 1" is smaller than the "Data 2" or not. The LTB instruction handles 1-byte length signed binary data. The LTW instruction
  • Page 1174Control condition (a) Command (ACT) ACT=0: Do not execute the instruction. The W1 becomes 0. ACT=1: Execute the instruction. The result is output to W1. Parameters (a) Data 1 (b) Data 2 You can specify the constant or any address. The valid data range is shown below. NEB: -128 to 127 NEW: -32768 to
  • Page 11753.2.5 Signed Binary Comparison (>=) GEB (1-byte length: SUB 212) GEW (2-bytes length: SUB 213) GED (4-bytes length: SUB 214) Using this instruction, you can know whether the "Data 1" is equal or greater than the "Data 2" or not. The GEB instruction handles 1-byte length signed binary data. The GEW i
  • Page 1176Control condition (a) Command (ACT) ACT=0: Do not execute the instruction. The W1 becomes 0. ACT=1: Execute the instruction. The result is output to W1. Parameters (a) Data 1 (b) Data 2 You can specify the constant or any address. The valid data range is shown below. NEB: -128 to 127 NEW: -32768 to
  • Page 11773.2.6 Signed Binary Comparison (<=) LEB (1-byte length: SUB 215) LEW (2-bytes length: SUB 216) LED (4-bytes length: SUB 217) Using this instruction, you can know whether the "Data 1" is equal or smaller than the "Data 2" or not. The LEB instruction handles 1-byte length signed binary data. The LEW i
  • Page 1178Control condition (a) Command (ACT) ACT=0: Do not execute the instruction. The W1 becomes 0. ACT=1: Execute the instruction. The result is output to W1. Parameters (a) Data 1 (b) Data 2 You can specify the constant or any address. The valid data range is shown below. NEB: -128 to 127 NEW: -32768 to
  • Page 11793.2.7 Signed Binary Comparison (range) RNGB (1-byte length: SUB 218) RNGW (2-bytes length: SUB 219) RNGD (4-bytes length: SUB 220) This instruction is the range comparison function. When following data conditions, the output W1 becomes 1. - "Data 1" <= "Input data" <= "Data 2" or "Data 2" <= "Input
  • Page 1180Table 3.2.7 Mnemonic of RNGB, RNGW and RNGD instructions Mnemonic format Status of operation result Step Address Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0 number No. 1 RD {{{{ .{ ACT ACT 2 SUB 218 RNGB instruction 219 RNGW instruction 220 RNGD instruction 3 (PRM) {{{{ Data 1 (Constant or Address)
  • Page 11813.3 POSITION SIGNAL The following types of position signal instruction are available. Use any of these instructions as appropriate for your purpose. Instruction Sub Processing name number 1 PSGN2 63 Position signal 2 PSGNL 50 Position signal Series 30i/ 31i/ 32i-MODEL A PMC Supplemental Programming
  • Page 11823.3.1 PSGN2 (Position Signal: SUB 63) This instruction is a position signal function. You can define the area of machine position for each PSGN2 instructions and you can know whether the current machine position is in the area or not. Format Fig. 3.3.1 shows the ladder format and Table 3.3.1 shows t
  • Page 1183[Extended format] - On multi-path CNC, choose this format. - The continuous 12-bytes memory is necessary. - You should set zero to the first 2-bytes area. Control data +0 0 Set zero to this area. (Extended format) (2byte) +2 CNC path number 1: path 1, 2: path 2... (1byte) +3 Axis number 1: 1st axis,
  • Page 1184(a-3) Position a, b Set the machine position with 4-bytes length binary data with machine unit. You must set positions to be "Position a <= Position b". The position value "1" means the minimum unit of data with machine unit. For example, when the setting of minimum unit of data is "IS-B" and the se
  • Page 1185Operation Output Register (R9000) When ACT=1 and some error occurs in this function, the corresponding bit of the operation output register is set. In this case, W1 will be turned off. When ACT=0, the operation output register will not be updated. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R9000 * R9000.0: Invalid path or
  • Page 11863.3.2 PSGNL (Position Signal: SUB 50) This instruction is a position signal function. You can define eight areas of machine position for each PSGNL instructions and you can know the area where the machine position is currently located. This instruction is not available on multi-path CNC. On multi-pa
  • Page 1187Control data +0 Axis number 1: 1st axis, 2: 2nd axis... (1byte) +1 Position a Set to be a < b < c < d < e (4byte)
  • Page 1188(b) Output Set the output address to this parameter. This output needs 1-byte length memory. When ACT=1, one of the bits corresponding to the current machine position is turned on by this instruction. When ACT=1 and any error occurs in this instruction, all bits of output will be turned off. When AC
  • Page 1189When "g < Machine position": Output#0=1 Operation Output Register (R9000) When ACT=1 and any error occurs in this function, the corresponding bit of the operation output register is set. In this case, all bits of output will be turned off. When ACT=0, the operation output register will not be update
  • Page 1190When "Machine pos. <= -400 mm": R319.7=1 When "-400 mm < Machine pos. <= -200 mm": R319.6=1 When "-200 mm < Machine pos. <= -100 mm": R319.5=1 When "-100 mm < Machine pos. <= 0 mm": R319.4=1 When "0 mm < Machine pos. <= 10 mm": R319.3=1 When "10 mm < Machine pos. <= 100 mm": R319.2=1 When "100 mm <
  • Page 11913.4 DISPLAY FORMAT FOR PARAMETERS Replace the "8.2.3 Display Format for Parameters" with follows The following table shows all monitor formats for each parameter of each functional instruction. NOTE 1 "Variable" in "Monitor format" field means that this parameter changes its size according to the ot
  • Page 1192No. Name Parameter Monitor format No. Name Parameter Monitor format 27 CODB 1 constant 39 DIVB 1 constant 2 constant 2 variable binary 3 1-byte binary 3 constant or 4 variable binary variable binary 28 MOVOR 1 2-digits HEX 4 variable binary 2 2-digits HEX 40 NUMEB 1 constant 3 2-digits HEX 2 constan
  • Page 1193No. Name Parameter Monitor format No. Name Parameter Monitor format 60 AND 1 constant 203 NEB 1 constant or 2 variable HEX 1-byte binary 3 constant or 2 constant or variable HEX 1-byte binary 4 variable HEX 204 NEW 1 constant or 61 OR 1 constant 2-bytes binary 2 variable HEX 2 constant or 3 constant
  • Page 1194No. Name Parameter Monitor format No. Name Parameter Monitor format 213 GEW 1 constant or 218 RNGB 1 constant or 2-bytes binary 1-byte binary 2 constant or 2 constant or 2-bytes binary 1-byte binary 214 GED 1 constant or 3 constant or 4-bytes binary 1-byte binary 2 constant or 219 RNGW 1 constant or
  • Page 11953.5 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION LIST Screen Replace the figure of "8.3.5 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION LIST Screen" with follows Pressing [FUNC] soft key at NET EDITOR screen reaches FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION LIST screen at which you can choose a functional instruction to be entered from the list of all available
  • Page 11964 ADDITION OF WINDOW FUNCTION Additions of CNC WINDOW function are described in this document. The description of formerly supported function has been published in the manual "Series 30i/31i/32i MODEL-A PMC programming manual (B-63983EN/02)". Additional function - Reading the total tool life data (f
  • Page 11974.1 LIST OF WINDOW FUNCTIONS Function group order Function Group Description Response R/W code CNC information 1 Reading CNC system information 0 High-speed R 2 Searching for a free pot (oversize tools supported) 397 Low-speed R 3 Searching for a free pot (oversize tools supported) 397 Low-speed R 4
  • Page 1198Function Group Description Response R/W code 11 Reading the actual velocity of each controlled axes 91 High-speed R 12 Reading actual spindle speeds 138 High-speed R 13 Entering torque limit data for the digital servo motor 152 Low-speed W 14 Reading load information of the spindle motor (serial 153
  • Page 1199Function Group Description Response R/W code 25 Reading the tool life management data (tool group No.) 200 High-speed R (8-digit tool number) 26 Reading tool life management data (tool information (1): 201 High-speed R Tool number) (8-digit tool number) 27 Registering tool life management data (tool
  • Page 1200read or write data and receiving response from CNC completes the request. CAUTION To read or write data for the second path in two-path control CNC, add 1000 to the function code number. To read or write data for the third path in three-path control CNC, add 2000 to the function code number. Similar
  • Page 1201Function code order Function Description Response R/W code 0 Reading CNC system information High-speed R 13 Reading a tool offset High-speed R 14 Writing a tool offset Low-speed W 15 Reading a workpiece origin offset value High-speed R 16 Writing a workpiece origin offset value Low-speed W 17 Readin
  • Page 1202Function Description Response R/W code 76 Reading CNC status information High-speed R 90 Reading the current program number (8-digit program numbers) High-speed R 91 Reading the actual velocity of each controlled axes High-speed R 138 Reading actual spindle speeds High-speed R 150 Entering data on t
  • Page 1203Function Description Response R/W code 325 Deleting the tool life management data (tool data) Low-speed W 326 Deleting the tool life management data (tool life counter and tool information) Low-speed W 327 Writing the tool life management data (arbitrary group number) Low-speed W 328 Writing the too
  • Page 12044.1.1 Reading the Total Tool Life Data (Low-Speed Response) [Description] This function can read a total tool life data corresponding to the specified tool type number and the life count type. [Input data structure] Top Address +0 (Function code) 409 +2 (Completion code) - (Need not to be set) +4 (D
  • Page 1205[Output data structure] Top Address +0 (Function code) 409 +2 (Completion code) ? (See above description) +4 (Data length) 24 +6 (Data number) N (Same as input data) +10 (Data attribute) M (Same as input data) +12 (Detailed completion code) (See above description) +14 Tool type number This is the sa
  • Page 12065 DISPLAYING SEQUENCE PROGRAM AT PMC SCREEN IN USING ONLINE COMMUNICATION Replace the "9.7 Displaying and setting parameters for the online function ([ONLINE]screen)" with follows 5.1 DISPLAYING AND SETTING PARAMETERS FOR THE ONLINE FUNCTION ([ONLINE] SCREEN) The online function allows PMC data to b
  • Page 1207Even while you are monitoring signals, ladder program and PMC parameters, and editing PMC parameters using the online function, you can monitor them also on following PMC screen. • LADDER DIAGRAM VIEWER screen • PROGRAM LIST VIEWER screen • TITLE DATA VIEWER screen • SYSTEM PARAMETER VIEWER screen •
  • Page 1208Use the online function on the screen except following PMC screens. ・ LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen ・ PROGRAM LIST EDITOR screen ・ TITLE DATA EDITOR screen ・ SYSTEM PARAMETER EDITOR screen ・ I/O MODULE EDITOR screen ・ SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA EDITOR screen ・ MESSAGE DATA EDITOR screen ・ PMC PARAMETER (D
  • Page 1209Series 30i / 31i / 32i -MODEL A PMC Supplemental Programming Manual Type of applied technical documents Series 30i/ 31i/ 32i-MODEL A Name PMC Programming Manual Spec. No. /Ed. B-63983EN/02 Summary of Change New, Add, Group Name/Outline Applied Date Correct, Delete - Dual assignment function of I/O l
  • Page 1210Series 30i / 31i / 32i -MODEL A PMC Supplemental Programming Manual Contents 1 SUMMARY .................................................................................................................................... 3 2 APPLIED SOFTWARE ...........................................................
  • Page 12111 SUMMARY The following functions have been added to PMC for Series 30i / 31i / 32i-MODEL A. • Dual assignment function of I/O link channel • "No. 413 Reading the three-dimensional error compensation data" using WINDR instruction • "No. 414 Writing the three-dimensional error compensation data" usin
  • Page 12122 APPLIED SOFTWARE The new features will be applied to the following software. - CNC System software Software Drawing number Series Edition Series 30i/ 300i/ 300is-MODEL A A02B-0303-H501#G002 G002 6.1 or later CNC System software A02B-0303-H501#G012 G012 A02B-0303-H501#G022 G022 Series 31i/ 310i/ 31
  • Page 12133 DUAL ASSIGNMENT CHANNEL OF I/O LINK In this section, Dual Assignment of I/O Link Channel is described. The descriptions of other features of I/O Link were published in a manual "Series 30i/31i/32i MODEL-A PMC programming manual (B-63983EN/02)" Series 30i/ 31i/ 32i-MODEL A PMC Supplemental Programm
  • Page 12143.1 OUTLINE Modify "1.5.2 Setting I/O Address for I/O Link" as follows 3.1.1 Setting I/O Address for I/O Link The I/O addresses of I/O Link channels can be assigned with CNC parameters. Moreover, setting the dual assignment can devide one I/O link channel into two blocks and assign them to defferent
  • Page 12151st PMC Channel 1 X/Y0 to X/Y127 Channel 2 X/Y200 to X/Y327 2nd PMC Channel 3 X/Y0 to X/Y127 3rd PMC Channel 4 X/Y0 to X/Y127 Fig. 1.5.2 (b) Example of I/O address assignment for I/O Link channels Assign one I/O link channel to two PMC paths When multi-path PMC function is used, plural channels are
  • Page 12161st PMC Channel 1 X/Y0 to 127 ～ X/Y200 to 327 Group 0 Group 1 Group 2 Group n Channel 2 ～ ～ Group 0 Group n Group 0 Group n 2nd PMC 1st Block 2nd Block X/Y0 to 127 Fig. 1.5.2 (c) Example of Dual Assignment of I/O Link Channel For details of this function, see Subsection 3.3.2. Series 30i/ 31i/ 32i-M
  • Page 12173.2 PARAMETERS FOR THE PMC SYSTEM Alter "Table 2.4.3 (a) Summary of the CNC parameters related to the PMCs" of "2.4.3 CNC Parameters Related to the PMCs" Table 2.4.3 (a) Summary of the CNC parameters related to the PMCs No. Use Remarks 24 Setting up communication with PMC online connection ladder de
  • Page 1218[Data type] Integer [Valid data range] 0, 100 to 103, 200 to 203, 300 to 303 This item specifies input/output addresses for an I/O Link channel. Table 2.4.3 (g) I/O Link channel input/output addresses Setting Input/output address 0 Standard setting (see below) 100 X0 to X127/Y0 to Y127 for the first
  • Page 12193.3 DUAL ASSIGNMENT OF I/O LINK CHANNEL Alter the NOTE of "3.1WHAT IS THE I/O LINK?" 3.4 ABOUT THE I/O LINK NOTE 1 To use channels 2 to 4 of the I/O Link, the I/O Link expansion option is required for each channel. 2 The transfer cycle of signals from I/O devices is 2 ms with channels 1 and 2, or 4
  • Page 1220Interface between PMC and external I/O 1st PMC Input / Output Address X0 to X127 / Y0 to Y127 Input / Output Address X200 to X327 / Y200 to Y327 Input / Output Address X400 to X527 / Y400 to Y527 Input / Output Address X600 to X727 / Y600 to Y727 2nd PMC Input / Output Address X0 to X127 / Y0 to Y12
  • Page 12211st PMC Channel 1 X/Y0 to 127 ～ X/Y200 to 327 Group 0 Group 1 Group 2 Group n Channel 2 ～ Group 0 Group n 2nd PMC Channel 3 X/Y0 to 127 ～ Group 0 Group n Fig.3.3.2 Example of using 2 PMCs and 3 I/O Link Channels For details of setting, see Subsection 9.9.3. 3.5.3 Dual Assignment of I/O Link Channel
  • Page 12221st PMC Channel 1 X/Y0 to 127 ～ X/Y200 to 327 Group 0 Group 1 Group 2 Group n Channel 2 ～ ～ Group 0 Group n Group 0 Group n 2nd PMC 1st Block 2nd Block X/Y0 to 127 Fig 3.3.3 (a) Example of using 2 PMCs and 2 I/O Link Channels NOTE 1. Up to 2 blocks are available in one channel. 2. Up to 16 groups of
  • Page 1223The module assignment is edited on FANUC LADDER-III or built-in edit function and is saved with the sequence program in the same way as not using the second block. Take care of the total group number and total points of each slave. (2) Setting the machine signal interface Set the input/output addres
  • Page 12241st PMC ・Assignment of X/Y0 to 127 Address Group Base Slot Name X0000 0 0 1 /2 ： ： ： ： ： X0020 1 0 1 FS08A ： ： ： ： ： X0030 2 0 1 CM16I ： ： ： ： ： X0050 3 0 1 /8 ： ： ： ： ： ・Assignment of X/Y200 to 327 Address Group Base Slot Name X0200 0 0 1 /2 ： ： ： ： ： X0210 1 0 1 CM16I ： ： ： ： ： 2nd PMC ・Assignment
  • Page 1225① Assign X0/Y0 of the first PMC to channel 1. ② Assign X200/Y200 of the first PMC to the first block of channel 2. ③ Assign X0/Y0 of the second PMC to the second block of channel 2. ① ② ③ Fig. 3.3.3 (c) Setting of the PMC configuration parameter setting screen For details of setting, see Subsection
  • Page 12263.6 PMC CONFIGURATION PARAMETER SETTING SCREEN Modify the table of "9.9 DISPLAYING AND SETTING CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS ([CONFIG PARAM] SCREENS)" as follows 3.7 DISPLAYING AND SETTING CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS ([CONFIG PARAM] SCREENS) Configuration parameter setting screens display the following NC p
  • Page 1227X/Y addresses I/O Link channels PMC Help message Key input line Message display line Fig 9.9.3 (a) PMC CONFIGRATION PARAMETER (MACHINE INTERFACE) screen I/O LINK CH Displays I/O Link channel numbers. PMC Displays each PMC. PMC1: First PMC PMC2: Second PMC PMC3: Third PMC PMCDCS: Dual check safety la
  • Page 1228X/Y ADDRESS Set the start X/Y addresses. NOTE If an invalid value is set for an NC parameter, "ILLEGAL" is displayed as shown below: Help message A help message for operation is displayed. CAUTION This screen can be protected from editing using the programmer protection function. For a channel for w
  • Page 1229Screen operation Soft keys on the MACHINE SIGNAL INTERFACE screen Previous choice Display dual assignment Initialize settings Next choice Delete the setting Move to the PMC CONFIGRATION PARAMETER (MENU) screen Fig. 9.9.3 (c) Soft keys on the MACHINE SIGNAL INTERFACE screen (1) Operations using the s
  • Page 1230Example：Set the second block of channel 1 Fig 9.9.3 (d) Setting of dual assignment of I/O link channel These settings reflect NC parameters of "I/O link input/output address" and "input/output address of dual assignment of I/O link channel" as follows. NC parameter Meaning Setting number 11910 100 A
  • Page 1231After data is deleted, "*****" is displayed as shown below: This soft key is displayed and can be operated only when editing is allowed. CAUTION When the NC parameters are all set to 0, the initial status (for the initial status, see (e)) is set. Deleting all items with this operation is equivalent
  • Page 1232• Enter a start address such as 0, 200,400 or 600. CAUTION 1 You can set an item on this screen regardless of the NC mode. 2 If data is duplicate, the data is displayed in red and the following message appears: "DUPLICATE X/Y ADDRESS" Series 30i/ 31i/ 32i-MODEL A PMC Supplemental Programming Manual
  • Page 12333.8 ALARM MESSAGE LIST Add ER96 to "11.1.1 Messages That May Be Displayed on the PMC Alarm Screen" Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents ER96 IO LINK MAX GROUP OVER(CHn) <1> Check the PMC paths and When dual assignment of I/O link addresses of first and second channel is used, tota
  • Page 1234ER97 IO LINK FAILURE(CHx If this alarm begins to happen on a This alarm happens when less yyGROUP)note well-worked machine, the cause may be I/O devices are connected. following. This alarm happens when a total <1> CNC cannot communicate with I/O group count of the I/O module devices of group yy. as
  • Page 1235faulty. solve the problem. – faulty wiring – incomplete contact <3> The communication cable to the I/O Link device is faulty. – faulty wiring – incomplete contact <4> The I/O Link device is faulty. NOTE The displayed group number is wiring number of I/O device. Series 30i/ 31i/ 32i-MODEL A PMC Suppl
  • Page 12364 ADDITION OF WINDOW FUNCTION Additions of CNC WINDOW function are described in this document. The description of formerly supported function has been published in the manual "Series 30i/31i/32i MODEL-A PMC programming manual (B-63983EN/02)". Additional function - Reading the three-dimensional error
  • Page 12374.1 LIST OF WINDOW FUNCTIONS Function group order Function Group Description Response R/W code CNC information 1 Reading CNC system information 0 High-speed R 2 Searching for a free pot (oversize tools supported) 397 Low-speed R 3 Searching for a free pot (oversize tools supported) 397 Low-speed R 4
  • Page 1238Function Group Description Response R/W code 11 Reading the actual velocity of each controlled axes 91 High-speed R 12 Reading actual spindle speeds 138 High-speed R 13 Entering torque limit data for the digital servo motor 152 Low-speed W 14 Reading load information of the spindle motor (serial 153
  • Page 1239Function Group Description Response R/W code 22 Writing tool life management data (tool information (1): 171 Low-speed W Tool number) 23 Writing the tool management data (tool information (2): 172 Low-speed W Tool order number) 24 Writing tool life management data (tool number) 173 Low-speed W 25 Re
  • Page 1240codes that have W in the R/W column are window write functions specifiable with the WINDW function command. *2 Functions of "High-speed" in their Response field can read or write data immediately upon request. On the other hand, functions of "Low-speed" in their Response field need to request the CN
  • Page 1241Function code order Function Description Response R/W code 0 Reading CNC system information High-speed R 13 Reading a tool offset High-speed R 14 Writing a tool offset Low-speed W 15 Reading a workpiece origin offset value High-speed R 16 Writing a workpiece origin offset value Low-speed W 17 Readin
  • Page 1242Function Description Response R/W code 76 Reading CNC status information High-speed R 90 Reading the current program number (8-digit program numbers) High-speed R 91 Reading the actual velocity of each controlled axes High-speed R 138 Reading actual spindle speeds High-speed R 150 Entering data on t
  • Page 1243Function Description Response R/W code 325 Deleting the tool life management data (tool data) Low-speed W 326 Deleting the tool life management data (tool life counter and tool information) Low-speed W 327 Writing the tool life management data (arbitrary group number) Low-speed W 328 Writing the too
  • Page 12444.1.1 Reading the Three-Dimensional Error Compensation Data (Low-Speed Response) [Description] This function can read the three-dimensional error compensation data corresponding to the specified compensation point number and compensation axis number. About the details of the three-dimensional error
  • Page 1245[Output data structure] The case of single axis reading Top Address +0 (Function code) 413 +2 (Completion code) ? (See above description) +4 (Data length) 2 +6 (Data number) N (Same as input data) +8 (Data attribute) M (Same as input data) +10 Three-dimensional error Signed binary format in 2-bytes
  • Page 12464.1.2 Writing the Three-Dimensional Error Compensation Data (Low-Speed Response) [Description] This function can write the three-dimensional error compensation data corresponding to the specified compensation point number and compensation axis number. About the details of the three-dimensional error
  • Page 1247The case of all axes writing Top Address +0 (Function code) 414 +2 (Completion code) - (Need not to be set) +4 (Data length) 6 +6 (Data number) Set the compensation point number with signed N binary format in 2-bytes length. (from 1 to (N=Compensation point maximum compensation point number) number)
  • Page 1248[Output data structure] The case of single axis writing Top Address +0 (Function code) 414 +2 (Completion code) ? (See above description) +4 (Data length) 2 (Same as input data) +6 (Data number) N (Same as input data) +8 (Data attribute) M (Same as input data) +10 Three-dimensional error compensatio
  • Page 12495 EXTRA RELAY CONTROL DATA In this section, Extra Relay Control Data is described. The descriptions of other features of Extra Relay Addresses are published in the manual “Series 30i/31i/32i MODEL-A PMC programming manual (B-63983EN/02)”. Series 30i/ 31i/ 32i-MODEL A PMC Supplemental Programming Man
  • Page 12505.1 STRUCTURE OF EXTRA RELAY Modify "2.2.5 Extended Relay Addresses (E)" as follows: 5.1.1 Extra Relay Addresses (E) The following table lists the number of signals (bytes) that can be used as extra relays. Extra relays can be used in the same manner as for internal relays. Turning on the power clea
  • Page 1251K906.3 EOUTPUT (Available on 1st PMC only) 0: On the I/O screen, the E address is output when PMC parameters are output. 1: On the I/O screen, the E address is not output when PMC parameters are output. K906.7 EXRELAYCTLOUT (Available on 1st PMC only) 0 : Extra relay control data will not be include
  • Page 1252Extended relay Extended relay control data Address number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 These data are E0 ～ stored in different ～ storage with that E1 for extended relays (address E). . . . ～ ～ E9999 Fig. 2.2.5 (a) General configuration of extra relay Note 1 Although an address of odd number can be set to the sta
  • Page 1253Number of table groups n = 1 to 100 Table parameter Table group 1 Data type control data Number of data items Table start address Table parameter Table group 2 Data type control data Table control data Number of data items Table start address Table parameter Table group n Data type control data Numb
  • Page 1254(2) Table control data Table control data are the data to control the extra relay tables. Unless these data are properly set, you can not properly view or edit the contents of extra relay tables described in (3) below. First, you configure the table control data properly, reffering to the explanatio
  • Page 12550 : 1 byte long 1 : 2 bytes long 2 : 4 bytes long 3 : 8 bits (iv) Number of data items This item decides the number of data items in this table. (3) Extra relay table You can create groups of extra relays dividing the area of extra relays (E address). “Number of table groups” in the table control da
  • Page 12565.2 RELATED SYSTEM KEEP RELAYS Modify description about K906 in "2.2.11 System Keep Relay Addresses (K)" as follows: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 EXRELAY K906 KEEPSYS TRCST EOUTPUT IOLNKCHK IOGRPSEL OVRRID CTLOUT [Data type] Bit OVRRID Override enable (*) 0: The override function is disabled. 1: The override fun
  • Page 1257Modify description about K909 in "2.2.11 System Keep Relay Addresses (K)" as follows: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 EXRELAY LADSET K909 MWRTF2 MWRTF LASER_IO SCRENBL INDPNT [Data type] Bit LASER_IO 0: The contents of the DI/DO area are not transferred during initial ladder execution. 1: The contents of the DI/DO
  • Page 12585.3 EXTRA RELAY AS PMC PARAMETER Add the following after “(4) Data table” in “2.3 PMC Parameter”: (5) Extra relay Extra relays are volatile memory, which can be used as extention of ordinary internal relays, or as common memory for the interface of PMC paths. Because the extra relays can be non-vola
  • Page 1259P The value of the extra relay. Shown in signed decimal number. Its valid range is –128 to 127. (Example) N690000 P-128; N690001 P100; ・ N699998 P127; N699999 P0; % (b) Table format (Control data part) [Format] N635000 Pnn; Number of table groups (1-100) N635002 Pnnnnnnnn; Table parameter of group 1
  • Page 1260N69xxxx Pnnnnn; N Sum of the offset number of the extra relay and 690000. Its valid range is N690000 to N699999. P The value of the extra relay. Its data size depends on the “Data type” of the control data that the extra relay belongs to, and shown as singed decimal number. Its valid range is –128 t
  • Page 12615.4 SETTING AND DISPLAYING EXTRA RELAY Modify the beginning of “7.3.4 Setting and Displaying Data Tables ([DATA] Screen)” as follows: 5.4.1 Setting and Displaying Data Tables ([DATA] Screen) Data table has two related screens; DATA TABLE CONTROL and DATA TABLE. And similarly, extra relay has two rel
  • Page 1262Soft keys on the DATA TABLE CONTROL screen Switching to the soft keys for PMC path switching data size setting Display mode switching Switching to Extra Switching to the zoom screen Symbol display switching relay screen Input of the number of groups Switching to the soft keys for Group number search
  • Page 1263Soft keys on the DATA TABLE screen Display mode switching Address search Switching PMC path Switching to the list screen Switching to the Extra relay screen Group number search Switching to the Data table screen Fig. 7.3.4 (b) Soft keys on the DATA TABLE screen Substitute paragraph (j) of “Operation
  • Page 1264To switch to the EXTRA RELAY CONTROL screen in which you can manage the extra relay tables, use [EXTRA RELAY] soft key in DATA TABLE CONTROL screen. The operation of this screen is similar to the DATA TABLE CONTROL screen. See “(1) DATA TABLE CONTROL screen ([List] screen)” for the detail of the ope
  • Page 1265Note 1 Extra relays (E) can be included only in PMC parameter output from 1st PMC. If you set 1 to the system keep relay K906.3, no information of extra relays is included in PMC parameter output. 2 You have an option on the format of the extra relays when you include the extra relays in the PMC par
  • Page 12666 IMPROVEMENT SCREEN OF PMC DATA I/O The following functions on the PMC data I/O screen are improved. - Overwriting a file on a Memory Card - Generating a new file name - Character editing of a file name Alter "Fig.7.4 Soft keys on the I/O screen" of "7.4 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT ([I/O] screen)" to the fol
  • Page 12676.1 OVERWRITE A FILE ON A MEMORY CARD Add (4) to "7.4.5 Outputting a Sequence Program to the Memory Card", "7.4.17 Outputting PMC Parameters to the Memory Card", and "7.4.26 Outputting a Message Data for Multi-Language Display to the Memory Card". (4) If the specified file name already exists on a m
  • Page 12686.2 GENERATING A NEW FILE NAME Add (5) to "7.4DATA INPUT/OUTPUT ([I/O] SCREEN) ". (5) [NEW NAME] Generating a new file name Unused new file name is generated by searching files on a memory card or a floppy disk. This soft key is displayed when a writing function to memory card or to floppy disk is s
  • Page 1269NOTE When 128 or more files exist on a memory card or floppy disk, the "Generating new file name" does not work correctly. You should only use this function when 127 or less files exist on the device. Change (2) of "7.4.5 Outputting a Sequence Program to the memory card", "7.4.17 Outputting PMC Para
  • Page 12706.3 CHARACTER EDITING OF A FILE NAME Add (6) and (7) to "7.4DATA INPUT/OUTPUT ([I/O] SCREEN) ". (6) [INPUT MODE] Changing the input mode By pressing [INPUT MODE], the input mode is changed in the following order. The indicator "INSERT" that appears on the screen means insert mode. The indicator "ALT
  • Page 12717 DISPLAY DIAGRAM FORMAT FOR MULTI-PATH OF LADDER PMC SYSTEMS In this section, Display Format of Ladder Diagram for Multi-path PMC systems is described. The description of the related features such as LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen is published in a manual "Series 30i/31i/32i MODEL-A PMC programming
  • Page 12727.1 SYSTEM KEEP RELAY ADDRESSES Modify the description of K909 in the section "2.2.11 System Keep Relay Addresses (K)" as follows: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LADSET K909 MWRTF2 MWRTF LASER_IO INDPNT [Data type] Bit LASER_IO 0: The contents of the DI/DO area are not transferred during initial ladder execution.
  • Page 12737.2 PARAMETERS FOR THE PMC SYSTEM Add the following description at the tails of section “8.2.2 Setting the Display Format of the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR Screen” and section “8.3.2 Setting the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR Screen”: (4) Settings on multi-path PMC system On the multi-path PMC systems, the Ladde
  • Page 12748 DUPLICATE COIL CHECK FUNCTION The soft key [DUP. CHECK] is added to the PMC LADDER menu. This soft key [DUP. CHECK] enables you to display the Duplicate Coil Check screen. To display the PMC LADDER menu, press the "SYSTEM" key and the [PMC LADDER] soft key. Alter Figure in "8 LADDER DIAGRAM MONITO
  • Page 1275Modify the title of the section "8.9 DETECTION OF DOUBLE COILS" to "8.9 CHECKING OF DUPLICATE COIL ([DUP. CHECK] SCREEN)" Add the following section "8.10 CHECKING OF DUPLICATE COIL ([DUP. CHECK] SCREEN)" after the "8.9 CHECKING OF DUPLICATE COIL ([DUP. CHECK]) SCREEN" 8.1 CHECKING OF DUPLICATE COIL
  • Page 1276Data continuation mark (upper) Address and Instruction number display area Net number display area Data continuation mark (lower) Additional information display line Fig. 8.1 (a) Duplicate coil check screen Series 30i/ 31i/ 32i-MODEL A PMC Supplemental Programming Manual 01 04.12.27 S. Hasegawa New
  • Page 1277Screen structures : (1) ADDRESS Duplicated PMC address of coil and Functional instruction's name and number are displayed. You can also display it by symbol instead of PMC address by pressing the [SYMBOL] soft key. (2) NET NO. Some net numbers using the same coil or instruction number are displayed.
  • Page 1278Soft keys on the Duplicate coil check screen Searching of a PMC address or a Functional instruction Switches PMC address display mode Jump to a duplication net Switches PMC path Fig. 8.1 (b) Soft keys on the Duplicate coil check screen Operations using soft keys (1) [SEARCH] Searches a PMC address o
  • Page 1279The following letters can be used for searching functional instruction. Functional instruction Operation "TMR" + [SEARCH] TMR (Timer : SUB 3) "3" + [SEARCH] "TMRB" + [SEARCH] TMRB (Fixed Timer : SUB 24) "24" + [SEARCH] and "TMRBF" + [SEARCH] TMRBF (Off delay fixed Timer : SUB 77) "77" "CTR" + [SEARC
  • Page 12809 SUPPLEMENTARY EXPLANATION FOR FORCED I/O FUNCTION Alter the caution of "7.1.1 Forced I/O Function" to the following. WARNING 1 Special care must be exercised when modifying a signal with the forced Input/output function. If the forced input/output function is used incorrectly, the operation of the
  • Page 1281please disable the Override function invariably. Series 30i/ 31i/ 32i-MODEL A PMC Supplemental Programming Manual 01 04.12.27 S. Hasegawa New registration DRAW.NO. B-63983EN/02-3 EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 73/73
  • Page 1282Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A PMC Supplemental Programming Manual Type of applied technical documents Series 30i/300i/300is-MODEL A Series 31i/310i/310is-MODEL A5 Name Series 31i/310i/310is-MODEL A Series 32i/320i/320is-MODEL A PMC Programming Manual Spec. No. /Ed. B-63983EN/02 Summary of Change New, A
  • Page 1283Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A PMC Supplemental Programming Manual Contents 1 SUMMARY ...........................................................................................................................4 2 APPLIED SOFTWARE...........................................................................
  • Page 12847.1.1 Messages Displayed on the PMC Alarm Screen .................................................36 8 ADITTION AND MODIFICATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OF THE MANUAL ..........37 8.1 LIST OF WINDOW FUNCTIONS........................................................................................41 8.2 AX
  • Page 12851 SUMMARY The following functions have been added to Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A. • PMC/L function for Series 32i-MODEL A. • Expansion of Data Table size at 2nd PMC. This document is a supplemental manual for above additional functions. Other specifications and operations about PMC for Series 30i/31i
  • Page 12862 APPLIED SOFTWARE The new feature will be applied to the following software. - CNC System software Software Drawing number Series Edition Series 30i/300i/300is-MODEL A A02B-0303-H501#G002 G002 09.2 or later. CNC System Software A02B-0303-H501#G012 G012 A02B-0303-H501#G022 G022 Series 31i/310i/310is
  • Page 12873 PMC/L function for Series 32i-MODEL A 32i-A PMC/L is a model of PMC for low-end Machine tools. It has no special CPU for PMC, and it runs on the common CPU with CNC. Therefore, program processing speed, maximum program size, and PMC address size of 32i-A PMC/L is lower than 30i/31i/32i-A PMC. CNC
  • Page 1288Moreover, there are the following differences between 30i/31i/32i-A PMC and 32i-A PMC/L. Table 3 (a) Difference of 30i/31i/32i-A PMC and 32i-A PMC/L Function 30i/31i/32i-A PMC 32i-A PMC/L Maximum PMC path 3 1 Maximum controllable CNC path 10 2 Maximum points of I/O Link (30i-A PMC) DI : 1024 points
  • Page 12894 Expansion of Data Table size at 2nd PMC At the 2nd PMC, memory size of each PMC memories including data table, and maximum number of functional instructions such as TMR and CTR are expanded to the same size as 1st PMC. This expansion is enabled when the PMC Memory-B is selected in the 2nd PMC. See
  • Page 12905 PMC SPECIFICATIONS 5.1 SPECIFICATIONS 5.1.1 Basic Specifications Modify "2.1.1 Basic Specifications" as follows Table 5.1.1 (a) Basic specifications of each PMC paths Function 30i/31i/32i-A PMC 32i-A PMC/L 1st PMC 2nd PMC 3rd PMC DCS PMC (option) (option) (Note1) PMC Memory type PMC Memory-B PMC M
  • Page 1291Function 30i/31i/32i-A PMC 32i-A PMC/L 1st PMC 2nd PMC 3rd PMC DCS PMC (option) (option) (Note1) DI/DO • I/O Link (Note 10) • Inputs (X) Up to 4,096 Up to 4,096 Up to 4,096 Up to 64 points Up to 1,024 points (Note9) points (Note9) points (Note9) points • Outputs (Y) Up to 4,096 Up to 4,096 Up to 4,0
  • Page 1292NOTE 1 This PMC is used for Dual Check Safety and handles the safety related signals. Refer to "Series 30i/31i/32i Dual Check Safety Operators Manual (B-64004EN)" for details. 2 There is no kind of PMC Memory type in DCS PMC and 32i-A PMC/L. 3 The Step Sequence is unavailable in 2nd PMC even if sele
  • Page 1293Table 5.1.1 (b) Basic specifications of each PMC Memory types Function 30i/31i/32i-A PMC 32i-A PMC/L 1st, 2nd and 3rd PMC DCS PMC PMC Memory-A PMC Memory-B (Note1) PMC memory • Internal relay (R) • User area 1,500 bytes 8,000 bytes 1,500 bytes 1,500 bytes • System area 500 bytes 500 bytes 500 bytes
  • Page 1294NOTE 1 This PMC is used for Dual Check Safety function (option). See "Dual Check Safety Operators Manual(B-64004EN)" for details. 2 The extra relay is common memory for the multi-PMC function. To put it another way, its size covers all of the first, second, and third PMCs. And, it can be used as non
  • Page 12955.1.2 Program Capacity On 32i-A PMC/L , the maximum ladder steps are 5000. Add the following table to "2.1.2 Program Capacity" Table 5.1.2 (a) Program capacity for 32i-A PMC/L Number of ladder step option Maximum program size (Flash ROM capacity) 3000 steps option 128 KB 5000 steps option Series 30i
  • Page 12965.1.3 Addresses Modify "2.1.5 Addresses" as follows Table 5.1.3 (a) Addresses of PMCs for Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A Signals Sym 30i/31i/32i-A PMC 32i-A PMC/L bol 1st, 2nd, 3rd PMC DCS PMC PMC Memory-A PMC Memory-B (Note1) Input signal to the PMC from X X0 to X127 X0 to X127 X0 to X127 X0 to X127 th
  • Page 1297Signals Sym 30i/31i/32i-A PMC 32i-A PMC/L bol 1st, 2nd, 3rd PMC DCS PMC PMC Memory-A PMC Memory-B (Note1) Internal relay R • User area R0 to R1499 R0 to R7999 R0 to R1499 R0 to R1499 • System area R9000 to R9499 R9000 to R9499 R9000 to R9499 R9000 to R9499 Extra relay E E0 to E9999 (Note4) E0 to E99
  • Page 1298NOTE 1 This PMC is used for Dual Check Safety function (option). See "Dual Check Safety Operators Manual(B-64004EN)" for details. 2 This area is reserved for PMC management software. No I/O can be allocated in this area. Do not use it in user programs. 3 This area is used to specify the precision of
  • Page 12995.1.4 Basic Instructions Modify "2.1.6 Basic Instructions" as follows Table 5.1.4 (a) Basic instructions of PMCs for Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A Instruction name 30i/31i/32i-A PMC 32i-A PMC/L 1st PMC 2nd PMC 3rd PMC DCS PMC (option) (option) (Note) RD { { { { { RD.NOT { { { { { WRT { { { { { WRT.NOT
  • Page 13005.1.5 Functional Instructions Modify "2.1.8 Functional Instructions (Arranged in Sequence of SUB No.)" as follows Table 5.1.5 (a) Functional instructions of PMCs for Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A Instruction SUB Processing 30i/31i/32i-A PMC 32i-A Name No. 1st PMC 2nd PMC 3rd PMC DCS PMC PMC/L (option)
  • Page 1301Instruction SUB Processing 30i/31i/32i-A PMC 32i-A Name No. 1st PMC 2nd PMC 3rd PMC DCS PMC PMC/L (option) (option) (Note1) ADDB 36 Binary addition { { { { { SUBB 37 Binary subtraction { { { { { MULB 38 Binary multiplication { { { { { DIVB 39 Binary division { { { { { NUMEB 40 Binary constant defini
  • Page 1302Instruction SUB Processing 30i/31i/32i-A PMC 32i-A Name No. 1st PMC 2nd PMC 3rd PMC DCS PMC PMC/L (option) (option) (Note1) FNC90 90 Arbitrary-function instruction 1 ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ FNC91 91 Arbitrary-function instruction 2 ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ FNC92 92 Arbitrary-function instruction 3 ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ FNC93 93 Arbitrary-f
  • Page 1303NOTE 1 This PMC is used for Dual Check Safety function (option). See "Dual Check Safety Operators Manual(B-64004EN)" for details. 2 These instructions are intended to maintain source-level compatibility with programs for conventional models. They are treated as a NOP instruction (instruction that pe
  • Page 13045.2 PARAMETERS FOR THE PMC SYSTEM 5.2.1 CNC Parameters Related to the PMCs Add the following to "2.4.3 CNC Parameters Related to the PMCs" PMC Memory Type 11941 PMC Memory Type of 2nd PMC NOTE Once any of these parameters is re-set, it is necessary to turn the power off and on again. [Data type] Int
  • Page 1305NOTE When using all data table area as nonvolatile memory with PMC Memory-B in 2nd PMC, please add the "PMC nonvolatile data table area expansion (7KB)" option. If this option is not added, the expanded data table area (D3000 to D9999) is not kept after rebooting CNC. Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A PMC
  • Page 13065.3 Compatibility with Conventional Models Insert the following before "2.5.1 Compatibility with the PMCs for the 16i/18i/21i-B" 5.3.1 Compatibility between PMC Memory-A and PMC Memory-B The sequence program for the PMC Memory-B has highly compatiblity of the source program with the one for the PMC
  • Page 1307Insert the following after "2.5.1 Compatibility with the PMCs for the 16i/18i/21i-B" 5.3.2 Compatibility with the PMC-SA1 for the Series 21i-B The 32i-A PMC/L is highly compatible in the source program level with the PMC-MODEL SA1 (PMC-SA1) for Series 21i-MODEL B (21i-B). Transporting programs requi
  • Page 1308(9) A part of window functions for PMC- SA1 is not supported. See "5 Window function" of PMC Programming Manual about available window functions. (10) The MMCWR and MMCWW functional instructions are treated as a NOP. PMC parameter compatibility PMC Parameters prepared for PMC-SA1 can be loaded to 32
  • Page 13096 PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) 6.1 DISPLAYING AND EDITING TITLE DATA ([TITLE] SCREENS) Modify "9.1.1 Displaying Title Data " as follows 6.1.1 Displaying Title Data On the TITLE DATA screen, the title data of sequence program, and some information of sequence program and PMC
  • Page 1310(1) Title data The following title data that is set in the sequence program is displayed. Item Max. characters MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME 32 MACHINE TOOL NAME 32 CNC & PMC NAME 32 PMC PROGRAM NO. 4 EDITION NO. 2 PROGRAM DRAWING NO. 32 DATA OF PROGRAMMING 16 PROGRAM DESIGNED BY 32 ROM WRITTEN BY 32 RE
  • Page 1311Screen operations Soft keys on the PMC Title Data screen Switch to the editor screen Switch to the TITLE DATA (MESSAGE) screen Fig. 6.1.1 Soft keys on the TITLE DATA screen (1) Operations using the soft keys (a) [EDIT] Change to the editor screen Switches to the TITLE DATA EDITOR screen. (b) [MESAGE
  • Page 13126.2 DISPLAYING AND SETTING CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS ([CONFIG PARAM] SCREENS) Modify "9.9 DISPLAYING AND SETTING CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS ([CONFIG PARAM] SCREENS) " as follows Configuration parameter setting screens display the following NC parameters related to PMCs in an easy-to-understand manner a
  • Page 1313Modify "9.1.1 Menu for Setting Configuration Parameters " as follows 6.2.1 Menu for Setting Configuration Parameters There are the following PMC configuration parameter setting screens: • MENU screen • CNC-PMC INTERFACE screen • MACHINE SIGNAL INTERFACE screen • LADDER EXECUTION screen • PMC MEMORY
  • Page 1314NOTE Each setting screen can be protected using the programmer protection function. If a setting screen is protected, the [SELECT] soft key is not displayed. (2) Screen operation using other keys Use cursor keys to switch to a desired setting item. Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A PMC Supplemental Program
  • Page 1315Add the following after "9.9.4 Setting the Parameters Related to Ladder Execution" 6.2.2 Setting the PMC Memory type On the PMC CONFIGURATION PARAMETER(PMC MEMORY) screen, you can change the PMC Memory Type of each PMC path. The setting is saved to the CNC parameter and becomes effective after reboo
  • Page 1316NOTE 1 The item of the menu differs by the constitution of software options. 2 Selectable PMC Memory Type differs for each PMC path. 3 When using all data table area as nonvolatile memory with PMC Memory-B in 2nd PMC, please add the "PMC nonvolatile data table area expansion (7KB)" option. If this o
  • Page 13177 PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE 7.1 ALARM MESSAGE LIST 7.1.1 Messages Displayed on the PMC Alarm Screen The following message is added to the PMC alarm messages displayed to the PMC alarm screen. Add the following to the "11.1.1 Messages That May be Displayed on the PMC Alarm Screen" Alarm
  • Page 13188 ADITTION AND MODIFICATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OF THE MANUAL In this section, some addition and modification of the manual "Series 30i/31i/32i MODEL-A PMC programming manual (B-63983EN/02)" are described. Replace the 1st page of the "3.1 WAHT IS THE I/O LINK" The FANUC I/O Link is a serial interface
  • Page 1319NOTE 1 When the 1st or 2nd or 3rd PMC uses I/O Link channel 3 or 4, the update cycle of the signals from I/O Link channel 3 or 4 becomes 4 msec or 8 msec. In this case, note that the response of the CNC for the changing of the direct reference signals, such as skip signals, reference position return
  • Page 1320Replace the "1. Compatibility with Series 16i/18i/21i" of the "5 WINDOW FUNCTIONS" 1. Compatibility with Series 16i/18i/21i The specifications of following WINDOW functions on Series 30i/31i/32i-A are different from ones on Series 16i/18i/21i. • The new function "No.321 Reading a real type parameter
  • Page 1321Replace the figure of the "5.1 FORMATS OF THE CONTROL DATA" Completion code Meaning 0 Normal termination 1 Error (invalid function code) 2 Error (invalid data block length) 3 Error (invalid data number) 4 Error (invalid data attribute) 5 Error (invalid data) 6 Error (necessary option missing) 7 Erro
  • Page 1322Replace to the newest list of the "5.3 LIST OF WINDOW FUNCTIONS" 8.1 LIST OF WINDOW FUNCTIONS Function group order Function Group Description Response R/W code CNC information 1 Reading CNC system information 0 High-speed R (Section 5.4) 2 Reading a tool offset 13 High-speed R 3 Write a tool offset
  • Page 1323Function Group Description Response R/W code Axis information 8 Reading the actual spindle speed 50 High-speed R (Section 5.5) 9 Reading the relative position on a controlled axis 74 High-speed R 10 Reading the remaining travel 75 High-speed R 11 Reading the actual velocity of each controlled axes 9
  • Page 1324Function Group Description Response R/W code Tool life 21 Writing tool life management data (cutter radius 170 Low-speed W management compensation number (2): Tool order number) functions 22 Writing tool life management data (tool information (1): 171 Low-speed W (Section 5.6) Tool number) 23 Writin
  • Page 1325*1 Function codes that have R in the R/W column are window read functions specifiable with the WINDR function command. Function codes that have W in the R/W column are window write functions specifiable with the WINDW function command. *2 Functions of "High-speed" in their Response field can read or
  • Page 1326Function code order Function Description Response R/W code 0 Reading CNC system information High-speed R 13 Reading a tool offset High-speed R 14 Writing a tool offset Low-speed W 15 Reading a work piece origin offset value High-speed R 16 Writing a work piece origin offset value Low-speed W 17 Read
  • Page 1327Function Description Response R/W code 76 Reading CNC status information High-speed R 90 Reading the current program number (8-digit program numbers) High-speed R 91 Reading the actual velocity of each controlled axes High-speed R 138 Reading actual spindle speeds High-speed R 150 Entering data on t
  • Page 1328Function Description Response R/W code 325 Deleting the tool life management data (tool data) Low-speed W 326 Deleting the tool life management data (tool life counter and tool information) Low-speed W 327 Writing the tool life management data (arbitrary group number) Low-speed W 328 Writing the too
  • Page 1329Replace the table of the "Output data unit" in the "5.5.2 Reading the Absolute Position (Absolute Coordinates) of Controlled Axes (High-speed Response)" Replace the table of the "Output data unit" in the "5.5.4 Reading a Skip Position (Stop Coordinates of Skip Operation (G31)) of Controlled Axes (Hi
  • Page 1330Replace the "Description" in the "5.5.10 Reading the Remaining Travel (High-speed Response)" [Description] The remaining travel of the machine along an axis controlled by the CNC can be read. The unit of the read data is different whether the move command setting of the axis is radius specification
  • Page 1331Replace the "Completion codes" in the "5.5.13 Entering Torque Limit Data for the Digital Servo Motor (Low-speed Response)" 0: Torque limit data has been entered normally. 4: The specified data attribute is invalid. That is, a value other than 1 to n (number of axes) was specified, or the specified a
  • Page 13328.2 AXIS INFORMATION 8.2.1 Reading the Actual Speed of Servo Motor (High-speed Response) Replace the "Description" in the "Reading the Actual Speed of Servo Motor (High-speed Response)" [Description] This function can read the following information of servo motor. - Actual speed (rev / min) - Therma
  • Page 1333[Input data structure] Top Address +0 (Function code) 207 +2 (Completion code) - (Need not to be set) +4 (Data length) - (Need not to be set) +6 (Data number) N = 11: Actual speed (rev / min) N 14: Thermal simulation data (OVC data) 15: Torque command +8 (Data attribute) M = 1 to n: Axis number M -1
  • Page 1334[Output data structure] Reading the actual speed for one axis (N=11) Top Address +0 (Function code) 207 +2 (Completion code) - (See above description) +4 (Data length) The n means the number of read parameters. L (L=4*n) +6 (Data number) N=11 (Input data) +8 (Data attribute) M (Input data) +10 Actua
  • Page 1335[Output data structure] Reading the actual speed for all axes (N=11, Example for 3 controlled-axes) Top Address +0 (Function code) 207 +2 (Completion code) - (See above description) +4 (Data length) The n means the number of read parameters. L (L=4*n) +6 (Data number) N=11 (Input data) +8 (Data attr
  • Page 1336[Output data structure] Reading the thermal simulation data for one axis (N=14) Top Address +0 (Function code) 207 +2 (Completion code) - (See above description) +4 (Data length) L (L=2*n) +6 (Data number) N=14 (Input data) +8 (Data attribute) M (Input data) +10 Thermal simulation data Signed binary
  • Page 1337[Output data structure] Reading the thermal simulation data for all axes (N=14, Example for 3 controlled-axes) Top Address +0 (Function code) 207 +2 (Completion code) - (See above description) +4 (Data length) L (L=2*n) +6 (Data number) N=14 (Input data) +8 (Data attribute) -1 +10 Thermal simulation
  • Page 1338[Output data structure] Reading the torque command for one axis (N=15) Top Address +0 (Function code) 207 +2 (Completion code) - (See above description) +4 (Data length) L (L=2*n) +6 (Data number) N=15 (Input data) +8 (Data attribute) M (Input data) +10 Torque command Signed binary format in 2 bytes
  • Page 1339[Output data structure] Reading the torque command for all axes (N=15, Example for 3 controlled-axes) Top Address +0 (Function code) 207 +2 (Completion code) - (See above description) +4 (Data length) L (L=2*n) +6 (Data number) N=15 (Input data) +8 (Data attribute) -1 +10 Torque command for 1st axis
  • Page 1340Addition and modification of the description of the "5.7 TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS" 8.3 TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS Commands regarding the main axis position and standby position of a multi-path system In a multi-path system, the tool management data and the cartridge data are shared by the paths. Reg
  • Page 1341NOTE 1 The CNC can control a maximum of four axes per path. 2 When the maximum number of axes that can be controlled per path is four, the CNC can control a maximum of eight axes for all the paths from path 1 to path 10. Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A PMC Supplemental Programming Manual 01 05.03.30 H. Y
  • Page 13428.3.1 Moving (Exchanging) Tool Management Data Numbers in a Cartridge Management Table (Low-speed Response) [Description] The tool management data numbers of the two pot numbers of the specified cartridge numbers are exchanged. When the cartridge number is in the range between 11 and 14 (main axis p
  • Page 1343[Completion codes] 0: The processing has been executed normally. 2: The data length is invalid. 5: The specified cartridge number or pot number is not registered. 6: The necessary option is not found. [Detailed completion codes] The detailed completion code is always 0 when the completion code is ot
  • Page 1344[Output data structure] Top Address +0 (Function code) 329 +2 (Completion code) ? (See above description) +4 (Data length) 8 (Same as input data) +6 (Data number) - (Same as input data) +8 (Data attribute) - (Same as input data) +10 (Data number 2) - (Same as input data) +12 (Detailed completion cod
  • Page 13458.3.2 Searching for a Free Pot (Low-speed Response) [Description] The nearest free pot (one whose tool management data number is 0) in the same cartridge is searched for, with reference to the specified pot position. The main axis and standby positions are not regarded as free pots. [Search directio
  • Page 1346[Completion codes] 0: The processing has been executed normally. 3: The specified cartridge number or pot number is invalid. 4: The specified search direction is invalid. 6: The necessary option is not found. 8, 13: There is no free pot. [Detailed completion codes] The detailed completion code is al
  • Page 13478.3.3 Registering New Tool Management Data (Low-speed Response) [Description] A new tool is registered, based on the specified cartridge number and pot number, or tool management data number. The system searches for a free area, starting from the top of the memory space, and registers the specified
  • Page 1348[Input data structure] Top Address +0 (Function code) 331 +2 (Completion code) - (Need not to be set) +4 (Data length) L (L=76, 140, 220) +6 (Data number) If you want to specify the tool management data N number, set zero to this field. (N=Cartridge number) +8 (Data attribute) - (Need not to be set)
  • Page 1349+46 unused (2 bytes) (Need not to be set) +48 unused (2 bytes) (Need not to be set) +50 Tool geometric * for lathe or compound system compensation number G (2 bytes) +52 Tool wear compensation * for lathe or compound system number W (2 bytes) +54 Tool geometory number * The option "Tool management f
  • Page 1350[Completion codes] 0: The processing has been executed normally. 2: The data length is invalid. 3: The specified cartridge number and pot number, or tool management data number is invalid. 5: The input data is invalid or the tool interferes. 6: The necessary option is not found. 7: The area is prote
  • Page 1351[Output data structure] Top Address +0 (Function code) 331 +2 (Completion code) ? (See above description) +4 (Data length) L (L=Same as input data) +6 (Data number) N (N=Same as input data) +8 (Data attribute) - (Same as input data) +10 (Data number 2) N2 (N2=Same as input data) +12 (Detailed comple
  • Page 13528.3.4 Writing Tool Management Data (Low-speed Response) [Description] The tool management data is changed, based on the specified cartridge number and pot number, or tool management data number. In the case of a free pot (a tool management data number is not assigned), error code 9 is returned. When
  • Page 1353[Input data structure] Top Address +0 (Function code) 332 +2 (Completion code) - (Need not to be set) +4 (Data length) L (L=76, 140, 220) +6 (Data number) If you want to specify the tool management data N number, set zero to this field. (N=Cartridge number) +8 (Data attribute) - (Need not to be set)
  • Page 1354+46 unused (2 bytes) (Need not to be set) +48 unused (2 bytes) (Need not to be set) +50 Tool geometric * for lathe or compound system compensation number G (2 bytes) +52 Tool wear compensation * for lathe or compound system number W (2 bytes) +54 Tool geometory number * The option "Tool management f
  • Page 1355[Completion codes] 0: The processing has been executed normally. 2: The data length is invalid. 3: The specified cartridge number and pot number, or tool management data number is invalid. 5: The input data is invalid or the tool interferes. 6: The necessary option is not found. 7: The area is prote
  • Page 1356[Output data structure] Top Address +0 (Function code) 332 +2 (Completion code) ? (See above description) +4 (Data length) L (L=Same as input data) +6 (Data number) N (N=Same as input data) +8 (Data attribute) - (M=Same as input data) +10 (Data number 2) N2 (N2=Same as input data) +12 (Detailed comp
  • Page 13578.3.5 Deleting Tool Management Data (Low-speed Response) [Description] The tool management data is deleted, based on the specified cartridge number and pot number, or tool management data number. In the case of a free pot (a tool management data number is not assigned), error code 9 is returned. [In
  • Page 1358[Output data structure] Top Address +0 (Function code) 333 +2 (Completion code) ? (See above description) +4 (Data length) 0 +6 (Data number) N (N=Same as input data) +8 (Data attribute) - (Same as input data) +10 (Data number 2) N2 (N2=Same as input data) +12 (Detailed completion code) ? +13 (See a
  • Page 13598.3.6 Reading Tool Management Data (Low-speed Response) [Description] The tool management data is read, based on the specified cartridge number and pot number, or tool management data number. In the case of a free pot (a tool management data number is not assigned), error code 9 is returned. NOTE Cu
  • Page 1360[Completion codes] 0: The processing has been executed normally. 3: The specified cartridge number and pot number, or tool management data number is invalid. 6: The necessary option is not found. 7: The area is protected. 9: Free pot. [Detailed completion codes] The detailed completion code is alway
  • Page 1361+30 Tool life status (1 byte) +31 Costomized data 0 (1 byte) +32 Tool information (2 bytes) +34 Tool length compensation * for milling or compound system number H (2 bytes) +36 Cutter compensation number * for milling or compound system D (2 bytes) +38 Spindle speed S (4 bytes) +42 Cutting feedrate
  • Page 13628.3.7 Writing a Specified Type of Tool Management Data (Low-speed Response) [Description] A specified type of tool management data is written to memory. Enter the data type number to be written, as the data attribute. The size of the required data area varies depending on the data type. The followin
  • Page 1363NOTE Customized data 5 to 20 can be written to memory when the "Tool management function customized data extension (5 to 20)" option is equipped. Customized data 5 to 40 can be written when the "tool management function customized data extension (5 to 40)" option is equipped. [Input data structure]
  • Page 1364[Detailed completion codes] The detailed completion code is always 0 when the completion code is other than 3 or 5. When the completion code is 3, the detailed completion code is one of the following values: 21: The cartridge number is invalid. 22: The pot number is invalid. 23: The tool management
  • Page 1365[Output data structure] Top Address +0 (Function code) 335 +2 (Completion code) ? (See above description) +4 (Data length) L (L=Same as input data) +6 (Data number) N (N=Same as input data) +8 (Data attribute) M (M=Same as input data) +10 (Data number 2) N2 (N2=Same as input data) +12 (Detailed comp
  • Page 13668.3.8 Searching for Tool Management Data (Low-speed Response) [Description] Tool data is searched, based on the customized data. A search is conducted to see whether any tool data that matches the specified customized data is registered in the cartridge management table. The cartridge number and pot
  • Page 1367[Completion codes] 0: The processing has been executed normally. 3: The specified customized data number is invalid. 6: The necessary option is not found. [Detailed completion codes] The detailed completion code is always 0 when the completion code is other than 3. When the completion code is 3, the
  • Page 13688.3.9 Shifting Tool Management Data (Low-speed Response) [Description] The pot numbers in the cartridge management table are shifted. In the case of a cartridge with fixed pot numbers, the tool management data numbers registered for the specified cartridges are shifted by the specified shift count.
  • Page 1369[Completion codes] 0: The processing has been executed normally. 3: The specified cartridge number or shift count is invalid. 4: The specified shift direction is invalid. 6: The necessary option is not found. [Detailed completion codes] The detailed completion code is always 0 when the completion co
  • Page 13708.3.10 Searching for a Free Pot (oversize tools supported)(Low-speed Response) [Description] The nearest free pot (one whose tool management data number is 0) in the same cartridge is searched for, with reference to the specified pot position. The main axis and standby positions are not regarded as
  • Page 1371[Completion codes] 0: The processing has been executed normally. 3: The specified cartridge number or pot number or tool geometry number is invalid. 4: The specified search direction is invalid. 6: The necessary option is not found. 8, 13: There is no free pot. [Detailed completion codes] The detail
  • Page 13728.3.11 Reading the Total Tool Life Data (Low-Speed Response) [Description] This function can read a total tool life data corresponding to the specified tool type number and the life count type. [Input data structure] Top Address +0 (Function code) 409 +2 (Completion code) - (Need not to be set) +4 (
  • Page 1373[Output data structure] Top Address +0 (Function code) 409 +2 (Completion code) ? (See above description) +4 (Data length) 24 +6 (Data number) N (N=Same as input data) +10 (Data attribute) M (M=Same as input data) +12 (Detailed completion code) (See above description) +14 Tool type number This is th
  • Page 1374Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A PMC Supplemental Programming Manual Type of applied technical documents Series 30i/300i/300is-MODEL A Series 31i/310i/310is-MODEL A5 Name Series 31i/310i/310is-MODEL A Series 32i/320i/320is-MODEL A PMC Programming Manual Spec. No. /Ed. B-63983EN/02 Summary of Change New, A
  • Page 1375Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A PMC Supplemental Programming Manual Contents 1 SUMMARY ........................................................................................................................................................... 3 2 APPLIED SOFTWARE..........................................
  • Page 13761 SUMMARY The following functions have been added to the PMC for Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A. • Expansion of PMC Memory size (Data table is 20,000 bytes and Internal Relay is 16,000 bytes). • Addition of Ladder 100,000 steps option. • Addition of the Common PMC Memory mode for Multi-path PMC. • Addit
  • Page 13772 APPLIED SOFTWARE The new feature will be applied to the following software. - CNC System software Software Drawing number Series Edition Series 30i/300i/300is-MODEL A A02B-0303-H501#G002 G002 11.7 or later. CNC System Software A02B-0303-H501#G012 G012 A02B-0303-H501#G022 G022 Series 31i/310i/310is
  • Page 1378- PROFIBUS Software Drawing number Series Edition PROFIBUS Application Software A02B-0303-J535#655B 655B 07 or later. (planning) - FL-net Software Drawing number Series Edition FL-net Application Software A02B-0303-J568#656M 656M 02 or later. (planning) FL-net Firmware A02B-0303-J566#656K 656K 02 or
  • Page 13793 EXPANSION OF PMC MEMORY SIZE In the 1st-path of 30i/31i/32i-A PMC, a setting to expand the maximum size of some PMC memories to the double has been added. The Data Table has been expanded to 20,000 bytes from 10,000 bytes, and the Internal Relay has been expanded to 16,000 bytes from 8,000 bytes.
  • Page 13803.1 SPECIFICATIONS 3.1.1 Basic Specifications Modify "2.1.1 Basic Specifications" as follows Table 3.1.1 (a) Basic specifications of each PMC path Function 30i/31i/32i-A PMC 32i-A PMC/L 1st PMC 2nd PMC 3rd PMC DCS PMC (option) (option) (Note1) PMC Memory Type PMC Memory-B PMC Memory-A PMC Memory-A (
  • Page 1381Function 30i/31i/32i-A PMC 32i-A PMC/L 1st PMC 2nd PMC 3rd PMC DCS PMC (option) (option) (Note1) DI/DO • I/O Link (Note 10) • Inputs (X) Up to 4,096 Up to 4,096 Up to 4,096 Up to 64 points Up to 1,024 points (Note9) points (Note9) points (Note9) points • Outputs (Y) Up to 4,096 Up to 4,096 Up to 4,0
  • Page 1382NOTE 9 On series 30i, you can use up to four I/O Link channels (4,096 input points and 4,096 output points). On series 31i/32i, you can use up to three I/O Link channels (3,072 input points and 3,072 output points). The channel number 1 of I/O Link (1,024 input points and 1,024 output points) is a b
  • Page 1383Table 3.1.1 (b) Basic specifications of each PMC Memory Type Function 30i/31i/32i-A PMC 32i-A PMC/L 1st, 2nd and 3rd PMC DCS PMC PMC PMC PMC (Note1) Memory-A Memory-B Memory-C PMC memory • Internal relay (R) 1,500 bytes 8,000 bytes 16,000 bytes 1,500 bytes 1,500 bytes • System Relay 500 bytes 500 by
  • Page 1384NOTE 1 This PMC is used for Dual Check Safety function (option). See "Dual Check Safety Operators Manual(B-64004EN)" for details. 2 The extra relay is common memory for the multi-PMC function. To put it another way, its size covers all of the first, second, and third PMCs. And, it can be used as non
  • Page 13853.1.2 PMC Addresses Modify "2.1.5 Addresses" as follows Table 3.1.2 (a) Addresses of PMCs for Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A Signals Sym 30i/31i/32i-A PMC 32i-A PMC/L bol 1st, 2nd, 3rd PMC DCS PMC PMC PMC PMC (Note1) Memory-A Memory-B Memory-C Input signal to the X X0 to X127 X0 to X127 X0 to X127 X0 to
  • Page 1386Signals Sym 30i/31i/32i-A PMC 32i-A PMC/L bol 1st, 2nd, 3rd PMC DCS PMC PMC PMC PMC (Note1) Memory-A Memory-B Memory-C Internal relay R R0 to R1499 R0 to R7999 R0 to R15999 R0 to R1499 R0 to R1499 System relay R/Z R9000 to R9499 R9000 to R9499 Z0 to Z499 R9000 to R9499 R9000 to R9499 Extra relay E E
  • Page 1387NOTE 1 This PMC is used for Dual Check Safety function (option). See "Dual Check Safety Operators Manual(B-64004EN)" for details. 2 This area is reserved for PMC management software. No I/O can be allocated in this area. Do not use it in user programs. 3 This area is used to specify the precision of
  • Page 13883.1.3 Sequence Program Memory Capacity Modify "2.1.3 Sequence Program Memory Capacity" as follows The following table lists the memory capacity used by sequence programs. When creating sequence programs, keep their total size within this memory capacity. Table 3.1.3 (a) Used memory size for each dat
  • Page 1389NOTE 1 The total sequence program size (including all items such as ladders, symbols/comments, and messages) cannot exceed the sequence program memory storage capacity. If a ladder, symbol/ comment, or message is large, the size of other categories may be limited. 2 The PMC programmer may adjust arr
  • Page 13903.2 COMBINATION OF PMC MEMORY TYPE Available PMC Memory Type for each PMC path is selectable from the following combinations, because the whole memory for PMC system is divided by each PMC paths. 30i/31i/32i-A PMC PMC System type 1st PMC 2nd PMC 3rd PMC Standard PMC Memory-B - - 1path syatem PMC Mem
  • Page 13913.3 PMC SIGNAL ADDRESSES Modify "2.2.4 Internal Relay (System Area) Addresses (R) " as follows 3.3.1 System Relay Addresses (R9000, Z0) The System Relay is used to control a sequence program by PMC System software. And, some addresses such as 'Operation results of functional instructions' are used t
  • Page 1392(2) R9000, Z0 (error output for the EXIN, WINDR, and WINDW functional instructions) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R9000 Z0 The result is erroneous. (3) R9002 to R9005, Z2 to Z5 (operation output registers for the DIVB functional instruction) The remainder of a division performed with the DIVB functional instructi
  • Page 1393CAUTION 1 Each signal is initially OFF. 2 The signals R9091.0, R9091.1, Z91.0 and Z91.1 are set at the beginning of the first ladder level on every cycle. 3 Each pulse signal (ON-OFF signal) has an error of ±8 or 4 msec (ladder execution period). Ladder execution start signal Ladder stop signal Ladd
  • Page 1394Execution status of Ladder Run Stop Ladder execution start signal 1 (R9015.0, Z15.0) 0 Ladder stop signal 1 (R9015.1, Z15.1) 0 Ladder execution status signal 1 (R9091.2, R9091.3, R9091.4, 0 Z91.2, Z91.3, Z91.4) One ladder One ladder scan cycle scan cycle (1) Ladder execution start signal (R9015.0, Z
  • Page 1395(2) Ladder stop signal (R9015.1, Z15.1) When directed to stop ladder program execution, the system software turns off this signal and keeps it off for the last one scan before stopping ladder program execution. Like R9000 and Z0, this signal indicates the status of ladder execution corresponding to
  • Page 1396(4) Example of using the signals (a) Example of calling a subprogram just before the ladder stops R9015.1 (Z15.1) SUB65 Pxxxx CALL (b) Example of forcibly turning off an output signal programmed on the first ladder level just before the ladder stops R9015.1 Input (Z15.1) Output (c) Example of sendin
  • Page 13973.4 PARAMETERS FOR THE PMC SYSTEM 3.4.1 CNC Parameters Related to the PMCs Add the following to "2.4.3 CNC Parameters Related to the PMCs" PMC Memory Type 11940 PMC Memory Type of 1st PMC 11941 PMC Memory Type of 2nd PMC 11942 PMC Memory Type of 3rd PMC NOTE Once any of these parameters is re-set, i
  • Page 1398CAUTION 1 Setting an invalid value to this parameter results in the PMC alarm "ER58 PMC MEMORY TYPE SETTING ERROR" and all sequence programs for each PMC will not be started. 2 PMC nonvolatile memory must be initialized after changing PMC Memory Type. Therefore, please make a backup of PMC parameter
  • Page 1399Percent execution time for multiple PMCs NOTE When using the Common PMC Memory mode, the execution time of those PMCs are merged, and programs are sequentially executed within the merged time. Start or stop of the ladder NOTE When using the Common PMC Memory mode, those programs are started or stopp
  • Page 14003.5 COMPATIBILITY WITH CONVENTIONAL MODELS Insert the following before "2.5.1 Compatibility with the PMCs for the 16i/18i/21i-B" 3.5.1 Compatibility between PMC Memory-A and PMC Memory-B The sequence program for the PMC Memory-C has highly compatiblity of the source program with the one for the PMC
  • Page 14013.6 DISPLAYING AND SETTING CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS ([CONFIG PARAM] SCREENS) Add the following after "9.9.4 Setting the Parameters Related to Ladder Execution" 3.6.1 Setting the PMC Memory Type On the PMC CONFIGURATION PARAMETER(PMC MEMORY) screen, you can change the PMC Memory Type of each PMC path
  • Page 1402NOTE 1 The item of the menu differs by the constitution of software options. 2 Selectable PMC Memory Type differs for each PMC path. See the "3.2 CONVINATION OF PMC MEMORY TYPE" for the details of selectable types. Screen operations Soft keys on the PMC CONFIGURATION PARAMETER (PMC MEMORY) screen Se
  • Page 1403(6) [INIT] Initialize all settings Reset all PMC Memory Type of each PMC paths to the default setting. Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A PMC Supplemental Programming Manual 01 05.5.30 H. Yonekura New registration DRAW.NO. B-63983EN/02-5 EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 30/46
  • Page 14043.7 ALARM MESSAGE LIST 3.7.1 Messages Displayed on the PMC Alarm Screen Modify "11.1.1 Messages That May be Displayed on the PMC Alarm Screen" partially. Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents ER58 PMC MEMORY TYPE Check CNC parameter No.11940 to The setting of PMC Memory Type is SET
  • Page 14054 ADDITION OF THE LADDER 100,000 STEPS OPTION The "1st-path PMC Ladder function 100,000 steps" option and the "1st-path PMC Ladder function 100,000 steps (Symbol capacity expansion)" option have been added. Modify "Table 2.1.2(a) Program capacity for the first PMC" as follows Table 4 (a) Program cap
  • Page 14065 COMMON PMC MEMORY MULTI-PATH PMC MODE OF On the 2nd-path and 3rd-path PMC, the "Common PMC Memory mode" to share all the PMC Memory with 1st-path PMC has become selectable. When using the Common PMC Memory mode, a program that control a related process can be divided to multi-path Sequence Program
  • Page 1407WARNING 1 Please separate the range of PMC Memory that will be written by each PMC path. And, don't write to the same address from other PMC paths because it will often cause a problem. If making such a programs it will be difficult to fix a problem. 2 When using the Common PMC Memory mode, the memo
  • Page 14085.1 COMPARISON OF INDEPENDENT PMC MEMORY MODE AND COMMON PMC MEMORY MODE There are come differences in the following specifications in the Independent PMC Memory mode and the Common PMC Memory mode. Table 5.1 (a) Comparison of Independent PMC Memory mode and Common PMC Memory mode Data and Functions
  • Page 14095.2 LADDER LANGUAGE 5.2.1 TMR (Timer : SUB 3) Modify the warning of "4.3.1 TMR (Timer : SUB 3)" as follows WARNING 1 If the timer number is duplicated, or falls outside the valid range, the operation will be unpredictable. 2 When using the Common PMC Memory mode, don't use the duplicated timer numbe
  • Page 14105.2.4 DISPB (Display Message : SUB 41) Add the following to "4.11.1 DISPB (Display Message : SUB 41)" Common PMC Memory mode of Multi-path PMC When using the Common PMC Memory mode, the Message Data can be defined at each PMC path. In this case, make the program of DISPB functional instruction in th
  • Page 1411CAUTION When using the Common PMC Memory mode, don't define message to the same A Address from multiple PMC paths. If message is defined in multiple PMC paths, only message defined in least numbered PMC path is displayed. For example, if A0.1 is defined in the 1st-path PMC in the above case, the mes
  • Page 14125.3 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT ([I/O] SCREEN) 5.3.1 Outputting PMC Parameters to the Memory Card 5.3.2 Inputting PMC Parameters from the Memory Card 5.3.3 Comparing PMC Parameters with Memory Card Files 5.3.4 Outputting PMC Parameters to the FLOPPY 5.3.5 Inputting PMC Parameters from the FLOPPY 5.3.6 Compari
  • Page 14136 ADDITION CONDITION TO INPUT OR OUTPUT PMC OF THE REQUIRED PARAMETER The required condition of input or output PMC Parameter on the PMC data I/O screen has been changed to the same condition as CNC Parameter. Input from the data I/O screen To enter the PMC parameters from the data I/O screen requir
  • Page 1414NOTE 1 These operations may be protected by the programmer protection function. For details of the programmer protection function, see "PROTECT PMC PARAM" in Subsection "6.2.1" of PMC Programming Manual. 2 If you set "RAM WRITE ENABLE" to "YES", the input of the PMC parameters from the PMC I/O scree
  • Page 1415NOTE These operations may be protected by the programmer protection function. For details of the programmer protection function, see "PROTECT PMC PARAM" in Subsection "6.2.1" of PMC Programming manual The guidance message displayed when protected PMC parameter is outputted on the I/O screen. Guidanc
  • Page 14167 ADITTION AND MODIFICATION OF THE DESCRIPTIONS OF THE MANUAL Replace the 1st page of the "3.1 WAHT IS THE I/O LINK" 7.1 WAHT IS THE I/O LINK The FANUC I/O Link is a serial interface, which passes input/output signals between the PMC and each I/O device at a high speed. For each channel, up to 1024
  • Page 1417NOTE 1 When the 1st or 2nd or 3rd PMC uses I/O Link channel 3 or 4, the update cycle of the signals from I/O Link channel 3 or 4 becomes 4 msec or 8 msec. In this case, note that the response of the CNC for the changing of the direct reference signals, such as skip signals, reference position return
  • Page 14187.2 LADDER LANGUAGE Replace the "Error output(W1)" in "4.10.1 ADDB (Binary addition: SUB 36)" Error output (W1) W1=0: Operation correct W1=1: Operation incorrect W1 goes on (W1=1) if the result exceeds the specified data length. Then, the result will be output and the overflow flag and other flags w
  • Page 14197.3 WINDOW FUNCTIONS Replace the "(1) Servo axis" in "5.5.14 Reading the Estimate Disturbance Torque Data (High-speed Response)" (1) Servo axis [Description] This function can read the estimate disturbance torque data. The estimate disturbance torque data is the load current data except a necessary
  • Page 1420Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A PMC Supplemental Programming Manual Type of applied technical documents Series 30i/300i/300is-MODEL A Series 31i/310i/310is-MODEL A5 Name Series 31i/310i/310is-MODEL A Series 32i/320i/320is-MODEL A PMC Programming Manual Spec. No. /Ed. B-63983EN/02 Summary of Change New, A
  • Page 1421Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A PMC Supplemental Programming Manual Contents 1 SUMMARY............................................................................................................................ 3 2 APPLIED SOFTWARE .........................................................................
  • Page 14221 SUMMARY The following window functions have been added or updated. • The function to read the actual machine position of controlled axes has been added. • Multi-edge tools have been supported for the Tool Management Function. • Some window functions for the Tool Management Function have been added
  • Page 14232 APPLIED SOFTWARE The new features will be applied to the following software. - CNC System software Edition Tool Software Drawing number Series Axis Management Information Functions Series 30i/300i/300is-MODEL A A02B-0303-H501#G002 G002 CNC System Software A02B-0303-H501#G012 G012 A02B-0303-H501#G0
  • Page 14243 ADDITION OF WINDOW FUNCTION The following Window functions have been added or updated. (1) Reading the actual machine position of controlled axes This function to read the machine position with Servo Delay and Acceleration/Deceleration Delay has been added. Function code Description 428 Reading th
  • Page 14253.1 LIST OF WINDOW FUNCTIONS Modify "5.3 LIST OF WINDOW FUNCTIONS" as follows. Function group order Function Group Description Response R/W code CNC information 1 Reading CNC system information 0 High-speed R (Section 5.4) 2 Reading a tool offset 13 High-speed R 3 Write a tool offset 14 Low-speed W
  • Page 1426Function Group Description Response R/W code Axis information 8 Reading the actual spindle speed 50 High-speed R (Section 5.5) 9 Reading the relative position on a controlled axis 74 High-speed R 10 Reading the remaining travel 75 High-speed R 11 Reading the actual velocity of each controlled axes 9
  • Page 1427Function Group Description Response R/W code Tool life 21 Writing tool life management data (cutter radius 170 Low-speed W management compensation number (2): Tool order number) functions 22 Writing tool life management data (tool information (1): 171 Low-speed W (Section 5.6) Tool number) 23 Writin
  • Page 1428Function Group Description Response R/W code Tool management 12 Writing tool management data by specified data 419 Low-speed W functions 13 Deleting tool management data by specified data 420 Low-speed W (Section 5.7) 14 Reading tool management data by specified data 421 Low-speed R 15 Writing each
  • Page 1429Function code order Function Description Response R/W code 0 Reading CNC system information High-speed R 13 Reading a tool offset High-speed R 14 Writing a tool offset Low-speed W 15 Reading a work piece origin offset value High-speed R 16 Writing a work piece origin offset value Low-speed W 17 Read
  • Page 1430Function Description Response R/W code 76 Reading CNC status information High-speed R 90 Reading the current program number (8-digit program numbers) High-speed R 91 Reading the actual velocity of each controlled axes High-speed R 138 Reading actual spindle speeds High-speed R 150 Entering data on t
  • Page 1431Function Description Response R/W code 325 Deleting the tool life management data (tool data) Low-speed W 326 Deleting the tool life management data (tool life counter and tool information) Low-speed W 327 Writing the tool life management data (arbitrary group number) Low-speed W 328 Writing the too
  • Page 1432NOTE To read or write data for the second path in two-path control CNC, add 1000 to the function code number. To read or write data for the third path in three-path control CNC, add 2000 to the function code number. Similarly, to read or write data for the fourth to 10th paths, add 3000 to 9000 acco
  • Page 14333.2 AXIS INFORMATION 3.2.1 Reading the Actual Machine Position of Controlled Axes Add "Reading the Actual Machine Position of Controlled Axes" to "5.5 AXIS INFORMATION". [Description] You can read the machine position (coordinates) using this function. The position is read in the machine unit, indep
  • Page 1434NOTE To read a machine position that servo delay and acceleration/deceleration delay is applied, set 1 to the CNC parameter No.11313#7. [Completion codes] 0: The machine position was read successfully. 3: The data specified as the data number is invalid. 4: The data specified as the data attribute i
  • Page 1435[Output data structure] When read a specified axis. Top Address +0 (Function code) 428 +2 (Completion code) ? (See above description) +4 (Data length) 4 +6 (Data number) N (N=Same as input data) +8 (Data attribute) M (M=Same as input data) +10 Machine position Signed binary format in 4 bytes length.
  • Page 1436[Output data unit] Machine Increment system system IS-A IS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E mm, deg 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 inch 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001 Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A PMC Supplemental Programming Manual 01 05.6.30 H. Yonekura New registration DRAW.NO. B-63983EN/02-6 EDIT DATE
  • Page 14373.3 TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 3.3.1 Registering New Tool Management Data (Low-speed Response) Modify "5.7.3 Registering New Tool Management Data (Low-speed Response)" as follows. [Description] A new tool is registered, based on the specified magazine number and pot number, or tool management data nu
  • Page 1438(a) Data length 76: When the option "Tool management function customized data extension" is not equipped. 140: When the option "Tool management function customized data extension (5 to 20)" is equipped. 220: When the option "Tool management function customized data extension (5 to 40)" is equipped.
  • Page 1439+34 Tool length compensation * for milling or compound system number H (2 bytes) +36 Cutter compensation * for milling or compound system number D (2 bytes) +38 Spindle speed S (4 bytes) +42 Cutting feedrate F (4 bytes) +46 (unused) (2 bytes) (Need not to be set) +48 (unused) (2 bytes) (Need not to
  • Page 1440[Completion codes] 0: The processing has been executed normally. 2: The data length is invalid. 3: The specified magazine number, pot number or tool management data number is invalid. 5: The input data is invalid. / The tool interferes. / Illegal multi edge data. 6: The necessary option is not found
  • Page 1441[Output data structure] Top Address +0 (Function code) 331 +2 (Completion code) ? (See above description) +4 (Data length) L (L=Same as input data) +6 (Data number) N (N=Same as input data) +8 (Data attribute) - (Same as input data) +10 (Data number 2) N2 (N2=Same as input data) +12 (Detailed comple
  • Page 14423.3.2 Writing Tool Management Data (Low-speed Response) Modify "5.7.4 Writing Tool Management Data (Low-speed Response)" as follows. [Description] The tool management data is changed, based on the specified magazine number and pot number, or tool management data number. In the case of a free pot (a
  • Page 1443[Input data structure] Top Address +0 (Function code) 332 +2 (Completion code) - (Need not to be set) +4 (Data length) L (L=76, 140, 220) +6 (Data number) If you want to specify the tool management data N number, set zero to this field. (N=Magazine number) +8 (Data attribute) - (Need not to be set)
  • Page 1444+46 (unused) (2 bytes) (Need not to be set) +48 (unused) (2 bytes) (Need not to be set) +50 Tool geometric * for lathe or compound system compensation number G (2 bytes) +52 Tool wear compensation * for lathe or compound system number W (2 bytes) +54 Tool geometory number * The option "Tool manageme
  • Page 1445[Completion codes] 0: The processing has been executed normally. 2: The data length is invalid. 3: The specified magazine number, pot number or tool management data number is invalid. 5: The input data is invalid. / The tool interferes. / Illegal multi edge data. 6: The necessary option is not found
  • Page 1446[Output data structure] Top Address +0 (Function code) 332 +2 (Completion code) ? (See above description) +4 (Data length) L (L=Same as input data) +6 (Data number) N (N=Same as input data) +8 (Data attribute) - (Same as input data) +10 (Data number 2) N2 (N2=Same as input data) +12 (Detailed comple
  • Page 14473.3.3 Reading Tool Management Data (Low-speed Response) Modify "5.7.6 Reading Tool Management Data (Low-speed Response)" as follows. [Description] The tool management data is read, based on the specified magazine number and pot number, or tool management data number. In the case of a free pot (a too
  • Page 1448[Input data structure] Top Address +0 (Function code) 334 +2 (Completion code) - (Need not to be set) +4 (Data length) - (Need not to be set) +6 (Data number) If you want to specify the tool management data N number, set zero to this field. (N=Magazine number) +8 (Data attribute) - (Need not to be s
  • Page 1449[Output data structure] Top Address +0 (Function code) 334 +2 (Completion code) ? (See above description) +4 (Data length) L (L=76, 140, 220) +6 (Data number) N (N=Same as input data) +8 (Data attribute) - (Same as input data) +10 (Data number 2) N2 (N2=Same as input data) +12 (Detailed completion c
  • Page 1450+46 Magazine number (2 bytes) +48 Pot number (2 bytes) +50 Tool geometric compensation * for lathe or compound system number G (2 bytes) +52 Tool wear compensation * for lathe or compound system number W (2 bytes) +54 Tool geometory number GNO * The option "Tool management function (2 bytes) (oversi
  • Page 14513.3.4 Writing a Specified Type of Tool Management Data (Low-speed Response) Modify "5.7.7 Writing a Specified Type of Tool Management Data (Low-speed Response)" as follows. [Description] You can change a part of tool management data. Enter the data type number to be change, as the data attribute. Th
  • Page 1452When the option "Tool management function (oversize tools supported)" is equipped, you can also register the item "Tool geometry number" to the tool management data. If you register the tool management data that causes an interference with another tool or magazine frame, completion code 5 and detail
  • Page 1453[Completion codes] 0: The processing has been executed normally. 2: The data length is invalid. 3: The specified magazine number, pot number or tool management data number is invalid. 4: The specified data type is invalid. 5: The input data is invalid. / The tool interferes. / Illegal multi edge dat
  • Page 1454[Output data structure] Top Address +0 (Function code) 335 +2 (Completion code) ? (See above description) +4 (Data length) L (L=Same as input data) +6 (Data number) N (N=Same as input data) +8 (Data attribute) M (M=Same as input data) +10 (Data number 2) N2 (N2=Same as input data) +12 (Detailed comp
  • Page 14553.3.5 Writing Tool Management Data by Specified Data (Low-speed Response) Add "Writing Tool Management Data by Specified Data (Low-speed Response)" to "5.7 TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS". [Description] This function searches a tool management data for the specified search data and writes data to the sea
  • Page 1456(b) Search kind number You should set the search kind number that determines the kind of data to search. Search kind Search data 1 Search data 2 number 0 Magazine number Pot number 1 Tool management data - number 2 Tool kind number Identifier Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A PMC Supplemental Programming M
  • Page 1457[Input data structure] Top Address +0 (Function code) 419 +2 (Completion code) - (Need not to be set) +4 (Data length) L (L=84, 148, 228) +6 (Data number) N (N=Search kind number) +8 (Data attribute) - (Need not to be set) +10 (Data number 2) - (Need not to be set) +12 (Detailed Completion code) - (
  • Page 1458+46 Spindle speed S (4 bytes) +50 Cutting feedrate F (4 bytes) +54 (unused) (2 bytes) (Need not to be set) +56 (unused) (2 bytes) (Need not to be set) +58 Tool geometric * for lathe or compound system compensation number G (2 bytes) +60 Tool wear compensation * for lathe or compound system number W
  • Page 1459[Completion codes] 0: The processing has been executed normally. 2: The data length is invalid. 3: The specified magazine number, pot number or tool management data number is invalid. 5: The input data is invalid. / The tool interferes. / Illegal multi edge data. 6: The necessary option is not found
  • Page 1460[Output data structure] Top Address +0 (Function code) 419 +2 (Completion code) ? (See above description) +4 (Data length) L (L=Same as input data) +6 (Data number) N (N=Same as input data) +8 (Data attribute) - (M=Same as input data) +10 (Data number 2) (Same as input data) +12 (Detailed completion
  • Page 14613.3.6 Deleting Tool Management Data by Specified Data (Low-speed Response) Add "Deleting Tool Management Data by Specified Data (Low-speed Response)" to "5.7 TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS". [Description] This function searches a tool management data for the specified search data and deletes the searched
  • Page 1462[Input data structure] Top Address +0 (Function code) 420 +2 (Completion code) - (Need not to be set) +4 (Data length) 0 +6 (Data number) N (N=Search kind number) +8 (Data attribute) - (Need not to be set) +10 (Data number 2) - (Need not to be set) +12 (Detailed Completion code) - (Need not to be se
  • Page 1463[Output data structure] Top Address +0 (Function code) 420 +2 (Completion code) ? (See above description) +4 (Data length) 0 +6 (Data number) N (N=Same as input data) +8 (Data attribute) - (Same as input data) +10 (Data number 2) - (Same as input data) +12 (Detailed completion code) ? (See above des
  • Page 14643.3.7 Reading Tool Management Data by Specified Data (Low-speed Response) Add "Reading Tool Management Data by Specified Data (Low-speed Response)" to "5.7 TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS". [Description] This function searches a tool management data for the specified search data and reads data to the sear
  • Page 1465[Input data structure] Top Address +0 (Function code) 421 +2 (Completion code) - (Need not to be set) +4 (Data length) - (Need not to be set) +6 (Data number) N (N=Search kind number) +8 (Data attribute) - (Need not to be set) +10 (Data number 2) - (Need not to be set) +12 (Detailed Completion code)
  • Page 1466[Completion codes] 0: The processing has been executed normally. 3: The specified magazine number, pot number or tool management data number is invalid. 6: The necessary option is not found. 7: The area is protected. 9: Free pot. [Detailed completion codes] The detailed completion code is always 0 w
  • Page 1467[Output data structure] Top Address +0 (Function code) 421 +2 (Completion code) ? (See above description) +4 (Data length) L (L=84, 148, 228) +6 (Data number) N (N=Same as input data) +8 (Data attribute) - (Same as input data) +10 (Data number 2) - (Same as input data) +12 (Detailed completion code)
  • Page 1468+46 Spindle speed S (4 bytes) +50 Cutting feedrate F (4 bytes) +54 Magazine number (2 bytes) +56 Pot number (2 bytes) +58 Tool geometric compensation * for lathe or compound system number G (2 bytes) +60 Tool wear compensation * for lathe or compound system number W (2 bytes) +62 Tool geometory numb
  • Page 14693.3.8 Writing Each Tool Management Data by Specified Data (Low-speed Response) Add "Writing Each Tool Management Data by Specified Data (Low-speed Response)" to "5.7 TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS". [Description] This function searches a tool management data for the specified search data and writes data
  • Page 1470Table 3.3.8 (a) Data, data type number and data area size Data type Data Data Remarks number area size 1 Tool type number 4 bytes 2 Tool life counter 4 bytes 3 Maximum tool life 4 bytes 4 Notice tool life 4 bytes 5 Tool life status 1 byte 6 Customized data 0 1 byte 7 Tool information 2 bytes 8 Tool
  • Page 1471NOTE Customized data 5 to 20 can be written to memory when the "Tool management function customized data extension (5 to 20)" option is equipped. Customized data 5 to 40 can be written when the "tool management function customized data extension (5 to 40)" option is equipped. (a) Search kind number
  • Page 1472[Input data structure] Top Address +0 (Function code) 422 +2 (Completion code) - (Need not to be set) +4 (Data length) Set the length of data that you want to write. L (L=1, 2, 4) +6 (Data number) N (N=Search kind number) +8 (Data attribute) M (M=Data type number) +10 (Data number 2) - (Need not to
  • Page 1473[Completion codes] 0: The processing has been executed normally. 2: The data length is invalid. 3: The specified magazine number, pot number or tool management data number is invalid. 4: The specified data type is invalid. 5: The input data is invalid. / The tool interferes. / Illegal multi edge dat
  • Page 1474[Output data structure] Top Address +0 (Function code) 422 +2 (Completion code) ? (See above description) +4 (Data length) L (L=Same as input data) +6 (Data number) N (N=Same as input data) +8 (Data attribute) M (M=Same as input data) +10 (Data number 2) - (Same as input data) +12 (Detailed completi
  • Page 14753.3.9 Writing Magazine Property Data (Low-speed Response) Add "Writing Magazine Property Data (Low-speed Response)" to "5.7 TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS". [Description] Writing magazine property data with specified magazine number. [Input data structure] Top Address +0 (Function code) 423 +2 (Completio
  • Page 1476[Completion codes] 0: The processing has been executed normally. 2: The data length is invalid. 3: The specified magazine number is invalid. 5: The input data is invalid. 6: The necessary option is not found. [Detailed completion codes] The detailed completion code is always 0 when the completion co
  • Page 14773.3.10 Reading Magazine Property Data (Low-speed Response) Add "Reading Magazine Property Data (Low-speed Response)" to "5.7 TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS". [Description] Reading magazine property data with specified magazine number. [Input data structure] Top Address +0 (Function code) 424 +2 (Completi
  • Page 1478[Output data structure] Top Address +0 (Function code) 424 +2 (Completion code) ? (See above description) +4 (Data length) 24 +6 (Data number) N (N=Same as input data) +8 (Data attribute) - (Same as input data) +10 (Data number 2) - (Same as input data) +12 (Detailed completion code) ? (See above de
  • Page 14793.3.11 Writing Pot Property Data (Low-speed Response) Add "Writing Pot Property Data (Low-speed Response)" to "5.7 TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS". [Description] Writing pot property data with specified magazine and pot number. [Input data structure] Top Address +0 (Function code) 425 +2 (Completion code
  • Page 1480[Completion codes] 0: The processing has been executed normally. 2: The data length is invalid. 3: The specified magazine number or pot number is invalid. 4: The specified data type is invalid. 5: The input data is invalid. 6: The necessary option is not found. [Detailed completion codes] The detail
  • Page 1481[Output data structure] Top Address +0 (Function code) 425 +2 (Completion code) ? (See above description) +4 (Data length) 48 (Same as input data) +6 (Data number) N (N=Same as input data) +8 (Data attribute) M (M=Same as input data) +10 (Data number 2) N2 (N2=Same as input data) +12 (Detailed compl
  • Page 14823.3.12 Reading Pot Property Data (Low-speed Response) Add "Reading Pot Property Data (Low-speed Response)" to "5.7 TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS". [Description] Reading pot property data with specified magazine and pot number. [Input data structure] Top Address +0 (Function code) 426 +2 (Completion code
  • Page 1483[Output data structure] Top Address +0 (Function code) 426 +2 (Completion code) ? (See above description) +4 (Data length) 48 +6 (Data number) N (N=Same as input data) +8 (Data attribute) - (Same as input data) +10 (Data number 2) N2 (N2=Same as input data) +12 (Detailed completion code) ? (See abov
  • Page 14843.3.13 Searching for a Free Pot by Specified Data (Low-speed Response) Add "Searching for a Free Pot by Specified Data (Low-speed Response)" to "5.7 TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS". [Description] This function searches the nearest free pot that has a tool management number zero, with a specified search d
  • Page 1485[Input data structure] Top Address +0 (Function code) 427 +2 (Completion code) - (Need not to be set) +4 (Data length) - (Need not to be set) +6 (Data number) N (N=Magazine number) +8 (Data attribute) M (M=Search direction) +10 (Data number 2) N2 (N2=Pot number) +12 (Detailed Completion code) - (Nee
  • Page 1486[Detailed completion codes] The detailed completion code is always 0 when the completion code is other than 3. When the completion code is 3, the detailed completion code is one of the following values: 21: The magazine number is invalid. 22: The pot number is invalid. 100: The search kind number is
  • Page 14874 CORRECTION OF THE MANUAL Delete the following incorrect description from "2.2.4 Internal Relay(System Area) Addresses(R)". Extended relay area volatile/nonvolatile status signal The extended relay area (address E) can be optionally configured as nonvolatile. Referencing this signal can check wheth
  • Page 1488TECHNICAL REPORT (MANUAL) NO. TMN 05/122E Date 27. Dec. 2005 General Manager of Software Research Laboratory FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A PMC Supplemental Programming Manual 1. Communicate this report to: O Your information only O GE Fanuc-A, GE Fanuc-E FANUC Robotics CINCINNATI MILACRON O Machi
  • Page 1489Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A PMC Supplemental Programming Manual Type of applied technical documents Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A Name PMC Programming Manual Spec. No. /Ed. B-63983EN/02 Summary of Change New, Add, Group Name/Outline Applied Date Correct, Delete Additional specification of Window functio
  • Page 1490Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A PMC Supplemental Programming Manual Contents 1 SUMMARY............................................................................................................................ 3 2 APPLIED SOFTWARE .........................................................................
  • Page 14911 SUMMARY Following Window functions of the PMC for Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A has been improved. • Reading/Writing a Custom Macro variable. • Reading/Writing a P-CODE Macro variable • Reading modal data This document is a supplemental manual for above additional functions. Other specifications and
  • Page 14922 APPLIED SOFTWARE The new features will be applied to the following software. - PMC System software Software Drawing number Series Edition Series 30i/300i/300is-MODEL A Series 31i/310i/310is-MODEL A5 Series 31i/310i/310is-MODEL A A02B-0303-H580#40A0 40A0 12 or later. Series 32i/320i/320is-MODEL A P
  • Page 14933 ADDITIONAL WINDOW INSTRUCTIONS SPECIFICATION OF The following functions has been added to the Window functions. (1) Reading/Writing a "null" state that means the value is not defined, have been added to the following Function codes. Function code Description 21 Reading a Custom Macro variable 22 W
  • Page 14943.1 CNC INFORMATION 3.1.1 Reading a Custom Macro Variable (High-speed Response) [Description] Using this function, you can read a common variable of custom macro variables. You cannot read a local variable and a system variable. Common variables Without custom macro common variable addition option #
  • Page 1495[Output data structure] Top Address +0 (Function code) 21 +2 (Completion code) ? (See above description) +4 (Data length) L=6 +6 (Data number) N (N=Same as input data) +8 (Data attribute) M (M=Same as input data) +10 Mantissa Signed binary format in 4 bytes length D1 (4 bytes) +14 Number of decimal
  • Page 1496NOTE When you set 0 to number of decimal places M, the read value of D2 may changes by the value of the macro variable and the setting of CNC system. So, we recommend to set 1 to 8 to number of decimal places M. Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A PMC Supplemental Programming Manual 01 '05.12.26 H. Yonekura
  • Page 14973.1.2 Writing a Custom Macro Variable (Low-speed Response) [Description] Using this function, you can write value to a common variable of custom macro variables. You cannot write to local variables or system variables. Common variables Without custom macro common variable addition option #100-#149,
  • Page 1498D1 D2 Value of the custom macro variable 1234 0 1234 1234 1 123.4 1234 2 12.34 1234 3 1.234 1234 4 0.1234 0 Except -1 0 0 -1 Null D1: Mantissa D2: Number of decimal places [Completion codes] 0: Completed successfully 2: The data length is invalid. 3: The data number is invalid. 6: No option for cust
  • Page 14993.1.3 Reading a P-CODE Macro Variable (High-speed Response) [Description] Using this function, you can read a P-CODE variable or an extended P-CODE variable for macro executor. P-CODE variables #10000 to #19999 Extended P-CODE variables #20000 to #89999 For details of the P-CODE variables and extend
  • Page 1500[Output data structure] Top Address +0 (Function code) 59 +2 (Completion code) ? (See above description) +4 (Data length) L=6 +6 (Data number) N (N=Same as input data) +10 (Data attribute) M (M=Same as input data) +12 Mantissa Signed binary format in 4 bytes length D1 (4 bytes) +16 Number of decimal
  • Page 1501Integer type) When P-CODE variables are integer type, there is no "null" state. Value of the M D1 D2 P-CODE variable 1234 0 1234000 3 (Note) 1234 1 12340 1 1234 2 123400 2 1234 3 1234000 3 1234 4 12340000 4 0 1 0 1 M: Specified number of decimal places D1: Mantissa D2: Number of decimal places NOTE
  • Page 15023.1.4 Writing a P-CODE Macro Variable (Low-speed Response) [Description] Using this function, you can write value to a P-CODE variable or an extended P-CODE variable for macro executor. P-CODE variables #10000 to #19999 Extended P-CODE variables #20000 to #89999 For details of the P-CODE variables a
  • Page 1503You can define the type of P-CODE variables as a floating-point type or an integer type by the setting of CNC parameter No. 9033#3 and 9033#4. Floating-point type) When P-CODE variables are floating-point type, there is a "null" state on P-CODE variables that means the value is not defined. When you
  • Page 1504[Output data structure] Top Address +0 (Function code) 60 +2 (Completion code) ? (See above description) +4 (Data length) L=6 (L=Same as input data) +6 (Data number) N (N=Same as input data) +10 (Data attribute) M=0 (M=Same as input data) +12 Mantissa D1 (D1=Same as input data) +16 Number of decimal
  • Page 1505Replace the "5.4.17 Reading Modal Data (High-speed Response)" as follows. 3.1.5 Reading Modal Data (High-speed Response) Using this function, you can read modal information of CNC. Reading modal infomation of G-function (Data number=0 to 33, -1) [Description] Using this function, you can read modal
  • Page 1506Table3.1.5 (a) Modal information of G-function (part 1) Machining center system Lathe system Group number Code in a G code Code in a (Data type) G code group A series B series C series group 0 G00 0 G00 G00 G00 0 G01 1 G01 G01 G01 1 G02 2 G02 G02 G02 2 G02.2 10 G02.2 G02.2 G02.2 20 G02.3 12 G02.3 G0
  • Page 1507G42.5 9 G42.5 G42.5 G42.5 9 G42.6 11 G42.6 G42.6 G42.6 12 Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A PMC Supplemental Programming Manual 01 '05.12.26 H. Yonekura New registration DRAW.NO. B-63983EN/02-8 EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 19/32
  • Page 1508Table3.1.5 (b) Modal information of G-function (part 2) Machining center system Lathe system Group number Code in a G code Code in a (Data type) G code group A series B series C series group 7 G43 1 G25 G25 G25 0 G43.1 3 G26 G26 G26 1 G43.4 4 G43.5 5 G44 2 G49(G49.1) 0 8 G73 10 G22 G22 G22 1 G74 11
  • Page 1509Table3.1.5 (c) Modal information of G-function (part 3) Machining center system Lathe system Group number Code in a G code Code in a (Data type) G code group A series B series C series group 13 G54(G54.1) 0 G54(G54.1) G54(G54.1) G54(G54.1) 0 G55 1 G55 G55 G55 1 G56 2 G56 G56 G56 2 G57 3 G57 G57 G57
  • Page 1510[Completion codes] 0: Completed successfully 3: The data number is invalid 4: The data attribute is invalid Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A PMC Supplemental Programming Manual 01 '05.12.26 H. Yonekura New registration DRAW.NO. B-63983EN/02-8 EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 22/32
  • Page 1511[Output data structure] Each data reading (Data number=G code group number) Top Address +0 (Function code) 32 +2 (Completion code) ? (See above description) +4 (Data length) L (L=2) +6 (Data number) N (N=Same as input data) +8 (Data attribute) M (M=Same as input data) +10 Modal information of See "F
  • Page 15127 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Top Address +10 Code in a group 0 : Not specified in the group 1 : Specified in the group 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Top Address +11 0 Fig. 3.1.5 (a) Modal information of g-function Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A PMC Supplemental Programming Manual 01 '05.12.26 H. Yonekura New registration DRAW.NO.
  • Page 1513Reading modal information of other than G-function (Data number=100 to 126, -2) [Description] Using this function, you can read modal information of other than G-function. [Input data structure] Top Address +0 (Function code) 32 +2 (Completion code) - (Need not to be set) +4 (Data length) - (Need no
  • Page 1514Table3.1.5 (d) Modal information of other than G-function Data tyep Specified Address Description 100 B Second auxiliary function 101 D 102 E (Reserved) 103 F 104 H 105 L 106 M 107 S 108 T 109 R 110 P 111 Q 112 A 113 C 114 I 115 J 116 K 117 N 118 O 119 U 120 V 121 W 122 X 123 Y 124 Z 125 M2 126 M3 [
  • Page 1515[Output data structure] Each data reading (Data number=See Table 3.1.5 (b)) Top Address +0 (Function code) 32 +2 (Completion code) ? (See above description) +4 (Data length) L (L=6) +6 (Data number) N (N=Same as input data) +8 (Data attribute) M (M=Same as input data) +10 Modal information See "Fig.
  • Page 1516Data 4 bytes FLAG1 1 byte FLAG2 1 byte 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 : Positive 1 : Negative 0 : A decimal point not specified 1 : A decimal point specified 0 : Not specified in the current block 1 : Specified in the current block 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Number of decimal places Fig. 3.1.5 (b) Modal information of othe
  • Page 15174 CORRECTION OF THE MANUAL 4.1 LADDER LANGUAGE 4.1.1 EXIN (External Data Input : SUB 42) Replace the "CNC parameter" of "4.11.2 EXIN (External Data Input: SUB 42)" as follows. CNC parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6300 EEX EEX EXIN function of PMC 0: basic specification 1: extended specification NOT
  • Page 15184.1.2 Supplement to Functional Instruction's output(W1) Add the CAUTION to the following sections. Section of Title the manual 4.4.1 CTR (Counter : SUB 5) 4.4.2 CTRB (Fixed counter : SUB 56) 4.4.3 CTRC (Counter : SUB 55) 4.5.7 XMOVB (Binary Index Modifier Data Transfer : SUB 35) 4.5.8 XMOV (Indexed
  • Page 15194.2 WINDOW FUNCTIONS 4.2.1 Reading the Machine Position (Machine coordinates) of Controlled Axes (High-speed Response) Add the following to the "5.5.3 Reading the Machine Position (Machine Coordinates) of Controlled Axes". NOTE Update cycle of the machine position becomes faster by setting 1 to the
  • Page 15204.2.3 Supplement to Axes Information Add the NOTE to the following sections. Section of the manual Function code Title 5.5.2 27 Reading the absolute Position (Absolute Coordinates) of Controlled Axes (High-speed Response) 5.5.3 28 Reading the Machine Position (Machine Coordinates) of Controlled Axes
  • Page 1521TECHNICAL REPORT (MANUAL) NO. TMN 05/ Date 5. Oct. 2005 General Manager of Software Research Laboratory FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A PMC Supplemental Programming Manual 1. Communicate this report to: O Your information only O GE Fanuc-A, GE Fanuc-E FANUC Robotics CINCINNATI MILACRON O Machine to
  • Page 1522Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A PMC Supplemental Programming Manual Type of applied technical documents Series 30i/300i/300is-MODEL A Series 31i/310i/310is-MODEL A5 Name Series 31i/310i/310is-MODEL A Series 32i/320i/320is-MODEL A PMC Programming Manual Spec. No. /Ed. B-63983EN/02 Summary of Change New, A
  • Page 1523Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A PMC Supplemental Programming Manual Contents 1 SUMMARY............................................................................................................................................ 3 2 APPLIED SOFTWARE..........................................................
  • Page 15241 SUMMARY The following functions have been added to the PMC for Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A. • Expansion of Comment data display length on 7.2" LCD. • Additional specification of Window functions. ・ Reading a servo delay for controlled axes (with detection unit). ・ Reading an acceleration/decelerati
  • Page 15252 APPLIED SOFTWARE The "Expansion of Comment data display length on 7.2" LCD" will be applied to the following software. - CNC System software Software Drawing number Series Edition Series 30i/300i/300is-MODEL A A02B-0303-H501#G002 G002 CNC System Software A02B-0303-H501#G012 G012 A02B-0303-H501#G02
  • Page 15263 EXPANSION DISPLAY LENGTH ON 7.2" LCD OF COMMENT DATA New Keep-relay setting has been added to display more characters of comment onto Additional Information Line on 7.2" LCD when using Basic type of Symbol and Comment data. Add the following to the "2.2.11 System Keep Relay Address (K)". .7 .6 .5
  • Page 15274 ADDITIONAL WINDOW FUNCTIONS SPECIFICATION OF The following specification has been added to Window functions. (1) No. 30 "Reading the servo delay for controlled axes" New setting which reads a servo delay in the detection unit has been added. (2) No. 31 "Reading the acceleration/deceleration delay
  • Page 1528Replace the "1. Compatibility with Series 16i/18i/21i" in the "5. WINDOW FUNCTIONS". 1. Compatibility with Series 16i/18i/21i The specifications of following WINDOW functions on Series 30i/31i/32i-A are different from ones on Series 16i/18i/21i. • The new function "No.321 Reading a real type paramet
  • Page 15294.1 AXIS INFORMATION 4.1.1 Reading the Servo Delay for Controlled Axes (High-speed Response) Replace the "5.5.5 Reading the Servo Delay for Controlled Axes (High-speed Response)". [Description] The servo delay, which is the difference between the specified coordinates of CNC-controlled axes and the
  • Page 1530[Output data structure] When read a specified axis. Top Address +0 (Function code) 30 +2 (Completion code) ? (See above description) +4 (Data length) 4 +6 (Data number) N (N=Same as input data) +8 (Data attribute) M (M=Same as input data) +10 Servo delay Signed binary format in 4 bytes length. (4 by
  • Page 1531[Output data unit] - In case of the data number N=0 Input Increment system system IS-A IS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E mm, deg 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 inch 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001 - In case of the data number N=1 Detection unit Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A PMC Supplemental Programming M
  • Page 15324.1.2 Reading the Acceleration/Deceleration Delay on Controlled Axes (High-speed Response) Replace the "5.5.6 Reading the Acceleration/Deceleration Delay on Controlled Axes (High-speed Response). [Description] The acceleration/deceleration delay, which is the difference between the coordinates of co
  • Page 1533[Output data structure] When read a specified axis. Top Address +0 (Function code) 31 +2 (Completion code) ? (See above description) +4 (Data length) 4 +6 (Data number) N (N=Same as input data) +8 (Data attribute) M (M=Same as input data) +10 Acc./Dec. delay Signed binary format in 4 bytes length. (
  • Page 1534[Output data unit] - In case of the data number N=0 Input Increment system system IS-A IS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E mm, deg 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 inch 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001 - In case of the data number N=1 Detection unit Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A PMC Supplemental Programming M
  • Page 15355 CORRECTION OF THE MANUAL Replace the "2.5.1 Compatibility with the PMCs for the 16i/18i/21i-B". 30i/31i/32i-A PMC is highly compatible with the PMC-MODEL SB7 (PMC-SB7) and PMC-MODEL SA1 (PMC-SA1) for the Series 16i/18i/21i-MODEL B (16i/18i/21i-B) on the source level. Table 4.1.2 Compatibility with
  • Page 1536(6) The nonvolatile memory control keep relay (MWRTF and MWRTF2) has been changed from K16 to K909. (7) In the PMC-SA1 and loader control PMCs, the keep relay system area has been changed from "K17 to K20" to "K900 to K999". (8) Window function "Reading diagnosis data" is a Low-speed response type.